MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of their respective companies.
 Introduction
(1) Read this manual thoroughly and understand the product's functions and performance before starting
use.
(2) An effort has been made to describe special handling of this machine, but items that are not described
must be interpreted as "not possible".
(3) The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice. Mitsubishi will not be held liable for
any mistakes in the contents of this manual.
(4) If the contents of this manual are revised, the instruction manual sub-No. (*, A, B, ...) on the front of this
cover will be changed.

List of related manuals

The following manuals are available for reference.

Manual names
M60/60S Series Specifications Manual (BNP-B2210)
M60/60S/MELDASMAGIC64 PLC Interface Manual (BNP-B2211)
MELDAS MDS-C1 Series Specifications Manual (BNP-C3000)
MELDAS MDS-A/B Series Specifications Manual (BNP-B3759)
MELDAS MDS-B/SVJ2 Series Specifications Manual (BNP-B3937)
MELDAS MDS-B/SPJ2 Series Specifications Manual (BNP-B2164)
 Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine manufacturer, this manual, related manuals and
enclosed documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure
correct use. Thoroughly understand the basics, safety information and precautions of this numerical
controller before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".
When there is a great risk that the user could be subject to fatalities
DANGER or serious injuries if handling is mistaken.

When the user could be subject to fatalities or serious injuries if

WARNING handling is mistaken.

When the user could be subject to injuries or when physical damage

CAUTION could occur if handling is mistaken.

Note that even if the items is ranked as " CAUTION", incorrect handling could lead to serious results.
Important information is described in all cases, so please observe the items.

DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING
1. Items related to prevention of electric shocks
Do not operate the switches with wet hands, as this may lead to electric shocks.
Do not damage, apply excessive stress, place heavy things on or sandwich the cables, as this may
lead to electric shocks.
 CAUTION
1. Items related to noise
Always treat the shield cables indicated in this manual with grounding treatment such as cable
clamps.
Separate the signal wire from the drive line/power line when wiring.

2. Items related to installation

Install the NC Card on noncombustible material. Installation directly on or near combustible material
may lead to fires.
Always observe the installation direction.
Do not install or operate an NC Card that is damaged or that have missing parts.
Do not allow conductive foreign matter such as screws or metal chips or combustible foreign matter
such as oil enter the NC Card.
The NC Card are precision devices so do not drop or apply strong impacts on them.
Do not install the NC Card where it may be subject to cutting oil.

3. Items related to connection

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing so may
lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified connectors.
When using an inductive load such as relays, always connect a diode in parallel to the load as a
noise measure.
When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor serially to the load to
suppress rush currents.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect each PCB while the power is ON.
When using an RS-232C device as a peripheral device, caution will be required when connecting
and disconnecting the connector.
Always use a double-OFF type AC power supply switch on the device side, and connect/disconnect
the connector with the AC power supply on the device side OFF.

Switch AC socket
NC Unit Device
RS-232C

4. Items related to battery

If the battery voltage drop warning alarm occurs, the programs, tool data and parameters could be
damaged. Thus, reload each data with the input/output device after replacing the battery.
Do not short-circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.
 CONTENTS

I. CONNECTION MANUAL
1. OUTLINE.......................................................................................................................1
2. CONFIGURATION ........................................................................................................2
2.1 System Configuration List......................................................................................2
2.1.1 M64A/M64 System Configuration List............................................................2
2.1.2 M64AS/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S System Configuration List ..................3
2.2 List of Configuration Units .....................................................................................4
2.2.1 Control Unit ....................................................................................................4
2.2.2 Communication Terminal ...............................................................................5
2.2.3 Base I/O Unit..................................................................................................6
2.2.4 Remote I/O Unit .............................................................................................7
2.2.5 Scan I/O Card ................................................................................................7
2.2.6 Extended I/O Card .........................................................................................7
3. INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................8
3.1 General Specification ............................................................................................8
3.2 General System Diagram ......................................................................................10
3.2.1 M64A/M64......................................................................................................10
3.2.2 M64AS/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S ............................................................11
3.2.3 Example of Connection when Using V1/V2/SP for Drive Section ..................12
3.3 Heat Radiation Countermeasures .........................................................................13
3.4 Noise Countermeasures........................................................................................15
3.4.1 Connection of FG (Frame Ground) ................................................................15
3.4.2 Shield Clamping of Cables.............................................................................16
3.4.3 Connecting Spark Killers................................................................................17
3.5 Installation .............................................................................................................18
3.6 FG Connection of M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S .....................................................19
4. CONTROL UNIT ...........................................................................................................20
4.1 Outline of Control Unit ...........................................................................................20
4.1.1 Configuration of Type.....................................................................................20
4.1.2 Features of Each Unit ....................................................................................20
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)............................................21
4.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................21
4.2.2 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................22
4.2.3 Connection of External Emergency Stop .......................................................22
4.2.4 Connection of Communication Terminal ........................................................23
4.2.5 Connection of Base I/O Unit ..........................................................................23
4.2.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder ...................................................23
4.2.7 Connection of I/O Link (When using M64) .....................................................24
4.2.8 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................26
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MU032/MA031 Control Unit
(MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible) ............29
4.3.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................29
4.3.2 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................30
4.3.3 Connection of External Emergency Stop .......................................................30
4.3.4 Connection of Communication Terminal ........................................................31
4.3.5 Connection of Base I/O Unit ..........................................................................31
4.3.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder ...................................................31
4.3.7 Connection of I/O Link (When using MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S) .32
4.3.8 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................33
I
5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL ...................................................................................36
5.1 Outline of Communication Terminal ......................................................................36
5.1.1 Configuration of Type.....................................................................................36
5.1.2 Features of Each Unit ....................................................................................36
5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD) ....................................37
5.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................37
5.2.2 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................38
5.2.3 Connection of Control Unit.............................................................................38
5.2.4 Connection of NC Keyboard ..........................................................................38
5.2.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit ......................................................................39
5.2.6 Adjustment of Display Screen........................................................................39
5.2.7 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................40
5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD).................................................42
5.3.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................42
5.3.2 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................43
5.3.3 Connection of Control Unit.............................................................................43
5.3.4 Connection of NC Keyboard ..........................................................................43
5.3.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit ......................................................................44
5.3.6 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................45
5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)...................................................48
5.4.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................48
5.4.2 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................49
5.4.3 Connection of Control Unit.............................................................................49
5.4.4 Connection of NC Keyboard ..........................................................................50
5.4.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit ......................................................................51
5.4.6 Adjustment of Display Screen........................................................................51
5.4.7 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................52
5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD).............................54
5.5.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................54
5.5.2 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................55
5.5.3 Connection of Control Unit.............................................................................55
5.5.4 Connection of NC Keyboard ..........................................................................55
5.5.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit ......................................................................56
5.5.6 Adjustment of Display Screen........................................................................57
5.5.7 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................58
5.6 FCUA-EL10 Display Unit (9.5-type EL) * Cannot be used with M60S Series. ..60
5.6.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................60
5.6.2 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................60
5.6.3 Connection of NC Keyboard Unit...................................................................61
5.7 FCUA-CR10/CT100/CT120 Display Unit (9-type monochrome CRT) ...................62
5.7.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................62
5.7.2 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................62
5.7.3 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................63
5.7.4 Connection of NC Keyboard Unit...................................................................63
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and
FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit..........64
5.8.1 Names and Functions of Each Section..........................................................64
5.8.2 Connection of Control Unit.............................................................................65
5.8.3 Connection of Display Unit.............................................................................65
5.8.4 Connection of Power Supply..........................................................................67
5.8.5 Connector Pin Assignment ............................................................................68
5.8.6 Keyboard and Display Unit Installation Pitch .................................................71

II
6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT ..............................................................................74
6.1 Outline of I/O Unit ..................................................................................................74
6.1.1 Configuration of model name.........................................................................74
6.1.2 Configuration and functions of each unit........................................................74
6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing...........................................................75
6.3 Connection of Power Supply .................................................................................78
6.4 Connection of I/O Signal........................................................................................79
6.5 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection...............................................................81
6.6 Connection of Servo Drive Unit .............................................................................82
6.7 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder...........................................................83
6.8 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) .......................................................................84
6.9 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator ................................................................85
6.10 Connector Pin Assignment ..................................................................................87
7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT.........................................................................90
7.1 Outline of Remote I/O Unit ....................................................................................90
7.2 Names of Each Remote I/O Unit Section ..............................................................91
7.3 Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units ..............................92
7.4 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit .....................................................................94
7.5 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit ..................................................................96
7.6 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit .................................................................97
7.7 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit....................................................................98
7.8 Connection of FCUA-DX10 /14 Unit and Machine Control Signal...................99
7.9 Connection of FCUA-DX14 Unit and Analog Input/Output Signal ......................101
7.10 Connection of FCUA-DX11 Unit and Machine Control Signal..........................102
7.11 Connection of FCUA-DX12 Unit and Machine Control Signal..........................104
7.12 Cables .................................................................................................................106
8. Connection of Scan DI/DO..........................................................................................107
8.1 Outline ...................................................................................................................107
8.2 Hardware Interface ................................................................................................107
8.3 Connections...........................................................................................................110
9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377.................................115
9.1 Connection System Drawing .................................................................................115
9.2 Connection of Power Supply .................................................................................118
9.2.1 Connection of 1st Card's Power Supply.........................................................118
9.2.2 Connection of 2nd Card's Power Supply .......................................................119
9.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal ..................................................................................120
9.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection...............................................................122
9.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit .............................................................................123
9.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder...........................................................124
9.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) .......................................................................125
9.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator ................................................................126
9.9 Connector Pin Assignment ....................................................................................128
9.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection.........................................................131

III
10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378 ..............................132
10.1 Connection System Drawing ...............................................................................132
10.2 Connection of Power Supply ...............................................................................135
10.2.1 Connection of 1st Card's Power Supply.......................................................135
10.2.2 Connection of 2nd Card's Power Supply .....................................................136
10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal ................................................................................137
10.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection.............................................................141
10.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit ...........................................................................142
10.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder........................................................143
10.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor) .....................................................................144
10.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator ..............................................................145
10.9 Connector Pin Assignment ..................................................................................147
10.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection.......................................................150
10.11 Explanation of LED Function .............................................................................151
11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD ....................................................152
11.1 Outline .................................................................................................................152
11.2 Hardware Interface ..............................................................................................152
11.3 Connections.........................................................................................................155
12. OPTION CARD ...........................................................................................................159
12.1 External PLC Link I (M-NET Interface) ................................................................159
12.1.1 Names and Functions of Each Section........................................................159
12.1.2 Connector Pin Assignment ..........................................................................159
12.1.3 Connection with MELSEC............................................................................160
12.2 External PLC II (MELSEC bus connection) .........................................................161
12.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section........................................................161
12.2.2 Connection with MELSEC............................................................................161
12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit .................................................162
12.3.1 Connector Layout.........................................................................................162
12.3.2 Inserting the IC Card....................................................................................163
12.3.3 Connection of Ethernet Cable......................................................................164
12.4 Connection of Ethernet Function .........................................................................165
12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link....................................................................166
12.5.1 Names and Functions of Each Sections ......................................................166
12.5.2 Connector Pin Assignment ..........................................................................167
12.5.3 Connection with I/O device ..........................................................................167
13. CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL BATTERY UNIT ......................................................169
APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING.................................................................................170
Appendix 1.1 Control Unit Outline Drawing .................................................................170
Appendix 1.1.1 M64A Control Unit Outline Drawing ...............................................170
Appendix 1.1.2 M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S Control Unit Outline Drawing.............171
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing ............................................172
Appendix 1.2.1 FCUA-CT100/CT120 .....................................................................172
Appendix 1.2.2 FCUA-CR10...................................................................................173
Appendix 1.2.3 FCUA-KB10/KB12/EL10 ................................................................174
Appendix 1.2.4 FCUA-LD100 .................................................................................175
Appendix 1.2.5 FCUA-LD10 ...................................................................................176
Appendix 1.2.6 FCU6-DUT32 .................................................................................177
Appendix 1.2.7 FCU6-DUT33 .................................................................................178
Appendix 1.2.8 FCUA-KB20/KB30 .........................................................................179
Appendix 1.2.9 FCU6-KB021/KB031......................................................................180
Appendix 1.2.10 FCU6-DUN22...............................................................................181
IV
 Appendix 1.2.11 FCU6-KB022................................................................................182
Appendix 1.2.12 Key Arrangement .........................................................................183
Appendix 1.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing...............................................................184
Appendix 1.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing ..........................................................185
Appendix 1.5 HR347/357 (Scan I/O) Card Outline Drawing........................................186
Appendix 1.6 FCU6-HR377 Unit Outline Drawing.......................................................187
Appendix 1.7 FCU6-HR378 Unit Outline Drawing.......................................................188
Appendix 1.8 QY231 Card Outline Drawing ................................................................189
Appendix 1.9 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR377 Layout ...............................190
Appendix 1.10 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR378 Layout .............................191
Appendix 1.11 Manual Pulse Generator (HD60) Outline Drawing ..............................192
Appendix 1.12 Synchronous Feed Encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) Outline Drawing....193
Appendix 1.13 HR591 (I/O link relay branching wire) Card Outline Drawing ..............194
Appendix 1.14 HR211 Card Outline Drawing ..............................................................194
Appendix 1.15 QY261 Card Outline Drawing ..............................................................195
Appendix 1.16 External Battery Unit Outline Drawing .................................................196
Appendix 1.17 Outline and Installation Outline Drawing
for Grounding Plate and Clamp Fitting ..........197
Appendix 1.18 F Installation Plate Outline Drawing ....................................................198
APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS..................................................................................199
Appendix 2.1 SH21 cable (Servo drive unit)................................................................201
Appendix 2.2 SH41 cable (Remote I/O) ......................................................................201
Appendix 2.3 R301 cable (DI/DO) ...............................................................................201
Appendix 2.4 F010 cable (Control unit interface) ........................................................202
Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 cable (Manual pulse generator)......................................203
Appendix 2.6 F030/031/032 cable (RS-232C).............................................................204
Appendix 2.7 F040/041 cable (Synchronous feed encoder) .......................................205
Appendix 2.8 F050 cable (Control unit interface) ........................................................205
Appendix 2.9 F070 cable (24VDC input) .....................................................................206
Appendix 2.10 F120 cable (Emergency stop) .............................................................206
Appendix 2.11 F190 cable (RS-232C device) .............................................................207
Appendix 2.12 F240 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (External battery unit).................208
Appendix 2.13 FCUA-R031 Cable Manufacturing Drawing
(Analog signal input /output) ................................................................209
Appendix 2.14 FCUA-R211 Cable Manufacturing Drawing
(Communication terminal communication) ..........................................210
Appendix 2.15 FCUA-R220 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (24VDC input) .................211
Appendix 2.16 FCUA-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing
[External PLC link II (MELSEC bus connection) A1S type] .................212
Appendix 2.17 FCUA-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing
[External PLC link II (MELSEC bus connection) A3N type] .................214
Appendix 2.18 ENC-SP1 cable (Spindle drive unit) ....................................................216
Appendix 2.19 ENC-SP2 cable (FR-TK) .....................................................................216
Appendix 2.20 M-TM Terminator.................................................................................217
Appendix 2.21 R-TM Terminator .................................................................................218
APPENDIX 3 LIST OF CONNECTOR SETS...................................................................219

V
APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES.........................................................220
Appendix 4.1 Introduction............................................................................................220
Appendix 4.2 EMC Directives......................................................................................221
Appendix 4.3 EMC Measures......................................................................................222
Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure......................................................................................223
Appendix 4.4.1 Measures for Control Panel Body ..................................................223
Appendix 4.4.2 Measures for Door .........................................................................224
Appendix 4.4.3 Measures for Power Supply...........................................................225
Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel ................................................................226
Appendix 4.5.1 Precautions for Wiring in Panel......................................................226
Appendix 4.5.2 NC Unit Grounding Wire ................................................................227
Appendix 4.5.3 Shield Treatment of Cables ...........................................................228
Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures .......................................................................230
Appendix 4.6.1 Shield Clamp Fitting.......................................................................230
Appendix 4.6.2 Ferrite Core....................................................................................231
Appendix 4.6.3 Surge Protector..............................................................................232
Appendix 4.6.4 Selection of Stabilized Power Supply ............................................235
APPENDIX 5 PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE TO UL/c-UL STANDARDS...........236
APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES...........237
Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing...........................................................................237
Appendix 6.1.1 Target Products .............................................................................237
Appendix 6.1.2 Handling by User ...........................................................................238
Appendix 6.1.3 Reference ......................................................................................240
Appendix 6.2 Issuing Domestic Law of the United States for Primary Lithium
Battery Transportation ...........................................................................241
Appendix 6.2.1 Outline of Regulation .....................................................................241
Appendix 6.2.2 Target Products .............................................................................241
Appendix 6.2.3 Handling by User ...........................................................................241
Appendix 6.2.4 Reference ......................................................................................241
APPENDIX 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE DEVICES...............................................242

VI
II. MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS ...............................................................1
1.1 HR071 Card...........................................................................................................1
1.2 HR081/082/083 Card.............................................................................................2
1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card......................................................................................4
1.4 HR171 Card...........................................................................................................6
1.5 HR211 Card...........................................................................................................8
1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards.................................................................................9
1.7 HR357 Card...........................................................................................................11
1.8 HR377 Card...........................................................................................................13
1.9 HR378 Card...........................................................................................................15
1.10 Memory Cassette HR4 .................................................................................18
1.11 HR513 Card.........................................................................................................19
1.12 HR531/534 Cards................................................................................................21
1.13 HR571 Card.........................................................................................................25
1.14 HR591 Card.........................................................................................................26
1.15 HR831 Card.........................................................................................................27
1.16 HR832 Card.........................................................................................................28
1.17 QY231 Card.........................................................................................................30
1.18 QY287 Card.........................................................................................................32
1.19 RX211/RX212 Card.............................................................................................33
1.20 RX213 Card.........................................................................................................35
1.21 RX215 Card.........................................................................................................37
1.22 HR213 Card.........................................................................................................39
1.23 RX291 Card.........................................................................................................41
1.24 HR576 Card.........................................................................................................42
2. TROUBLESHOOTING..................................................................................................45
2.1 List of Unit LEDs....................................................................................................45
2.2 Troubleshooting.....................................................................................................47
2.2.1 Confirmation of Trouble State ........................................................................47
2.2.2 When in Trouble.............................................................................................48
3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE..........52
3.1 Maintenance Tools ................................................................................................52
3.2 Maintenance Items ................................................................................................52
3.2.1 Escutcheon ....................................................................................................53
3.2.2 LCD Panel......................................................................................................53
3.2.3 ATA Memory Card .........................................................................................53
3.3 Replacement Methods...........................................................................................54
3.3.1 Cable..............................................................................................................54
3.3.2 Durable Parts .................................................................................................56
3.3.3 Control Unit ....................................................................................................58
3.3.4 Control PCB ...................................................................................................60
3.3.5 Memory Cassette...........................................................................................62
3.3.6 High-speed Program Server ..........................................................................63

VII
I. CONNECTION MANUAL
 1. OUTLINE

1. OUTLINE
This manual explains the items required for installing and connecting the MELDAS60/60S Series.
Read this manual thoroughly and understand the product's functions and performance before starting
use.
This manual assumes that all functions are added, but the actually delivered device may not have all
functions.

I-1
 2. CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration List

2. CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration List
2.1.1 M64A/M64 System Configuration List

CN1B (required for relative pos.

detection system spec.)

I-2
 2. CONFIGURATION
2.1 System Configuration List

2.1.2 M64AS/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S System Configuration List

position detection system

for relative
specifications)
CN1B (required
/DUN22

I-3
 2. CONFIGURATION
2.2 List of Configuration Units

2.2 List of Configuration Units

2.2.1 Control Unit
(1) Control unit
Type Function Configuration element Details
FCU6-MU011 M64 control unit set Main control card (HR113) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA64A-B, FCA64-B system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
compatible unit Communication card (HR531) noncompliant unit
Case set
FCU6-MU015 M64 control unit set Main control card (HR113) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA64-P (optical) system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
compatible unit Communication card (HR541) noncompliant unit
Case set
FCU6-MU021 M65 control unit set Main control card (HR114) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA65-A, FCA65-P1 system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
compatible unit Communication card (HR171) noncompliant unit
Case set
FCU6-MU023 M65 control unit set Main control card (HR114) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA65-P1 (optical) system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
compatible unit Communication card (HR541) noncompliant unit
FCA65V-P1 (optical) system Case set Use when there is no high-speed
compatible unit program server function
Use FCU6-MA031 when server
function is provided
FCU6-MU032 M64AS/64S/65S control unit Main control card (HR116) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
set 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
FCA64AS/64S/65S system Communication card (HR171) noncompliant unit
compatible unit Case set M64AS is used as a set with
FCU6-HR410
M64S is used as a set with
FCU6-HR411
M65S is used as a set with
FCU6-HR415
FCU6-MA031 M66/M66S control unit set Main control card (HR146) Export Trade Control Ordinance and
FCA66-A/FCA66S system 24V input power supply card (HR083) Foreign Trade Ordinance
compatible unit Communication card (HR171) compliant unit
Case set M66S is used as a set with
FCU6-HR415

(2) Control unit options

Type Function Configuration element Details
HR513 External PLC link II (bus Control card (HR513) Dedicated for MELDAS60/60S
connection, interface) series
Mounted into control unit's Type connected to MELSEC
extension slot A1S, A†N, A†A, A†U Series
HR571 External PLC link I (M-NET Control card (HR571) Dedicated for MELDAS60 series
interface) Type connected to MELSEC
Mounted into control unit's AJ71C22 unit (serial link)
extension slot
FCU6-EP203-1 (1) High-speed program Control card for IC card (HR831) (1) Dedicated for MELDAS64S/
server Communication card for Ethernet 65/65S/66/66S
(2) Data input/output (HR832) (2) Dedicated for MELDAS60S
Ethernet communication Connection cable series
ATA memory card interface +
IC card Ethernet interface
HR576 CC-Link card Control card (HR576) Dedicated for MELDAS60S series

I-4
 2. CONFIGURATION
2.2 List of Configuration Units

2.2.2 Communication Terminal

Type Function Configuration element Details
FCU6-DUT32 10.4-type monochrome LCD 10.4-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
display unit (separated type) Control card (RX215) Control card 24VDC input
FCU6-DUN22 8.4-type color LCD unit 8.4-type LCD,Escutcheon Used as a set with FCU6-KB022
(separated type) Control card (HR213) Control card 24VDC input
FCU6-DUN33 10.4-type color LCD display 10.4-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
unit (separated type) Control card (RX215) Control card 24VDC input
FCUA-LD100 7.2-type monochrome LCD 7.2-type LCD, Escutcheon Control card 24VDC input
liquid crystal (integrated Control card (RX213), Key switches
type)
FCUA-LD10 7.2-type monochrome LCD 7.2-type LCD, Escutcheon Used as a set with FCUA-KB20.
display unit (separated type) Control card (RX213) Control card 24VDC input
FCUA-EL10 9.5-type EL display unit 9.5-type EL, Escutcheon Used as a set with
(separated type) FCUA-KB10/KB12.
Control card EL common 24VDC
input
FCUA-CT100 9-type monochrome CRT + 9-type monochrome CRT, Escutcheon Control card 24VDC input
communication terminal Control card (RX211), Key switches CRT section 100VAC input
(integrated type, machining
center system sheet)
FCUA-CT120 9-type monochrome CRT + 9-type monochrome CRT, Escutcheon Control card 24VDC input
communication terminal Control card (RX211), Key switches CRT section 100VAC input
(integrated type, lathe
system sheet)
FCUA-CR10 9-type monochrome CRT 9-type monochrome CRT, Escutcheon Used as a set with
communication terminal FCUA-KB10/KB12.
(separated type) Control card 24VDC input
CRT section 100VAC input
FCUA-KB10 Communication terminal Key switch Used as a set with FCUA-EL10 or
(separated type, machining Control card FCUA-CR10.
center system sheet)
FCUA-KB12 Communication terminal Key switch Used as a set with FCUA-EL10 or
(separated type, lathe Control card FCUA-CR10.
system sheet)
FCUA-KB20 Communication terminal Key switch Use as a set with FCU6-DUT32/
(separated type, machining DUN33 or FCUA-LD10
center system sheet)
FCUA-KB021 Communication terminal Key switch Use as a set with FCU6-DUT32/
(separated type, machining DUN33
center system sheet) KB20 with changed outline
dimensions
FCU6-KB022 Communication terminal Key switch Used as a set with FCU6-DUN22
(separated type/machining
center system sheet)
FCUA-KB30 Communication terminal Key switch Use as a set with FCU6-DUT32/
(separated type, lathe DUN33 or FCUA-LD10
system sheet)
FCUA-KB031 Communication terminal Key switch Use as a set with FCU6-DUT32/
(separated type, lathe DUN33
system sheet) KB30 with changed outline
dimensions

I-5
 2. CONFIGURATION
2.2 List of Configuration Units

2.2.3 Base I/O Unit

Type Function Configuration element Details
FCU6-DX350 Sink input + sink output I/O card (HR325) DI/DO input/output sink input 48 points + sink
base I/O unit Aluminum panel for panel output 48 points
installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
Additional I/O card (HR211) input 8 points
Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
Servo drive unit interface 2 part systems
RS-232C device 1ch, manual pulse generator 3ch
FCU6-DX351 Source input + source I/O card (HR335) DI/DO input/output source input 48 points +
output Aluminum panel for panel source output 48 points
base I/O unit installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
Additional I/O card (HR211) input 8 points
Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
Servo drive unit interface 2 part systems
RS-232C device 1ch, manual pulse generator 3ch
FCU6-DX450 Sink input + sink output I/O card (HR327) DI/DO input/output sink input 64 points + sink
base I/O unit Aluminum panel for panel output 64 points
installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
Additional I/O card (HR211) input 8 points
Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
Servo drive unit interface 2 part systems
RS-232C device 1ch, manual pulse generator 3ch
FCU6-DX451 Source input + source I/O card (HR337) DI/DO input/output source input 64 points +
output Aluminum panel for panel source output 64 points
base I/O unit installation Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
Additional I/O card (HR211) input 8 points
Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
Servo drive unit interface 2 part systems
RS-232C device 1ch, manual pulse generator 3ch
FCU6-HR377 Source input + 200mA I/O card (HR377) DI/DO input/output source input 64 points +
source output Reinforcing fitting source output 64 points
base I/O unit Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
input 8 points
Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
Servo drive unit interface 2 part systems
RS-232C device 1ch, manual pulse generator 3ch
FCU6-HR378 Source input + 200mA I/O card (HR378) DI/DO input/output source input 64 points +
source output Reinforcing fitting source output 64 points
base I/O unit Synchronous feed encoder interface 1ch, Skip
Common separated, with input 8 points
output protection fuse Remote I/O unit interface 2ch
Servo drive unit interface 2 part systems
RS-232C device 1ch, manual pulse generator 3ch

I-6
 2. CONFIGURATION
2.2 List of Configuration Units

2.2.4 Remote I/O Unit

Type Function Configuration Details
element
FCUA-DX100 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
FCUA-DX110 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX321-1 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
FCUA-DX120 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX321 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
+ analog output + analog output 1 point
FCUA-DX140 Sink/source input + sink output RX311 + RX341 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
+ analog input/output + analog input 4 points + analog output 1 point
FCUA-DX101 Sink/source input + source RX312 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
output
FCUA-DX111 Sink/source input + source RX312 + RX322-1 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
output
FCUA-DX121 Sink/source input + source RX312 + RX322 DI/DO = 64 points/48 points
output + analog output + analog output 1 point
FCUA-DX141 Sink/source input + source RX312 + RX341 DI/DO = 32 points/32 points
output + analog input/output + analog input 4 points + analog output 1 point

2.2.5 Scan I/O Card

Type Function Configuration Details
element
HR357 Scan I/O (source) HR357 Scan DI/DO = 64 points/64 points
DI/DO = 32 points /32 points
HR347 Scan I/O (sink) HR347 Scan DI/DO = 64 points /64 points
DI/DO = 32 points /32 points

2.2.6 Extended I/O Card

Type Function Configuration Details
element
QY231 Sink/source input + source QY231 Sink/source input 64 points + source output 48
output points

I-7
 3. INSTALLATION
3.1 General Specification

3. INSTALLATION
3.1 General Specification
(1) Environment conditions in control part
Unit name Control unit
Type FCU6-MU011/MU015/MU021/MU023/MU032/MA031/MA034
Ambient During operation 0 to 55°C
General specifications

temperature During storage –20 to 60°C

Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient During operation
Short term, to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
humidity
During storage to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less (during operation)
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less (during operation)
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
specifications

Power voltage 24VDC±5% Ripple ±5% (P-P)

Power

Instantaneous stop tolerance time Depends on the specifications of the 24VDC power supply used.

Current consumption 1.5A

Heating value 20W (Standard specification)
Mass 1.1kg
Unit size Refer to Appendix.
(Note 1) The period is within one month.

(2) Environment conditions in electric cabinet

Unit name Base I/O unit
Type FCU6-DX350/351/450/451 FCU6-HR377/378
Ambient During operation 0 to 55°C
General specifications

temperature During storage –20 to 60°C

Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient During operation
Short term, to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
humidity
During storage to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less (during operation)
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less (during operation)
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust or oil mist
24VDC±5%
specifications

Power voltage
Ripple ±5% (P-P) 5VDC±5%
Power

24V 13A (Note 3)

24V 1.2A (Note 2)
Current consumption 5V 1.0A (when using as
24V max. 5.0A (Note 3)
second unit)
Heating value Max. 30W (Note 3) Max. 50W (Note 3)
Mass 2kg
Unit size Refer to Appendix. 195mm (W) × 280mm (H)
(Note 1) The period is within one month.
(Note 2) Amount consumed by control circuit
(Note 3) Differs according to the number of machine input operation points and the load and number of points
connected to the machine output. The maximum value applies when all points are ON.

I-8
 3. INSTALLATION
3.1 General Specification

Unit name Communication terminal

FCUA-CT FCUA- FCUA- FCU6- FCUA- FCUA- FCUA- FCU6-DUT32
100/120 CR10 EL10 DUN22 KB10/ KB20/30 LD10/ 100 FCU6-DUN33
Type KB12 FCU6-
KB021/
022/031
Ambient During operation 0 to 55°C 0 to 50°C
tempe- During storage
General specifications

rature –20 to 65°C –20 to 60°C

During operation Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient
Short term, to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
humidity
During storage to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less (during operation)
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less (during operation)
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust
Power noise 1kV (P-P)
Single-phase
100 VAC to 115 VAC
Power specifications

–15% +10%
50/60Hz ±5% 24VDC±5%
Power voltage Ripple ±5% (P-P) Ripple ±5% (P-P)
24VDC
—
±5%
Instantaneous stop
20ms or less
tolerance time
100V, 0.4A 100V, 24V, 24V 24V,
Current consumption — 24V, 0.9A 24V, 0.9A
24V, 0.6A 0.4A 0.9A 0.9A 0.6A
Heating value 55W 40W 20W 16W 15W — 20W 20W
Mass 4.8kg 4.2kg 1.2kg 2.5kg 0.7kg 0.4kg 1.2kg 1.8kg
Unit size Refer to Appendix.
(Note 1) The period is within one month.

Unit name Remote I/O unit

Type FCUA-DX10† FCUA-DX11† FCUA-DX12† FCUA-DX14†
Ambient During operation 0 to 55°C
tempe- During storage
General specifications

rature –20 to 65°C

During operation Long term, to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Ambient
Short term, to 95% RH (with no dew condensation) (Note 1)
humidity
During storage to 75% RH (with no dew condensation)
Vibration resistance 4.9m/s2 or less (during operation)
Shock resistance 29.4m/s2 or less (during operation)
Working atmosphere No corrosive gases, dust
Power noise 1kV (P-P)
specifications

Power voltage 24VDC±5% Ripple ±5% (P-P)

Power

Instantaneous stop
—
tolerance time
Current consumption 24V 0.7A (Note 2) 24V 1.5A (Note 2) 24V 0.7A (Note 2)
Heating value Max. 25W (Note 3) Max. 30W (Note 3) Max. 30W (Note 3)
Mass 470g 570g 590g 550g
Unit size Refer to Appendix.
(Note 1) The period is within one month.
(Note 2) Amount consumed by control circuit
(Note 3) Differs according to the number of machine input operation points and the load and number of points
connected to the machine output. The maximum value applies when all points are ON.

I-9
 3. INSTALLATION
3.2 General System Diagram

3.2 General System Diagram

3.2.1 M64A/M64
Com m un ic ation term ina l
R S T 3-phase 200VAC to 230VAC CT 100/C T120/D UT 32/D U N33/LD 100/LD10/C R 10 /
-15%, +10% KB10/KB12/KB 20 /K B021/KB30/KB031
×
×
×

Circuit protector
<I

R emote I/O unit

Operation
DX1 panel
MC D CIN RIO 1 R IO2

CR02 CR01 CR05 MC link B

U R211
terminator
R-TM
or
ON OFF F070 F070
24VD C 24VD C R211
MC
To next remote I/O unit
MC
Insert when required

Power supply Communication card

HR083 HR531
FUA64A, FCA64: FCU6-MU011+FCU6-HR412
OT release switch EMG
< ↓ EMG

F120
RA
Control unit
U

AUX2

24VDC
Stabilized 24VDC AUX1 CF11 CF10
power supply

○ AC INPUT ○ U
~
+S F070
(L
○ AC
+V ○ SH21
(N
-S ○ 24VDC (R000) F050 F010
○ FG O UT PU T -V ○

Ba s e I/ O un it CF10
RS- 232C
CF11 F032 device
SIO

Ma nual pulse
F020/F021/F022
HANDLE g enera to r
FCUA-HD6 0

R301 Machine electric

CF31 to 34 cabinet

F040/F041 S ynchro nous fe ed

ENC en co der
O SE10 24-3-1 5-68
F070
24VD C DCIN F101 Skip signal
SKIP Max. 8 points
SV1 SV2 RIO1 RIO2

Machine control relay/con tact

Rem ote I/O unit
SH21 DX1 R
(R000) R211 R
DCIN RIO1 RIO2

F070 R211
To servo drive unit 2 4V DC
To next remote I/O unit
MC link B terminator
R-TM

* The R200 cable can also be used for the +24V power supply cable F070.
The R000 cable can be used for the servo drive unit's communication cable and communication
terminal's communication cable SH21.

I-10
 3. INSTALLATION
3.2 General System Diagram

3.2.2 M64AS/M64S/M65/M65S/M66/M66S
C om m unica tio n t erm ina l
R S T 3-phase 200VAC to 230VAC C T100/C T 120/D U T3 2/D U N 33/LD 100/LD 10/ CR 10/DU N 22(N ote 1)/
-15%, +10%
KB10/KB1 2/K B20/KB021/KB30/KB03 1/K B022(N ote 1)
×
×
×

Circuit protector
<I

Remote I/O unit

Operation
D X1 panel
MC D CI N R IO1 R IO2

CR02 CR01 CR05 R211 MC li nk B

U
termina to r
R-TM
F070 or
ON OFF 24VD C 24VD C F070
R211
MC SH21 (R000)
To next remote I/O unit
MC
Insert when required
Control unit IC
Ethernet
M65: FCU6-MU021 communication
Power card
supply Opt ion s lot M64 S/M65S: FCU6-MU032 device
HR083 RT2 RT1 M66/M66S: FCU6-MA031 10BaseT
100BaseTX
IC card
EMG (HR831)

Ca s se tte m em o ry fo r

C as se tte m em o ry fo r
OT release switch

fun cti on e xp a ns io n
EMG Ethernet
< ↓
(HR832)

ma i nte n an ce
F120
RA
U

AUX1 AUX2
24VDC
Stabilized 24VDC CF11 CF10
power supply
Communic ation U (Basic configuration）
○ AC INPUT +S ○ card HR171
~ F070 F050 F010 FCA65 : FCU6-MU02 1+FCU6 -HR4 12
(L +V ○
○ AC FCA66 : FCU6-MU02 1+FCU6 -HR4 12
(N
-S ○
24VDC FCA64 AS: FCU6-MU032 +FCU6-HR410
○ FG OU TPU T -V ○ FCA64 S : FCU6-MU032+FCU6-HR410/FCU6-HR450
FCA65 S : FCU6-MU032+FCU6-HR411/FCU6-HR451
U FCA66 S : FCU6-MA0 31+FCU6-HR415/FCU6-HR455
Base I/O unit CF10

F032 RS-232 C
CF11
SIO device

Ma nual pulse
F020/F021/F022 gener ato r
HANDLE
FCUA-HD60

R301 Machine electric

CF31 to 34 c abinet

F040/F041 Synchrono us feed

ENC encoder
OSE 1024- 3-15 -6 8
F070
24VD C DCIN F101 Skip signal
SKIP Max . 8 points
SV1 SV2 RIO1 RIO2
U

Machine control rela y/co ntact

R em ote I/O unit
SH21 R
D X1
(R000) R211 R
DCIN RIO 1 RIO 2

R211
24VD C F070
To servo drive unit To next remote I /O unit
MC lin k B te rmin ator
R-TM

* The R200 cable can also be used for the +24V power supply cable F070.
The R000 cable can be used for the servo drive unit's communication cable and communication
terminal's communication cable SH21.

(Note 1) FCU6-DUN22 and FCU6-KB022 cannot be used with M65/M66.

I-11
 3. INSTALLATION
3.2 General System Diagram

3.2.3 Example of Connection when Using V1/V2/SP for Drive Section

3-phase 200VAC to 230VAC
RST
×
×
×

Cirquit protector
<I

Connect to base I/O unit

MC

Note (1)

(Absolute position detection

Servo drive unit Spindle drive unit (Absolute
system value specification)
specification)
MDS- □ -V1/V2-□□ MDS- □ -SP- □□
Note (2)
SH21 cable SH21 cable SH21 cable Battery
CN1A CN1B CN1A CN1B
unit

CN4 CN4
MDS-A-BT-4 (3/4-axis)
L+ L+ MDS-A-BT-2 (2-axis)
L- L-
L11 L11 MDS-BTCASE
L21 L21 MR-BAT
AC servomotor Spindle motor MC1
U U
SM V IM V
W W
E E Power
U U supply unit

ENC CN2 PLG CN5 L1 L2 L3 E

Motor end U
detector U U

MC1

AC reactor B-AL

(Note 1) The drive section connection will differ according to the configuration of the servo drive unit
and servo motor being used.
(Note 2) The R000 cable has the same specifications (connector types and connections) as the SH21
cable.
(Note 3) When connecting the spindle drive unit, set the axis No. to the value after the last servo axis.
(Note 4) Connect the power supply unit to the final axis where a battery unit or a terminator is
connected.

CAUTION
Separate the signal wire and drive line/power line when wiring.

I-12
 3. INSTALLATION
3.3 Heat Radiation Countermeasures

3.3 Heat Radiation Countermeasures

Please refer to following method for heat radiation countermeasures.

Example of heat radiation countermeasures

<Hypothetical conditions>
(1) Average temperature in cabinet : T ≤ 55°C
(2) Cabinet peripheral temperature : Ta ≤ 0°C to 45°C
(3) Internal temperature rise value : ∆T = T–Ta (max) = 10°C

Procedures for heat design and verification <Supplement>

(1) Refer to "3.1 General Specification" for
Calculate total heat radiation of each
the heat generated by each unit.
mounted unit (W) (2) Enclosed cabinet (thin steel plate)
cooling capacity calculation equation
Calculate cabinet’s cooling capacity W1 = U × A ×∆T
(W1) U: 6W/m2 × °C
... with internal agitating fan
W ≤ W1 4W/m2 × °C
Comparison of W and W1
... without internal agitating fan
W > W1
A: Effective heat radiation area (m2)
∆T: Internal temperature rise value (10°C)
Selection of heat exchanger
(Area where heat can be radiated from cabinet)
<Caution>
Mounting design When calculating the effective heat
radiation area,do not include the parts
Collection of internal temperature rise that contact other objects.
distribution data (3) Points of caution for heat radiation
countermeasures when designing
∆T ≤ 10°C mounting state
Evaluation * Consider convection in cabinet
(eliminate heat spots)
∆T>10°C * Collect hot air at suction port in heat
Improvements exchanger cabinet.
(4) Criterion for internal temperature rise
distribution data
Completion ∆ T (average value) ≤ 10°C
∆Tmax (maximum value) ≤ 15°C
R (inconsistency ∆Tmax – ∆Tmin) ≤ 6°C
(Evaluate existence of heat spots)

I-13
 3. INSTALLATION
3.3 Heat Radiation Countermeasures

The following shows an example of heat radiation countermeasures for the operation box. Because heat
will accumulate in the upper portions of the communication terminal, install an agitating fan as required.

<Operation box outline example (provisional)>

Heat radiation area (A):

Communication
except front, bottom surface
terminal
A = 0.6 × 0.12+0.6 × 0.5+0.12 × 0.5 × 2
(Top surface) (Rear surface) (Both sides surface)

2
≒ 0.49 (m )

500
(Agitating fan)
Heating value (W)
• Power capacity = 24V × 5A = 120W
• Power consumption = 24V × 3A = 72W
(Typ)
• Heating value
Front part
Power consumption
= – Power consumption
Power efficiency
72
= – 72
0.7
120
≒ 31 (W)
600

<Examination of agitating fan necessity>

1. Temperature standard

(1) Temperature standard in cabinet T ≤ 55°C (10.4-type LCD ... 50°C)

(each unit peripheral)
(2) Cabinet peripheral temperature Ta = 0 to 45°C (10.4-type LCD ... 40°C)
(3) Internal temperature rise value ∆T = T − Ta(max) = 10°C

2. Cooling capacity of operation box (W1)

W1 = U × A × ∆T
∆T = Internal temperature rise value (10°C)
2
U = 6W/m •°C <with internal agitating fan>
2
4W/m •°C <without internal agitating fan>
2
A = Effective heat radiation area (m )

. .
(1) With internal agitating fan : W1 = 6 × 0.49 × 10 = 29.4W =. 31W→∆T =. 10.5°C

.
(2) Without internal agitating fan : W1 = 4 × 0.49 × 10 = 19.6W<31W→∆T =. 15.8°C

I-14
 3. INSTALLATION
3.4 Noise Countermeasures

3.4 Noise Countermeasures

3.4.1 Connection of FG (Frame Ground)
The frame should basically be grounded at one ground point.
Connect the control unit and base I/O unit's 0V (RG) to the FG on the +24V stabilized power supply side.

Communication terminal

I-15
 3. INSTALLATION
3.4 Noise Countermeasures

3.4.2 Shield Clamping of Cables

The shield cable connected to the control unit, base I/O unit, servo drive unit and spindle drive unit must
be connected to the ground by using clamp fitting to stabilize operation while preventing malfunctioning
due to noise.
Example of connection with clamp fitting

(1) Peel part of the cable sheath and expose the shield as shown in
the drawing.
Press the exposed part against the grounding plate with the
cable clamp fittings.
(2) If the cable is thin, clamp several together in a bunch.
(3) Use adequate force when tightening the cable so that the wire
material is not damaged.
(4) Connect each grounding plate together and ground them at one
point.

Refer to Appendix 1.17 about the outline drawing of clamp fittings and grounding plate.

I-16
 3. INSTALLATION
3.4 Noise Countermeasures

3.4.3 Connecting Spark Killers

Connect a spark killer on the coil or contact in parallel for noise countermeasures.
Use spark killers which are 0.033 to 0.1µF, 10 to 120Ω.

Contact

Spark
killer

killer
Spark
Coil
E

I-17
 3. INSTALLATION
3.5 Installation

3.5 Installation
Each unit is installed in the sealed structure cabinet as a principle. Before installing into the cabinet, refer
to the following drawing and secure sufficient space allowing for each unit's heat dissipation and cable
wiring lead-in space.
(1) Install each unit vertically so that the front is visible.
(2) Provide sufficient space allowing for each unit's heat dissipation and cable wiring.

CAUTION

Install the control unit and communication terminal on noncombustible material.

Installation directly on or near combustible material may lead to fires.
Always observe the installation direction.
Do not install or operate a control unit or communication terminal that is damaged or that
has missing parts.
The control unit and communication terminal are precision devices so do not drop or
apply strong impacts on them.

I-18
 3. INSTALLATION
3.6 Connection of M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S FG

3.6 FG Connection of M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S

The communication card HR171 used with the M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S must be connected to a
dedicated FG wire separate from the control unit FG. Refer to the FG cable drawing and separately
connect to the HR171 card FG terminal TFG.

Control unit FG

HR171 FG

Connect to the FG
terminal block with the
shortest distance.

HR171 card FG cable assembly drawing

Protection tube or connector housing

AMP: 171809-2 (black)

Recommended terminal type: Crimp terminal

AMP 250 Series Select according
170232-2 (for AWG 20-14) to the terminal
170234-2 (for AWG 12-10) block being used.

HR171 applicable tab shape

I-19
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.1 Outline of Control Unit

4. CONTROL UNIT
4.1 Outline of Control Unit

The installation methods for the control unit are common for all series. Select the optimum NC system
that matches the application from the various types of units.

MELDAS64/64A control unit MELDAS64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S

control unit

4.1.1 Configuration of Type

Control unit
FCU6–MU011
011: MELDAS64 (FCA64-A/64-B system compatible)
021: MELDAS65 (FCA65-A/65-P1 system compatible)
031: MELDAS66/66S/66-P1 (FCA66-B/66S/66-P1 system compatible)
032: MELDAS64AS/64S/65S (FCA64AS/64S/65S system compatible)
015: MELDAS64 (FCA64-P1 system compatible)
023: MELDAS65/65V (FCA65-P1/65V-P1 system compatible)
034: MELDAS66 (FCA66-P1 system compatible)
MU: Control unit
(Not subject to Export Trade Control Ordinances, or Foreign Trade Ordinance)
MA: Control unit
(Subject to Export Trade Control Ordinances, or Foreign Trade Ordinance)
M60/M60S Series

4.1.2 Features of Each Unit

Control unit Features

FCU6-MU011 Control unit for MELDAS64
FCU6-MU021 Control unit for MELDAS65 (High-speed program server compatible unit)
FCU6-MU032 Control unit for MELDAS64AS/64S/65S (High-speed program server compatible unit)
Control unit for MELDAS66/66S (High-speed program server compatible unit)
FCU6-MA031
Subject to Foreign Trade Ordinance Laws.
FCU6-MU015 Control unit for MELDAS64 (Special for optical communication)
Control unit for MELDAS65/65V (Special for optical communication, unit when
FCU6-MU023
high-speed program server function is absent.)
Control unit for MELDAS66 (Special for optical communication, unit when high-speed
FCU6-MU034 program server function is absent.)
Subject to Foreign Trade Ordinance Laws.

I-20
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

The FCU6-MU011 unit is explained in this section.

This unit is the NC control unit for the MELDAS64/64A.

4.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

Front view
CBUS 1 CBUS 2

(3) (7)

(6)

(5)

Bottom view

(1)
(4)
(2)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) DCIN Power input terminal (24VDC)
(2) EMG External emergency stop connection terminal
(3) AUX2 I/O link connection terminal
(4) AUX1 Communication terminal connection terminal
(5) CF11 Base I/O unit connection terminal
(6) CF10 Base I/O unit connection terminal
(7) ENC2 Synchronous feed encoder connection terminal

Accessories
Cables and screws are not enclosed with the control unit.
The FCU6-HR412 (memory cassette) is mounted in CBUS2 in the unit.

I-21
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

4.2.2 Connection of Power Supply

24VDC is supplied from the "DCIN" connector at the bottom of the control unit.
DCIN Ex.FCU6-MU0
Stabilized power supply

Y
MC
24VDC

ON 0V(RG)
OFF
MC
FG FCUA-R220 cable

MC
AC(H)
MC U
200VAC AC(N)

Turn the control unit power ON after turning or simultaneously with the turning ON of the peripheral
units (servo drive unit, remote I/O, etc.).
If the control unit power is turned ON first, the peripheral unit will not be recognized correctly.
Select a stabilized power supply and magnetic contact that satisfy the following specifications.
Stabilized power supply Magnetic contact
Rated voltage: 24VDC ± 5% Contact rating: 250VAC/1A or more
Ripple: ±5% [p-p] Operation coil: 250VAC/0.2A or more
Rated current: 24VDC, 1.5A or more No. of contacts: 3 contacts (a connection)
Select VDE Standard approved parts.
The above MC is for a 200VAC input voltage.
4.2.3 Connection of External Emergency Stop
An external emergency stop can be applied on the NC by using the "EMG" connector at the bottom of
the control unit.
Ex. FCU6-MU0
Ex ternal emergenc y
st op swit ch
< v
F120 cabl e EMG

O N：Emergency s top reset

O FF：Emergency s top

Sequencing emergency stop with motor brakes

1. When supplying power from NC side 2. When supplying power from external power source
Stabilized Stabilized
power supply NC power supply NC
EMG
24VDC EMG
3 24VDC
3
< v 24VDC < v
2 2

Emergenc y Em ergency
stop st op
0V(RG) 0V(RG)

Servo drive unit Servo drive unit

CN20 M DS - -V Se ri es CN20 M DS - -V Se rie s
1 1

RA RA

Brakes 3 3
Brakes

Precautions
1) When validating an emergency stop with sequence conditions, in addition to the emergency stop switch, select a
switch (SW) compatible with minute currents (5mA).
2) The GND for the stabilized power supplied to the brakes and the GND for the power supplied to the NC side
"DCIN" must be common.
3) The brake wiring differs according to the servo drive unit being used. Refer to the specifications manual of each
drive section for details.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
I-22
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

4.2.4 Connection of Communication Terminal

Connect the cable for connecting the communication terminal to the "AUX1" connector on the bottom of
the control unit.
CR02 AUX1

SH21 cable Ex.FCU6-MU0

(FCUA-R000 cable)

The partner side connection destination name is "CR02".

(The connection position differs according to the communication terminal.)

4.2.5 Connection of Base I/O Unit

Connect the "CF10" and "CF11" connectors on the front of the control unit with the base I/O unit.
The installation pitch between the base I/O unit and control unit depends on the length of the
connection cable.

4.2.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

Connect the synchronous feed encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) to the "ENC2" connector on the front of
the control unit.
There is a connection connector for the base I/O unit and for the control unit.
Refer to the respective system specifications for details on the connection destination and usage
methods.

I-23
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

4.2.7 Connection of I/O Link (When using M64)

The I/O link is a function used to exchange various data between NC units. (System option function)
Connect the "AUX2" connectors found on the front of each control unit.
Up to four salve NC units can be connected to one master NC unit.

1) Setting the master station and slave station

The master station and slave station number must be set and the terminator must be set for the I/O
link. Refer to the following drawings and set. The master station and slave station are set with the
rotary switch "NCNO".
Turn ON the terminator changeover switch "SW2" for the master station and slave (final) station.

Connecting one master station and three slave stations

Slave station Slave station Slave station
Master station (intermediate station) (intermediate station) (final station)
NCNO NCNO NCNO NCNO
0 1 2 3
SW2 [on] SW2 [off] SW2 [off] SW2 [on]

AUX2
AUX2 AUX AUX2 AUX-OUT

FCUA-R001 cable

AUX-IN SH21 cable SH21 cable

AUX2
(FCUA-R000 cable) (FCUA-R000 cable)

SH21 cable SH21 cable

(FCUA-R000 cable) (FCUA-R000 cable)

HR591 card

• The FCUA-R001 cable or HR591 card is used to relay the control units.
• The maximum cable length between the master station and final station is 15m.
• Control units with the HR531B/532B card can also be used.

Set the station No. for the I/O link connection.

NCNO
0 : Master station (only one station)
1 to 4 : Slave station (set as a serial No. from the master station)
Refer to the above drawing for an example of the settings.
SW2 Set the terminator.
ON : The terminator is valid when the switch is set to the downward position. (Master/slave final station)
OFF : The terminator is invalid when the switch is set to the upward position. (Slave intermediate station)

AUX2 Connect the control unit for carrying out the I/O link connection.

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power
is ON.

I-24
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

2) Connecting a unit using the HR531B/532B card

In some initially produced control units, the I/O link system was configured with the HR531B card,
on which the terminator was mounted, and the HR532B card, on which the terminator was not
mounted. In the I/O link system using the HR531B and HR532B cards, an HR531B card is used for
the master station and slave (final) station. HR532B cards are used for the slave (intermediate)
stations in between. The master station and slave station are set with the rotary switch "NCNO".
The control units subsequent to the initially produced units, explained in the previous section, use
the HR531C card with terminator ON/OFF switch.

Connecting one master station and three slave stations

Slave station Slave station Slave station
Master station (intermediate station) (intermediate station) (final station)

NCNO NCNO NCNO NCNO

0 1 2 3

AUX2
AUX2 AUX AUX2 AUX-OUT

FCUA-R001 cable

AUX2 AUX-IN SH21 cable SH21 cable

(FCUA-R000 cable) (FCUA-R000 cable)

SH21 cable SH21 cable

(FCUA-R000 cable) (FCUA-R000 cable)

HR591 card

• The FCUA-R001 cable or HR591 card is used to relay the control units.
• The maximum cable length between the master station and final station is 15m.
• Control units with the HR531C card can also be used.

NCNO Set the station No. for the I/O link connection.
0 : Master station (only one station)
1 to 4 : Slave station (set as a serial No. from the master station)

Refer to the above drawing for an example of the settings.

AUX2 Connect the control unit for carrying out the I/O link connection.

3) Determining whether HR531C card, HR531B or HR532B is in use

Refer to the control unit's appearance and Alarm Diagnosis screen configuration (hardware
monitor), and confirm which type of control unit is in use.

Determining the control unit

Control unit using HR531C card Control unit using HR531B/HR532B card

Slide switch provided

The type of unit being used can be judged by whether there is a slide switch looking
from the front of the control unit.

I-25
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

4.2.8 Connector Pin Assignment

Power input terminal (24VDC)

<Cable side connector type> 1 I 24VDC
DCIN 1 2 3 Connector : 2-178288-3 0V(RG)
2
Contact : 1-175218-5 3 FG
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

External emergency stop connection terminal

EMG <Cable side connector type>
2 Connector : 51030-0330 1 FG
3 1 Contact : 50084-8160 2 I EMG IN
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX 3 O COM
(COM pin is a 24VDC output)

Synchronous feed encoder connection terminal

ENC2
5 1
1 I ENC2A
6 I ENC2A*
2 I ENC2B
7 I ENC2B*
3 I ENC2Z
8 I ENC2Z*
4 GND
9 6 9 O +5V
5 GND

<Cable side connector type>

(Connect the connector case to shield.)
Connector : CDE-9PF
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDE-CTH
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-26
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

Base I/O unit connection terminal

CF10
1 1 I/O TXRX1 26 I/O TXRX1*
25
2 I/O TXRX2 27 I/O TXRX2*
3 GND 28 GND
4 I SKIP1 29 I SKIP1*
5 I SKIP2 30 I SKIP2*
50 26 6 I SKIP3 31 I SKIP3*
7 I SKIP4 32 I SKIP4*
8 I SKIP5 33 I SKIP5*
9 I SKIP6 34 I SKIP6*
10 I SKIP7 35 I SKIP7*
11 I SKIP8 36 I SKIP8*
12 GND 37 GND
<Cable side connector type> 13 I ENC1A 38 I ENC1A*
Plug : 10150-6000EL 14 I ENC1B 39 I ENC1B*
Shell : 10350-3210-000 15 I ENC1Z 40 I ENC1Z*
Recommended manufacturer: 3M 16 GND 41 GND
17 O SVTXD2 42 O SVTXD2*
(Connect the connector case to shield.) 18 I SVALM2 43 I SVALM2*
19 I SVRXD2 44 I SVRXD2*
20 O SVEMG2 45 O SVEMG2*
21 GND 46 GND
22 O SVTXD1 47 O SVTXD1*
23 I SVALM1 48 I SVALM1*
24 I SVRXD1 49 I SVRXD1*
25 O SVEMG1 50 O SVEMG1*

Base I/O unit connection terminal

CF11 A B
1 O +5V 1 O +5V
1A 25A 2 I/O TXRX3 2 I/O TXRX3*
3 GND 3 GND
4 I HA1A 4 I HA1B
5 I HA2A 5 I HA2B
1B 25B
6 I HA3A 6 I HA3B
7 O +12V 7 O +12V
8 GND 8 GND
9 I KBD0* 9 O KBADCS0
10 I KBD1* 10 O KBADCS1
<Cable side connector type> 11 I KBD2* 11 O KBADCS2
Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN 12 I KBD3* 12 O KBADCS3
Recommended manufacturer: DDK 13 O KBAD0 13 O BUZ
14 O KBAD1 14 O RDY
15 O KBAD2 15 O SP
16 reserve 16 I KBRES
17 GND 17 GND
18 O SD1 18 I RD1
19 O RS1 19 I CS1
20 O ER1 20 I DR1
21 O SD2 21 I RD2
22 O RS2 22 I CS2
23 O ER2 23 I DR2
24 GND 24 GND
25 O +5V 25 O +5V

I-27
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.2 FCU6-MU011 Control Unit (MELDAS64 compatible)

Communication terminal connection terminal

AUX1 10 1 1 GND 11 EN_RT
2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
20 11 7 17
8 GND 18
<Cable side connector type> 9 19
Plug : 10120-6000EL 10 20
Shell : 10320-3210-00
Recommended manufacturer: 3M (Connect the connector case to shield.)

I/O link connection terminal

AUX2 10 1 1 GND 11 EN_RT
2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
20 11 6 16
7 17
<Cable side connector type> 8 GND 18
Plug : 10120-6000EL 9 19
10 20
Shell : 10320-3210-00
Recommended manufacturer: 3M (Connect the connector case to shield.)

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-28
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)

4.3 FCU6-MU021/MU032/MA031 Control Unit

(MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)
The FCU6-MU021/MU032/MA031 unit is explained in this section.
This unit is the NC control unit for the MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S.

4.3.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

Front view

(3)

(7)

(4) (6)

(5)

Bottom view

(1)

(2)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) DCIN Power input terminal (24VDC)
(2) EMG External emergency stop connection terminal
(3) AUX1 Communication terminal connection terminal
(4) AUX2 I/O link connection terminal
(5) CF11 Base I/O unit connection terminal
(6) CF10 Base I/O unit connection terminal
(7) ENC2 Synchronous feed encoder connection terminal

Accessories
Cables and screws are not enclosed with the control unit.
The FCU6-HR412 (memory cassette) is mounted in CBUS2 in the unit.

I-29
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)

4.3.2 Connection of Power Supply

24VDC is supplied from the "DCIN" connector at the bottom of the control unit.
Stabilized power supply DCIN Ex.FCU6-MU021/031

Y
MC
24VDC

ON 0V(RG)
OFF
MC
FG FCUA-R220 cable

MC
AC(H)
MC U
200VAC AC(N)

Turn the control unit power ON after turning or simultaneously with the turning ON of the peripheral units
(servo drive unit, remote I/O, etc.).
If the control unit power is turned ON first, the peripheral unit will not be recognized correctly.
Select a stabilized power supply and magnetic contact that satisfy the following specifications.
Stabilized power supply Magnetic contact
Rated voltage: 24VDC ± 5% Contact rating: 250VAC/1A or more
Ripple: ±5% [p-p] Operation coil: 250VAC/0.2A or more
Rated current: 24VDC, 1.5A or more No. of contacts: 3 contacts (a connection)
Select VDE Standard approved parts.
The above MC is for a 200VAC input voltage.
4.3.3 Connection of External Emergency Stop
An external emergency stop can be applied on the NC by using the "EMG" connector at the bottom of
the control unit.
Ex.FCU6-MU021/031
External emergency
stop switch < v
F120 cable EMG

ON: Emergency stop reset

OFF: Emergency stop

Sequencing emergency stop with motor brakes

1. When supplying power from NC side 2. When supplying power from external power source
Stabilized Stabilized
power supply NC power supply NC
EMG
24VDC EMG
3 24VDC
3
< v 24VDC < v
2 2

Emergenc y Em ergency
stop stop
0V(RG) 0V(RG)

Servo drive unit Servo drive unit

CN20 M DS - -V S e r ie s CN20 M D S- -V S e ri e s
1 1

RA RA

Brakes 3 3
Brakes

Precautions
1) When validating an emergency stop with sequence conditions, in addition to the emergency stop switch, select a
switch (SW) compatible with minute currents (5mA).
2) The GND for the stabilized power supplied to the brakes and the GND for the power supplied to the NC side
"DCIN" must be common.
3) The brake wiring differs according to the servo drive unit being used. Refer to the specifications manual of each
drive section for details.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-30
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)

4.3.4 Connection of Communication Terminal

Connect the cable for connecting the communication terminal to the "AUX1" connector on the bottom of
the control unit.
Ex.FCU6-MU021/MU032/MA031
CR02 AUX1

(SH21 cable)
FCUA-R000 cable
The partner side connection is "CR02".
(The connection position differs according to the communication terminal.)

4.3.5 Connection of Base I/O Unit

Connect the "CF10" and "CF11" connectors on the front of the control unit with the base I/O unit.
The installation pitch between the base I/O unit and control unit depends on the length of the connection
cable.

4.3.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

Connect the synchronous feed encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) to the "ENC2" connector on the front of the
control unit. There is a connection connector for the base I/O unit and for the control unit.
Refer to the respective system specifications for details on the connection destination and usage
methods.

I-31
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)

4.3.7 Connection of I/O Link (When using MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S)

The I/O link is a function used to exchange various data between NC units. (System option function)
Connect the "AUX2" connectors found on the front of each control unit.
Up to three salve NC units can be connected to one master NC unit.

1) Connection example
The master station and slave station are set with the rotary switch "NCNO".
Turn ON the terminator changeover switch "SW2" for the master station and slave (final) station.

Connecting one master station and three slave stations

Slave station Slave station Slave station
Master station (intermediate station) (intermediate station) (final station)

NCNO NCNO NCNO NCNO

SW2
0 [ON] 1 SW2
[OFF]
2 SW2
[OFF]
3 SW2
[ON]

AUX2 AUX2 AUX AUX2 AUX-OUT

FCUA-R001 cable
AUX2 AUX-IN (SH21 cable) (SH21 cable)
FCUA-R000 cable FCUA-R000 cable

(SH21 cable) (SH21 cable)

FCUA-R000 cable U FCUA-R000 cable

HR591 card

• The FCUA-R001 cable or HR591 card is used to relay the control units.
• The maximum cable length between the master station and final station is 15m.
• Control units with the HR531/532B card can also be used.

NCNO SW2
0 AUX1
8
AUX2
TFG

NCNO Set the station No. for the I/O link connection.
0 : Master station (only one station)
1 to 4 : Slave station (set as a serial No. from the master station)
Refer to the above drawing for an example of the settings.

SW2 Set the terminator

ON : The terminator is valid when the switch is set to the downward position. (Master/slave final station)
OFF : The terminator is invalid when the switch is set to the upward position. (Slave intermediate station)

AUX2 Connect the control unit for carrying out the I/O link connection.

AUX1 Connect the communication terminal.

TFG This is the FG terminal.

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-32
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)

4.3.8 Connector Pin Assignment

Power input terminal (24VDC)

<Cable side connector type> 1 I 24VDC
DCIN 1 2 3 Connector : 2-178288-3 2 0V(RG)
Contact : 1-175218-5 3 FG
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

External emergency connection terminal

EMG 2
<Cable side connector type>
1 FG
3 1 Connector : 51030-0330
2 I EMG IN
Contact : 50084-8160 3 O COM
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX
(COM pin is a 24VDC output)

Synchronous feed encoder connection terminal

ENC2
5 1
1 I ENC2A
6 I ENC2A*
2 I ENC2B
7 I ENC2B*
3 I ENC2Z
8 I ENC2Z*
4 GND
9 6 9 O +5V
5 GND

<Cable side connector type>

(Connect the connector case to shield.)
Connector : CDE-9PF
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDE-CTH
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-33
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)

Base I/O unit connection terminal

1 I/O TXRX1 26 I/O TXRX1*
CF10 TXRX2 I/O TXRX2*
2 I/O 27
25 1
3 GND 28 GND
4 I SKIP1 29 I SKIP1*
5 I SKIP2 30 I SKIP2*
6 I SKIP3 31 I SKIP3*
7 I SKIP4 32 I SKIP4*
50 26
8 I SKIP5 33 I SKIP5*
9 I SKIP6 34 I SKIP6*
10 I SKIP7 35 I SKIP7*
11 I SKIP8 36 I SKIP8*
12 GND 37 GND
13 I ENC1A 38 I ENC1A*
<Cable side connector type> 14 I ENC1B 39 I ENC1B*
Plug : 10150-6000EL 15 I ENC1Z 40 I ENC1Z*
Shell : 10350-3210-000 16 GND 41 GND
17 O SVTXD2 42 O SVTXD2*
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
18 I SVALM2 43 I SVALM2*
(Connect the connector case to shield.) 19 I SVRXD2 44 I SVRXD2*
20 O SVEMG2 45 O SVEMG2*
21 GND 46 GND
22 O SVTXD1 47 O SVTXD1*
23 I SVALM1 48 I SVALM1*
24 I SVRXD1 49 I SVRXD1*
25 O SVEMG1 50 O SVEMG1*

Base I/O unit connection terminal

CF11 A B
1 O +5V 1 O +5V
1A 25A 2 I/O TXRX3 2 I/O TXRX3*
3 GND 3 GND
4 I HA1A 4 I HA1B
5 I HA2A 5 I HA2B
1B 25B
6 I HA3A 6 I HA3B
7 O +12V 7 O +12V
8 GND 8 GND
9 I KBD0* 9 O KBADCS0
10 I KBD1* 10 O KBADCS1
<Cable side connector type> 11 I KBD2* 11 O KBADCS2
Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN 12 I KBD3* 12 O KBADCS3
Recommended manufacturer: DDK 13 O KBAD0 13 O BUZ
14 O KBAD1 14 O RDY
15 O KBAD2 15 O SP
16 reserve 16 I KBRES
17 GND 17 GND
18 O SD1 18 I RD1
19 O RS1 19 I CS1
20 O ER1 20 I DR1
21 O SD2 21 I RD2
22 O RS2 22 I CS2
23 O ER2 23 I DR2
24 GND 24 GND
25 O +5V 25 O +5V

I-34
 4. CONTROL UNIT
4.3 FCU6-MU021/MA031 Control Unit (MELDAS64AS/M64S/65/65S/66/66S compatible)

Communication terminal connection terminal

AUX1 10 1 1 GND 11 EN_RT
2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
20 11 6 16
7 17
<Cable side connector type> 8 GND 18
9 19
Plug : 10120-6000EL 10 20
Shell : 10320-3210-00
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

I/O link connection terminal

AUX2 10 1 1 GND 11 EN_RT
2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
20 11 6 16
7 17
<Cable side connector type> 8 GND 18
Plug : 10120-6000EL 9 19
10 20
Shell : 10320-3210-00
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-35
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.1 Outline of Communication Terminal

5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.1 Outline of Communication Terminal
The communication terminal is configured of the display unit and keyboard unit.
The optimum terminal can be selected from the following combinations.

Communication terminal

M I T SU B ISH I

Display unit Keyboard unit

5.1.1 Configuration of Type

Display unit
FCUA – CT 100 FCU6 – D U T 3 2
100 : Keyboard integrated type (M system) Series serial No.
120 : Keyboard integrated type (L system) 2: 8.4-type
10 : Separated type (separate keyboard) 3: 10.4-type
CT : Communication terminal (9 type CRT) T : Monochrome LCD
LD : 7.2-type monochrome LCD N : Color LCD
CR : 9-type monochrome CRT
EL : 9.5-type monochrome EL DU: Display unit
(Cannot be used with M60S Series.)

Keyboard unit
FCUA – KB 10
10 : For CRT/EL (M system)
12 : For CRT/EL (L system)
20 : For LCD (M system)
021: For LCD (M system) For FCU6-DUT32/DUN33
022: For LCD (M system) For FCU6-DUN22
30 : For LCD (L system)
031: For LCD (L system) For FCU6-DUT32/DUN33
KB: NC keyboard
A or 6

5.1.2 Features of Each Unit

Display unit Keyboard unit Features

Thin type (minimum depth) with large display characters.
1 FCU6-DUT32
CE compatible.
FCU6-KB021/031
Series' first color terminal. Although thin, the view angle is the same
2 FCU6-DUN33
as the CRT. CE compatible.
8.4-type color TFT. The installation pitch is the same as
3 FCU6-DUN22 FCU6-KB022
LD10/EL10/CR10 and KB10/12/20/30.
4 FCUA-LD100 Keyboard integrated Although thin, installation pitch is the same as the CRT type.
5 FCUA-LD10 FCUA-KB20/30 CE compatible.
6 FCUA-EL10 FCUA-KB10/KB12 Thin and easy-to-view.
7 FCUA-CT100/120 Keyboard integrated
CRT type display unit.
8 FCUA-CR10 FCUA-KB10/KB12

I-36
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD)

5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD)

The thin-type monochrome LCD communication terminal is described in this section.
The FCU6-KB021/KB031 NC keyboard can be connected to this unit.

5.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

Back view

Contrast.
OPERATION BOARD DATE:9910
(10)
UNIT TYPE : FCU6-DUT32 H//W Ver.A

(11) CNZ22
CNZ22A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

CR01 (9)
(1) CS1

(2) (8)
CNZ24 (7)
CR03

(3) CR02

(6)
CR05
CR06

(4) (5)

J2 cable
(for menu keys)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) CS1 Select the type of keyboard connected. (M system: 0/L system: 1)
(2) CR03 NC keyboard (FCU6-KB021/KB031) connection terminal
(3) CR06 Function extension connector (Not used)
(4) J2 NC keyboard (FCU6-KB021/KB031) J2 terminal connection cable
(5) CR05 Remote I/O connection terminal
(6) CR02 Control unit connection terminal
(7) FG Frame ground connection terminal
(8) CNZ24 LCD display signal output terminal
(9) CR01 Power input terminal (24VDC)
LCD display contrast adjustment potentiometer (adjusted before
(10) CONTRAST
shipment)
(11) CNZ22/CNZ22A LCD backlight power output terminal

Accessories
Enc lo sed c onn ector set N C ke yboa rd c able

FC U A-C N 22 0 FC U A-C N 2 11 C R 0 3 C able (L= 0.5m )

(F or C R 01 ) (For C R 05)
X
Y

I-37
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD)

5.2.2 Connection of Power Supply

24VDC is supplied from the "CR01" connector on the back of the communication terminal.

CR01
FCUA-R220 cable

Y
Stabilized power supply

24VDC
Select a stabilized power supply that
0V(RG)
satisfies the following specifications.
FG

Output voltage: 24VDC ± 5%

FG Ripple: ±5% [p-p]
AC(H)
Rated current: 24VDC, 0.9A or more
AC(N)

5.2.3 Connection of Control Unit

Connect the cable from the control unit to the "CR02" connector on the back of the communication
terminal.
Ex.FCA64

AUX1
SH21 cable
CR02 (FCUA-R000 cable)

The partner side connection is "AUX1".

(The connection position differs according
to the control unit.)

5.2.4 Connection of NC Keyboard

Connect to the "J1" connector on the NC keyboard with the CR03 cable connected to the "CR03"
connector. Connect the J2 cable for the menu keys to the "J2" connector on the NC keyboard.
FCUA-KB20/30

CR03 cable
J1 CR03

J2

J2 cable

CAUTION
Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-38
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD)

5.2.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit

Connect to the remote I/O unit from the "CR05" connector on the back of the communication terminal.
The scan I/O card (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the
remote I/O unit.
Up to four stations can be set. (Example: Up to two FCUA-DX111 units can be connected.)
The analog input/output unit (FCUA-DX120/121/140/141) cannot be used.

When connecting remote I/O unit

FCUA-DX1
unit

RIO1

X
X
FCUA-R211 cable
CR05 (SH41 cable) Terminator
R-TM
X

When connecting scan I/O card

Terminator
R-TM
HR347/357 card
RIO3B

RIO3A

FCUA-R211 cable
CR05 (SH41 cable)
X

Refer to the explanation on each I/O item for details on setting the number of stations, etc.
When connecting the remote I/O, always connect a terminator (R-TM) to the final station.
Refer to the "PLC Interface Manual" for details on the interface assignments.

5.2.6 Adjustment of Display Screen

The LCD display screen is set to the optimum display looking from the front. However, this may be
difficult to view depending on the installation position. Adjust with the following items in this case.
(When adjusting with the internal CONTRAST potentiometer, set the following parameter values to "0".)

Basic specification parameter

#1132 CRT LCD contrast adjustment "Setting range: –3 Dark to 3 Bright"
#1134 LCDneg LCD display reverse display "Setting range: 0/1"

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
I-39
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD)

5.2.7 Connector Pin Assignment

Power input terminal 1

<Cable side connector type>
(24VDC) Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC
CR01 2 Contact : 1-175218-5 2 0V(RG)
Recommended manufacturer: 3 FG
3 Tyco Electronics AMP

Remote I/O connection 1

terminal
<Cable side connector type> 1 I/O TXRX
CR05 2 Connector : 1-178288-3 2 I/O TXRX*
3 GND
Contact : 1-175218-2
Recommended manufacturer:
3
Tyco Electronics AMP

Control unit connection terminal

1 GND 11 EN_RT
CR02 1 2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
10 3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
7 17
20 11 8 GND 18
9 19
<Cable side connector type> 10 20
Plug : 10120-6000EL
Shell : 10320-3210-00
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

NC keyboard connection terminal (FCU6-KB021/KB031) A B

CR03 1 GND 1 GND
2 I KSC0 2 I KSC1
3 Vcc 3 Vcc
4 I KSC2 4 I KSC3
5 I KSC4 5 I KSC5
6 I KSC6 6 I KSC7
20A 1A 7 I KSC8 7 I KSC9
8 I KSC10 8 I KSC11
9 I KSC12 9
10 10
11 11
20B 1B 12 12
13 I BUZCM 13 I BUZCM
14 14
15 GND 15 GND
16 I RESET 16 I FAST
17 Vcc 17 Vcc
<Cable side connector type> 18 O NKD0 18 O NKD1
19 O NKD2 19 O NKD3
Plug : 8830E-50 20 O NKD4 20 O NKD5
Recommended manufacturer: KEL 21 O NKD6 21 O NKD7
22 O BUZ 22
23 Vcc 23 GND
24 O READY 24
25 Vcc 25 Vcc

I-40
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.2 FCU6-DUT32 Display Unit (10.4-type monochrome LCD)

NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable

(FCU6-KB021/KB031) A B
1 1
J2 2 I SC0 2 I SC1
1A 10A 3 I SC2 3 I SC3
4 I SC4 4 I SC5
5 I SC6 5
6 6 O KD7
1B 10B
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10

LCD display signal output terminal 1 O FLM

2 O LP
CNZ24 1 3 O CP
4 O DISPOFF*
<Cable side connector type> 5 Vcc
6 Vss
Connector : 51021-1500 7 VEE
Contact : 50079-8000 8 O DU0
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX 9 O DU1
10 O DU2
11 O DU3
12 O DL0
13 O DL1
15 14 O DL2
15 O DL3

LCD backlight power output terminal

1 I CCFL_HOT
CNZ22 <Cable side connector type>
2 NC
1 4 Connector : M63M83-04 3 NC
Contact : M63C84-1 4 CCFL_GND
Recommended manufacturer: MITSUMI

LCD backlight power output terminal

<Cable side connector type> 1 I CCFL_HOT
CNZ22A 1 2 3 Connector : QZ-19-3F01 2 NC
Contact : QZ-19-F114A 3 CCFL_GND
Recommended manufacturer: HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO

Function extension connector (Not used)

CR06 16A 1A

16B 1B

16C 1C

I-41
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD)

5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD)

The thin color LCD communication terminal is described in this section.
The FCU6-KB021/KB031 NC keyboard can be connected to this unit.

5.3.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

Back view
(13)

OPERATION BOARD DATE:9910

UNIT TYPE : FCU6-DUT32 H//W Ver.A
MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

(16)
CN3
CR01 CBP18
(12)
(2) (11)
CF02
CR03

(1) CN2 CS1

(15) LCD
(10)
(6) CN1

(14) CR04
(9)
(5) CBC14

CR02
(7)
(3)
CR07
CR05
(8)
(4)

J2 cable
(for menu keys)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) CS1 Select the type of keyboard connected. (M system: 0/L system: 1)
(2) CR03 NC keyboard (FCU6-KB021/KB031) connection terminal
(3) CR07 Serial connector (Not used)
(4) J2 NC keyboard (FCU6-KB021/KB031) J2 terminal connection cable
(5) CR05 Remote I/O connection terminal
(6) CR02 Control unit connection terminal
(7) FG Frame ground connection terminal
(8) CR04 Display signal output terminal
(9) CBC14 Display signal input terminal
(10) LCD LCD display signal output terminal
(11) CF02 Backlight inverter power output terminal
(12) CBP18 Power input terminal (24VDC)
(13) CR01 Power input terminal (24VDC)
(14) CN3 LCD backlight power output terminal
(15) CN1 Backlight inverter power input terminal
(16) CN2 Backlight control signal terminal

Accessories
Cable
CR03 cable (L=0.5m) F083 cable (L=0.3m)
Connector set (for NC keyboard) (for backlight power supply)

FCUA-CN220 FCUA-CN211
(For CR01) (For CR05)

CR04-L cable (L=0.1m) CR01-1 cable (L=0.4m)

(for display signal) (for terminal power supply)
Y
Y

I-42
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD)

5.3.2 Connection of Power Supply

24VDC is supplied from the CR01-1 cable enclosed with FCU6-DUN33.
CR01-1 cable

Y
FCUA-R220 cable

Y
Y
Stabilized power supply

CR01 CBP18 Connect 24VDC

Select a stabilized power supply that
0V(RG) satisfies the following specifications.
FG

Output voltage: 24VDC ± 5%

FG
Ripple: ±5% [p-p]
AC(H)

AC(N) Rated current: 24VDC, 0.9A or more

5.3.3 Connection of Control Unit

Connect the cable from the control unit to the "CR02" connector on the back of the communication
terminal.
Ex.FCA64

AUX1
SH21 cable
(FCUA-R000 cable)
CR02

The partner side connection is "AUX1".

(The connection position differs according
to the control unit.)

5.3.4 Connection of NC Keyboard

Connect to the "J1" connector on the NC keyboard with the CR03 cable connected to the "CR03"
connector. Connect the J2 cable for the menu keys to the "J2" connector on the NC keyboard.

FCU6-KB021/031

CR03

CR03 cable
J1

J2

J2 cable

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-43
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD)

5.3.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit

Connect to the remote I/O unit from the "CR05" connector on the back of the communication terminal.
The scan I/O (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the remote
I/O unit.
Up to four stations can be set. (Example: Up to two FCUA-DX111 units can be connected.)
The analog input/output unit (FCUA-DX120/121/140/141) cannot be used.

When connecting remote I/O unit

FCUA-DX1
unit

RIO1

X
X

CR05 FCUA-R211 cable

Terminator
(SH41 cable)
R-TM
X

When connecting scan I/O card

Terminator
HR347/357 card R-TM

RIO3B

RIO3A

CR05 FCUA-R211 cable

(SH41 cable)
X

Refer to the explanation on each I/O item for details on setting the number of stations, etc.
When connecting the remote I/O, always connect a terminator (R-TM) to the final station.
Refer to the "PLC Interface Manual" for details on the interface assignments.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-44
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD)

5.3.6 Connector Pin Assignment

Power input terminal 1

<Cable side connector type>
(24VDC) Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC
CR01 2 Contact : 1-175218-5 2 0V (RG)
CBP18 Recommended manufacturer: 3 FG
3 Tyco Electronics AMP

Remote I/O connection terminal

CR05 1
<Cable side connector type>
Connector : 1-178288-3 1 I/O TXRX
2 Contact : 1-175218-2 2 I/O TXRX*
Recommended manufacturer: 3 GND

3 Tyco Electronics AMP

Control unit connection terminal

1 GND 11 EN_RT
CR02 1 2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
10 3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
7 17
20 11 8 GND 18
9 19
<Cable side connector type> 10 20
Plug : 10120-6000EL
Shell : 10320-3210-00
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

NC keyboard connection terminal (FCU6-KB021/KB031) A B

CR03 1 GND 1 GND
2 IKSC0 2 I KSC1
3 Vcc 3 Vcc
20A 1A 4 IKSC2 4 I KSC3
5 IKSC4 5 I KSC5
6 IKSC6 6 I KSC7
7 IKSC8 7 I KSC9
8 IKSC10 8 I KSC11
20B 1B 9 IKSC12 9
10 10
11 11
12 12
13 I BUZCM 13 I BUZCM
<Cable side connector type> 14 14
Plug : 8830E-50 15 GND 15 GND
16 I RESET 16 I FAST
Recommended manufacturer: KEL 17 Vcc 17 Vcc
18 O NKD0 18 O NKD1
19 O NKD2 19 O NKD3
20 O NKD4 20 O NKD5
21 O NKD6 21 O NKD7
22 O BUZ 22
23 Vcc 23 GND
24 O READY 24
25 Vcc 25 Vcc

I-45
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD)

NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable

(FCU6-KB021/KB031) A B
1 1
J2 2 I SC0 2 I SC1
1A 10A 3 I SC2 3 I SC3
4 I SC4 4 I SC5
5 I SC6 5
6 6 O KD7
1B 10B 7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10

LCD display signal output terminal 1 O FLM 2 O FLM

LCD 1 3 O LP 4 LP
2 5 CP O
O 6 CP
7 O DISPOFF*
O
8 O DISPOFF*
9 Vcc
10 Vcc
11 Vss
13 VEE 12 Vss
15 O DU0 14 VEE
17 O DU1 16 O DU0
31 30 O DU2 18 O DU1
19
21 O DU3 20 O DU2
<Cable side connector type> 23 O DL0 22 O DU3
Connector : 53047-1510 25 O DL1 24 O DL0
Recommended manufacturer: DDK 27 O DL2 26 O DL1
29 O DL3 28 O DL2
31 30 O DL3

Display signal output terminal A B

CR04 1 1
2 2
CBC14 3 3
16A 1A 4 GND 4 GND
5 O VD 5
6 O HD 6 GND
7 O DCLK 7 GND
16B 1B 8 O R 8 O G
9 O B 9 GND
10 O DTMG 10 GND
<Cable side connector type> 11 11 GND
Connector : 8426-4500 12 O I 12 GND
Contact : 3690-1000 13 O BLON* 13
Recommended manufacturer: 3M 14 14
15 15
16 16

Serial Interface (for Mitsubishi maintenance)

CR06 13 1
This connector is not used with this product.

25 14

I-46
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.3 FCU6-DUN33 Display Unit (10.4-type color LCD)

Inverter power output 1 I 12VDC

<Cable side connector type> 2
CR06 Connector : 51030-0530 3
1 5
Contact : 50083-8160 4
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX 5 GND

Backlight inverter power input terminal

1 VDDB(12V)
<Cable side connector type> 2 VDDB(12V)
CN1
1
Connector : LZ-5S-SC3 3 GND B
5
Contact : LZ-SC-C3-A1-15000 4 GND B
Recommended manufacturer: 5 BRTHL
Japan Aviation Electronics

Backlight control signal terminal

<Cable side connector type>
CN2 3 1 Connector : IL-Z-3C-S125C3 1 O BTTC(ON/OFF)
2 O BRTH
Contact : IL-Z-C3-A-15000 3 O BRTL
Recommended manufacturer:
Japan Aviation Electronics

LCD backlight power output terminal

CN3 <Cable side connector type> 1 GND
3 1 Connector : BHR-03VS-1 2 H.V.
Contact : SBH-001T-P0.5 3 H.V.
Recommended manufacturer: JST

I-47
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)

5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)

The 8.4-type color LCD communication terminal is described in this section.

The FCU6-KB022 NC keyboard can be connected to this unit.

5.4.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

Back view
(15)
(11) INV LCD F098
(10)

(1) (14)
CR01

F484

(9)
(2) NCKB

CN1 CBUS

(12)
CN2
NCSYS KBSEL
CR02 CR05
F
G

J2 Cable
(For menu key) (4) (5) (13) (6) (7) (8)
(3)
No. Connector name Function explanation
(1) CR01 Power input terminal (24VDC)
(2) NCKB NC keyboard (FCU6-KB022) connection terminal
(3) J2 NC keyboard (FCU6-KB022) J2 terminal connection cable
(4) CR02 Control unit connection terminal
(5) CR05 Remote I/O connection terminal
(6) NCSYS Internal setting switch (Use prohibited)
(7) KBSEL Switch for designating connection keyboard type (M system: 0)
(8) FG Frame ground connection terminal
(9) CBUS Memory cassette connection terminal (For maintenance; SRAM
memory cassette use prohibited)
(10) LCD LCD display signal output terminal
(11) INV Backlight inverter power output terminal
(12) CN2 LCD backlight power output terminal
(13) CN1 Backlight inverter power input terminal
(14) F484 Control card – backlight inverter connection cable
(15) F098 Control card – LCD connection cable
Accessories
Enclosed connector set LCD display cable Backlight inverter cable
FCUA-CN220 FCUA-CN211 F098 Cable F054 Cable (L=0.25m)
(For CR01) (For CR05) (For LCD) (For INV)

F484

F098
Y

I-48
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)

5.4.2 Connection of Power Supply

24VDC is supplied from the "CR01" connector on the back of the communication terminal.

FCUA-R220
CR01 Cable

Y
Stabilized power supply
Select a stabilized power supply that satisfies
24VDC
the following specifications.
0V(RG)

FG
Output voltage: 24VDC±5%
Ripple: ±5%[p-p]
FG
Rated current: 24VDC, 0.9A or more
AC(H)

AC(N)

5.4.3 Connection of Control Unit

Connect the cable from the control unit to the "CR02" connector on the back of the communication
terminal.

Ex.FCA6
S

CR02 AUX1
(Upper
SH21 Cable side)
(FCUA-R000 Cable)

The partner side connection is "AUX1".

(The connection position differs according
to the control unit.)

I-49
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)

5.4.4 Connection of NC Keyboard

Connect the F054 cable connected to the "J1" connector on the NC keyboard to the "NCKB" connector.
Connect the J2 cable for the menu keys to the "J2" connector on the NC keyboard.

FCU6-KB022

F054 Cable
NCKB

J1

J2

J2 Cable

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-50
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)

5.4.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit

Connect to the remote I/O unit from the "CR05" connector on the back of the communication terminal.
The scan I/O card (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the
remote I/O unit.
Up to four stations can be set. (Example: Up to two FCUA-DX111 units can be connected.)
The analog input/utput unit (FCUA-DX120/121/140/141) cannot be used.
When connecting remote I/O unit

FCUA-DX1 unit

RIO1
CR05
X
X

FCUA-R211 Cable Terminator

R-TM
X

When connecting scan I/O card

Terminator
HR347/357 card R-TM
RIO3B

RIO3A

CR05
X

FCUA-R211 Cable
X

Refer to the explanation on each I/O item for details on setting the number of stations, etc.
When connecting the remote I/O, always connect a terminator (R-TM) to the final station.
Refer to the "PLC Interface Manual" for details on the interface assignments.

5.4.6 Adjustment of Display Screen

The LCD display screen is set to the optimum display looking from the front. However, this may be
difficult to view depending on the installation position. Adjust with the following items in this case.
Basic specification parameter
#1132 CRT LCD contrast adjustment "Setting range: –3 Dark to 3 Bright"

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-51
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)

5.4.7 Connector Pin Assignment

Power input terminal (24VDC)

CR01 <Cable side connector type>
1 Connector: 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC
Contact: 1-175218-5 2 0V(RG)
2
Recommended manufacturer: 3 FG
Tyco Electronics AMP

Remote I/O connection terminal

CR05 <Cable side connector type>
1 Connector: 1-178288-3 1 I/O TXRX
Contact: 1-175218-5 2 I/O TXRX*
2
Recommended manufacturer: 3 GND
Tyco Electronics AMP

Control unit connection terminal

CR02
10A 1A A B
1 GND 1 GND
2 I RXD 2 I RXD*
3 3
4 O TXD 4 O TXD*
5 GND 5 GND
10B 1B 6 6
<Cable side connector type> 7 7
Plug: 10120-6000EL 8 EN_RT 8
Shell: 10320-3210-00 9 9
Recommended manufacturer: 3M 10 10

NC Keyboard connection terminal

(FCU6-KB022)
NCKB
A B
13A 1A 1 O KBCS0* 1 O KBCS1*
2 O KBCS2* 2 O KBCS3*
3 O KBAD0 3 O KBAD1
4 O KBAD2 4 O BUZOUT*
5 O RDYOUT* 5 O SPOUT
13B 1B 6 I KBRES* 6
7 I KBD0 7 I KBD1
<Cable side connector type> 8 I KBD2 8 I KBD3
Plug: 7926-6500SC
Strain relief: 3448-7926
9 GND 9 GND
Recommended manufacturer: 3M 10 GND 10 GND
11 GND 11 GND
12 Vcc 12 Vcc
13 Vcc 13 Vcc

I-52
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.4 FCU6-DUN22 Display Unit (8.4-type color LCD)

NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable

(FCU6-KB022)
J2
A B
1A 10A 1 1
2 I SC3 2 I SC5
3 I SC7 3 I SC11
1B 10B 4 I SC13 4 I SC15
5 I SC17 5
6 6 O KBD3
7 O KBD2 7
8 8
9 9
10 10

LCD display signal output terminal

LCD
1 GND 2 O DCLK
2 30 3 O Hsync
5 GND 4 O Vsync
6 O R0
7 O R1 8 O R2
9 O R3 10 O R4
31 11 O R5
1 12 GND
13 O G0 14 O G1
15 O G2
<Cable side connector type> 16 O G3
17 O G4
Connector: DF9-31S-1V 18 O G5
19 GND
Recommended manufacturer:
21 O B1 20 O B0
Hirose Electrics 22 O B2
23 O B3 24 O B4
25 O B5
27 O DENA 26 GND
29 3VDD 28 3VDD
31 O SC 30

Backlight inverter power output terminal

INV <Cable side connector type>
Connector: 51030-0530
1 12V
5 1 2 GND
Contact: 50083-8160
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX 3 O Vrmt
4 O Vbr
5

Backlight inverter power input terminal

CN1 <Cable side connector type>
Connector: 51021-0500 1 12V
5 1 Contact: 50058-8100 2 GND
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX 3 I Vrmt
4 I Vbr
5

LCD backlight power output terminal

CN2 <Cable side connector type>
Connector: BHR-03VS-1 1 VHIGH
Contact: SBH-001T-P0.5 2
Recommended manufacturer: JST 3 VLOW
3 1

I-53
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD)

5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD)

The thin-type monochrome LCD communication terminal is described in this section.
The FCUA-KB20/KB30 NC keyboard can be connected to the FCUA-LD10 unit.
The FCUA-LD100 unit integrates the FCUA-LD10 and FCUA-KB20.

5.5.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

(12)
Back view
(7)
CNZ23

Contrast. (10)
(11) CNZ22

CR01 (9)
(1) CS1
H//W Ver.A
DATE:9910

M ITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

(2) (8)
UNIT TYPE : FCUA-LD10
OPERATION BOARD

CNZ24

CR03

CR02
(3)
(6) CR05

(5)
CR06
(4)

J2 cable (L=0.39m)
(for menu keys)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) CS1 Select the type of keyboard connected. (M system: 0/L system: 1)
(2) CR03 NC keyboard (FCUA-KB20/KB30) connection terminal
(3) CR06 Function extension connector (Not used)
(4) J2 NC keyboard (FCUA-KB20/KB30) J2 terminal connection cable
(5) CR05 Remote I/O connection terminal
(6) CR02 Control unit connection terminal
(7) FG Frame ground connection terminal
(8) CNZ24 LCD display signal output terminal
(9) CR01 Power input terminal (24VDC)
LCD display contrast adjustment potentiometer (adjusted before
(10) CONTRAST
shipment)
(11) CNZ22A LCD backlight power output terminal
(12) CNZ23 External contrast adjustment terminal

Accessories
Enclosed connector set NC keyboard cable

FCUA-CN220 FCUA-CN211 CR03 cable (L=0.2m)

(For CR01) (For CR05)
X
Y

I-54
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD)

5.5.2 Connection of Power Supply

24VDC is supplied from the "CR01" connector on the back of the communication terminal.

FCUA-R220 cable
CR01

Y
Stabilized power supply

24VDC

0V(RG)
Select a stabilized power supply that
FG
satisfies the following specifications.
Output voltage: 24VDC ± 5%
FG
Ripple: ±5% [p-p]
AC(H)

AC(N)
Rated current: 24VDC, 0.9A or more

5.5.3 Connection of Control Unit

Connect the cable from the control unit to the "CR02" connector on the back of the communication
terminal.
Ex.FCA64

AUX1
SH21 cable
(FCUA-R000 cable) CR02

The partner side connection is "AUX1".

(The connection position differs according
to the control unit.)

5.5.4 Connection of NC Keyboard

Connect to the "J1" connector on the NC keyboard with the CR03 cable connected to the "CR03"
connector. Connect the J2 cable for the menu keys to the "J2" connector on the NC keyboard.
The FCUA-LD100 is wired before shipment. (The NC keyboard is the FCUA-KB20.)
FCUA-KB20/30

CR03 cable
(L=0.2m)
J1 CR03

J2

J2 cable
(L=0.39m)

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-55
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD)

5.5.5 Connection of Remote I/O Unit

Connect to the remote I/O unit from the "CR05" connector on the back of the display unit.
The scan I/O (HR347/357) and expansion I/O card (QY231) can be connected in addition to the remote
I/O unit.
Up to four stations can be set. (Example: Up to two FCUA-DX111 units can be connected.)
The analog input/output unit (FCUA-DX120/121/140/141) cannot be used.

When connecting remote I/O unit

FCUA-DX1
unit

RIO1

X
X
CR05 FCUA-R211 cable
(SH41 cable) Terminator
R-TM
X

When connecting scan I/O card

Terminator
R-TM
HR347/357 card
RIO3B

RIO3A

CR05 FCUA-R211 cable

(SH41 cable)
X

Refer to the explanation on each I/O item for details on setting the number of stations, etc.
When connecting the remote I/O, always connect a terminator (R-TM) to the final station.
Refer to the "PLC Interface Manual" for details on the interface assignments.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-56
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD)

5.5.6 Adjustment of Display Screen

The LCD display screen is set to the optimum display looking from the front. However, this may be
difficult to view depending on the installation position. Adjust with the following items in this case.

1. Internal adjustment
Contrast adjustment potentiometer
CONTRAST

Wait at least 30 minutes after turning the power ON so that

the display can be adjusted when the LCD brightness has stabilized.
CONTRAST

2. External adjustment
Unit back
1. Change the S2 terminal from IN to OUT.
CONTRAST

IN S2 OUT IN S2 OUT
Change

2. Adjust the attached potentiometer to the center of

the movable range.
Enlarged view Setting
100K

50K

Movable range
CNZ23
1 4

IN S2 OUT External potentiometer

3. Attach the external potentiometer to the CNZ23

CONTRAST connector.
Connect across "pins 1 and 2" of the CNZ23
connector.
(For internal adjustment)

4. Adjust the potentiometer to the optimum setting.

Movable resistor
NZ23
1
100k

2
3
4
L=MAX50cm

Example of cable manufacture

<Precautions>

1) Attach the external potentiometer after turning the power OFF.

(In the worst case, the control card could be damaged.)
2) The cable connected to CNZ23 must be 50cm or less.

CAUTION
Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-57
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD)

5.5.7 Connector Pin Assignment

Power input terminal 1

<Cable side connector type>
(24VDC) Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC
CR01 2 Contact : 1-175218-5 2 0V (RG)
Recommended manufacturer: 3 FG
3 Tyco Electronics AMP

Remote I/O unit connection terminal

1
CR05 <Cable side connector type>
Connector : 1-178288-3 1 I/O TXRX
2 Contact : 1-175218-2 2 I/O TXRX*
Recommended manufacturer: 3 GND
3 Tyco Electronics AMP

Control unit connection terminal

1 GND 11 EN_RT
CR02 10 1 2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
7 17
20 11 8 GND 18
9 19
<Cable side connector type> 10 20
Plug : 10120-6000EL
Shell : 10320-3210-00
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

NC keyboard connection terminal (FCUA-KB20/KB30) A B

CR03 1 GND 1 GND
20A 1A 2 IKSC0 2 I KSC1
3 Vcc 3 Vcc
4 IKSC2 4 I KSC3
5 IKSC4 5 I KSC5
6 IKSC6 6 I KSC7
7 IKSC8 7 I KSC9
20B 1B 8 IKSC10 8 I KSC11
9 IKSC12 9
10 10
11 11
<Cable side connector type> 12 12
13 I BUZCM 13 I BUZCM
Plug : 8830E-50 14 14
Recommended manufacturer: KEL 15 GND 15 GND
16 I RESET 16 I FAST
17 Vcc 17 Vcc
18 O NKD0 18 O NKD1
19 O NKD2 19 O NKD3
20 O NKD4 20 O NKD5
21 O NKD6 21 O NKD7
22 O BUZ 22
23 Vcc 23 GND
24 O READY 24
25 Vcc 25 Vcc

I-58
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.5 FCUA-LD10/LD100 Display Unit (7.2-type monochrome LCD)

NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable

(FCUA-KB20/KB30) A B
1 1
J2 2 I SC0 2 I SC1
1A 10A 3 I SC2 3 I SC3
4 I SC4 4 I SC5
5 I SC6 5
6 6 O KD7
1B 10B 7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10

LCD display signal output terminal 1 O FLM

2 O LP
CNZ24 1 3 CP
O
4 O DISPOFF*
<Cable side connector type> 5 Vcc
6 Vss
Connector : 53047-1510 7 VEE
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX 8 O DU0
9 O DU1
10 O DU2
11 O DU3
12 O DL0
13 O DL1
15 14 DL2
O
15 O DL3

LCD backlight power output terminal

<Cable side connector type> 1 I CCFL_HOT
CNZ22A 1 2 3 2 NC
Connector : QZ-19-3F01
3 CCFL_GND
Contact : QZ-19-F114A
Recommended manufacturer: HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO

External contrast adjustment terminal

CNZ23 <Cable side connector type> 1 I CCFL_HOT
1 4 Connector : 5051-04 2 NC
Contact : 2759-PBGL 3 CCFL_GND
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX

Function extension connector (Not used)

CR06 16A 1A
The pin assignments for this connector
16B 1B have not been released.
16C 1C

I-59
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.6 FCUA-EL10 Display Unit (9.5-type EL)

5.6 FCUA-EL10 Display Unit (9.5-type EL) * Cannot be used with M60S Series.

The thin-type EL communication terminal is described in this section.

The FCUA-KB10/KB12 NC keyboard can be connected to the FCUA-EL10 unit.

5.6.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

Back view

Accessory
EL display signal cable

CR04-2 cable (L=0.2m)

(1) (with ferrite core)

CR04-2 cable

(2)
J2 cable (L=0.39m)
(for menu keys)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) CR04 Display signal input terminal to EL
(2) J2 NC keyboard (FCUA-KB10/KB12) J2 terminal connection cable

5.6.2 Connector Pin Assignment

Display signal input terminal to EL A B

CR 04 1 1
2 2
3 3
4 GND 4 GND
5 O VD 5
6 O HD 6 GND
7 O DCLK 7 GND
8 O R 8 O G
9 O B 9 GND
10 O DTMG 10 GND
11 11 GND
12 O I 12 GND
13 O BLON* 13
14 14
15 15
16 16

NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable (FCUA-KB10/KB12) A B

J2 1 1
2 I SC0 2 I SC1
3 I SC2 3 I SC3
1A 10A 4 I SC4 4 I SC5
5 I SC6 5
6 6 O KD7
10B 7 7
1B 8 8
9 9
10 10

I-60
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.6 FCUA-EL10 Display Unit (9.5-type EL)

5.6.3 Connection of NC Keyboard Unit

Connect the CR04-2 cable to the FCUA-KB10/KB12 "CR04" connector.
Connect the J2 cable to the NC keyboard's "J2" connector.
The FCUA-EL10 (9.5-type EL) power is supplied from the CR04 connector via the CR04-2 cable.

FCUA-KB10/KB12

CR03 cable

J1

CR04
J2

CR04-2 cable

J2 cable

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-61
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.7 FCUA-CR10/CT100/CT120 Display Unit (9-type monochrome CRT)

5.7 FCUA-CR10/CT100/CT120 Display Unit (9-type monochrome CRT)

The CRT type communication terminal is described in this section.
The FCUA-CT100 unit integrates the FCUA-CR10 and FCUA-KB10/KB12.
The FCUA-CT120 unit is integrated with the FCUA-CT100 lathe system keyboard.

5.7.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

Back view

Accessory
CRT power cable

FCUA-R100 cable (L=2m)

(3)

(1) Display signal cable

CR04-1 cable (L=0.2m)

(2)
J2 cable
(for menu keys)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) CR04 Display signal input terminal to CRT
(2) J2 NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable
(3) Power input terminal This terminal supplies the power to the CRT. (100VAC)

5.7.2 Connector Pin Assignment

Display signal input terminal to CRT A B

1 1
CR04 2 2
3 3
4 GND 4 GND
5 O VD 5
6 O HD 6 GND
7 O DCLK 7 GND
8 O R 8 O G
9 O B 9 GND
10 O DTMG 10 GND
11 11 GND
12 O I 12 GND
13 O BLON* 13
14 14
15 15
16 16

NC keyboard J2 terminal connection cable A B

1 1
J2 2 I SC0 2 I SC1
1A 10A
3 I SC2 3 I SC3
4 I SC4 4 I SC5
5 I SC6 5
1B 10B 6 6 O KD7
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10

Terminal supplying power to CRT

1 I AC (H)
1 Crimp terminal: V1.25-4 2 I AC (N)
Recommended manufacturer: JST
2

I-62
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.7 FCUA-CR10/CT100/CT120 Display Unit (9-type monochrome CRT)

5.7.3 Connection of Power Supply

100VAC is supplied from the FCUA-R100 cable on the back of the communication terminal.

Power input terminal

FCUA-R100 cable (100VAC to 115VAC, 0.4A)

Switch
AC OUT AC IN

Use a double-OFF type that completely cuts off the circuit when turning the power ON and OFF.

5.7.4 Connection of NC Keyboard Unit

Connect the CR04-2 cable to the FCUA-KB10/KB12 "CR04" connector.
Connect the J2 cable to the NC keyboard's "J2" connector.
FCUA-KB10/KB12

CR03 cable

J1

CR04
J2
CR04-1 cable

J2 cable

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-63
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

The NC keyboard unit for the communication terminal is described in this section.
This unit is a separable type. The integrated type is designated with the communication type.

Combination of keyboard unit and display unit

Keyboard type Compatible display unit type
FCUA-KB10 (M system) FCUA-CR10 (9-type CRT)/FCUA-EL10 (9.5-type EL)
FCUA-KB12 (L system) FCUA-CR10 (9-type CRT)/FCUA-EL10 (9.5-type EL)
FCUA-KB20 (M system) FCUA-LD10 (7.2-type LCD)/FCU6-DUT32 (10.4-type LCD)
FCUA-KB30 (L system) FCU6-DUN33 (10.4-type LCD)
FCU6-KB021 (M system) FCU6-DUN32 (10.4-type LCD)
FCU6-DUN33 (10.4-type LCD)
FCU6-KB031 (L system) * Same height dimensions as 10.4-type LCD display
FCU6-KB022 (M system) FCU6-DUN22 (8.4-type LCD)

5.8.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

FCUA-KB10/KB12 FCUA-KB20/KB30 FCUA-KB022

FCU6-KB021/KB031
Back view Back view
Side view Back view

(1)
CR01
CR03
(7) (7)
(2) J1
CR03

(2) J1

(3) CS1

(4) CR04
J2
(7)
J2
J1
(5) CR02
(8)
(8)
CR05
(8)
(6) J2

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) CR01 Power input terminal (24VDC)
(2) CR03 NC keyboard connection terminal (CR03 cable is already wired.)
(3) CS1 Select the type of keyboard connected. (M system: 0/L system: 1)
(4) CR04 Display signal output terminal (For CRT/EL connection)
(5) CR02 Control unit connection terminal
(6) CR05 Remote I/O connection terminal
(7) J1 NC keyboard connection terminal (Connect the CR03 cable. Connect
the F054 cable for FCU6-KB022.)
Menu key connection terminal
(8) J2
(Connect the J2 cable from the display unit.)

Accessories
Enclosed with FCUA-KB10/KB12 Enclosed with FCU6-KB022
Enclosed connector set NC keyboard cable NC keyboard cable
FCUA-CN220 FCUA-CN211 CR03 Cable (L=0.1m) F054 Cable (L=0.5m)
(For CR01) (For CR05)
Y

I-64
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

5.8.2 Connection of Control Unit

Connect the cable from the control unit to the FCUA-KB10/KB12 unit's "CR02" connector.
FCUA-KB20/30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/KB031 do not have a connection.
FCUA-KB10/KB12
FCUA-KB10 Ex.FCA64

CR03
CR01

CS1

AUX1
CR04
SH21 cable
(FCUA-R000 cable)
CR02

CR05
The partner side connection is "AUX1".
(The connection position differs according
to the control unit.)

5.8.3 Connection of Display Unit

Connect the CR03 cable connected to the "CR03" connector to the NC keyboard's "J1" connector.
For FCU6-KB022, connect the F054 cable connected to the "J1" connector to the "NCKB" connector of
FCU6-DUN22.
Connect the J2 cable from the display unit to the NC keyboard's "J2" connector.

For FCUA-KB20/30 and FCU6-KB021/KB031

Ex. FCU6-DUT32
FCUA-KB20/30
FCU6-KB021/KB031

CR03 cable
J1 CR03

J2

J2 cable
(L=0.39m)

For FCUA-KB10/KB12

FCUA-KB10/KB12 Ex. FCUA-EL10

CR03 cable

J1

CR04
J2

CR04-2 cable

J2 cable
(L=0.39m)

I-65
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

For FCU6-KB022

FCU6-DUN22
FCU6-KB022

F054 Cable
NCKB

J1

J2

J2 Cable

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-66
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

5.8.4 Connection of Power Supply

Supply 24VDC from the FCUA-KB10/KB12 CR01 connector.
FCUA-KB20/30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/KB031 do not have a power supply terminal.
FCUA-KB10
FCUA-KB10/KB12

FCUA-R220 cable CR01

CR03

Stabilized power supply

CS1 Select a stabilized power supply that
24VDC satisfies the following specifications.
0V(RG)

CR04
Output voltage: 24VDC ± 5%
FG
Ripple: ±5% [p-p]
CR02
FG Rated current: 24VDC, 0.6A or more
CR05
AC(H)
Note) 24VDC, 1.5A or more is required
AC(N)
when FCUA-EL10 is used.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-67
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

5.8.5 Connector Pin Assignment

Power input terminal (24VDC)
CR01 1 <Cable side connector type> 1 I 24VDC
Connector: 2-178288-3 2 0V (RG)
Contact: 1-175218-5 3 FG
2
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP

Remote I/O unit connection terminal

CR05 1 <Cable side connector type> 1 I/O TXRX
Connector: 1-178288-3 2 I/O TXRX*

Contact: 1-175218-2 3 GND

2
Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP

Control unit connection terminal

CR02 10 1 1 GND 11 EN_RT
2 I RXD 12 I RXD*
3 13
4 O TXD 14 O TXD*
5 GND 15 GND
20 11 6 16
7 17
<Cable side connector type> 8 GND 18
Plug: 10120-6000EL 9 19
Shell: 10320-3210-00 10 20
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

I-68
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

Display signal output terminal (For CRT/EL connection)

CR04 A B
16A 1A 1 1
2 2
3 3
16B 1B 4 GND 4 GND
5 O VD 5
6 O HD 6 GND
<Cable side connector type> 7 O DCLK 7 GND
Connector: 8426-4500 8 O R 8 O G
Contact: 3690-1000 9 O B 9 GND
Recommended manufacturer: 3M 10 O DTMG 10 GND
11 11 GND
12 O I 12 GND
13 O BLON* 13
14 14
15 15
16 16

NC keyboard connection terminal (CR03 cable is already wired.)

CR03 A B
J1 20A 1A 1 GND 1 GND
2 I KSC0 2 I KSC1
3 Vcc 3 Vcc
4 I KSC2 4 I KSC3
5 I KSC4 5 I KSC5
20B 1B 6 I KSC6 6 I KSC7
7 I KSC8 7 I KSC9
8 I KSC10 8 I KSC11
9 I KSC12 9
10 10
11 11
<Cable side connector type> 12 12
Plug: 8830E-50
13 I BUZCM 13 I BUZCM
14 14
Recommended manufacturer: KEL 15 GND
15 GND
16 I RESET 16 I FAST
17 Vcc 17 Vcc
18 O NKD0 18 O NKD1
19 O NKD2 19 O NKD3
20 O NKD4 20 O NKD5
21 O NKD6 21 O NKD7
22 O BUZ 22
23 Vcc 23 GND
24 O READY 24
25 Vcc 25 Vcc

I-69
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

NC keyboard connection terminal (FCU6-KB022 only)

(F054 cable is already wired.)
J1 A B
13A 1A 1 I KBCS0* 1 I KBCS1*
2 I KBCS2* 2 I KBCS3*
3 I KBAD0 3 I KBAD1
4 I KBAD2 4 I BUZOUT*
5 I RDYOUT* 5 I SPOUT
13B 1B 6 O KBRES* 6
7 O KBD0 7 O KBD1
<Cable side connector type> 8 O KBD2 8 O KBD3
Plug: 7926-6500SC 9 GND 9 GND
Strain relief: 3448-7926 10 GND 10 GND
Recommended manufacturer: 3M 11 GND 11 GND
12 Vcc 12 Vcc
13 Vcc 13 Vcc

Menu key connection terminal

(Connect the J2 cable from the display unit.)
J2 A B
10A 1A 1 1
2 I SC0 2 I SC1
3 I SC2 3 I SC3
4 I SC4 4 I SC5
10B 1B 5 I SC6 5
6 6 O KD7
7 7
8 8
9 9
10 10

Menu key connection terminal (FCU6-KB022 only)

(Connect the J2 cable from the FCU6-DUN22.)
J2 A B
1 1
10A 1A 2 I SC3 2 I SC5
3 I SC7 3 I SC11
4 I SC13 4 I SC15
10B 1B 5 I SC17 5
6 6 O KBD3
7 O KBD2 7
8 8
9 9
10 10

I-70
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

5.8.6 Keyboard and Display Unit Installation Pitch

Basically, the display unit and keyboard unit should be installed next to each other.
When separating the communication terminal from the keyboard, use the following explanation as a
guideline.

(1) The installation pitch applies when installing on a flat structure.

(2) The installation pitch may be narrower depending on the panel structure and layout of other devices.
(3) The CR03 cable (F054 cable for FCU6-KB022) and J2 cable from the display unit are connected to
the keyboard unit.

FCUA-LD10

For vertical placement For horizontal placement

M ITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI

10mm (Max.)
100mm
(Max.)

FCU6-DUT32/FCU6-DUN33

For vertical placement For horizontal placement

200mm (Max.)
200mm
(Max.)

I-71
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

FCU6-DUN22

For vertical placement For horizontal placement

150mm (Max.)
300mm
(Max.)

FCUA-EL10/FCUA-CR10

The CR04/CR04-2 cable length for the display unit with FCUA-KB10/KB12 is short, so the
installation pitch cannot be increased.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-72
 5. COMMUNICATION TERMINAL
5.8 FCUA-KB10/KB12/KB20/KB30 and FCU6-KB021/KB022/031 NC Keyboard Unit

When separating the display unit and keyboard unit, review the machine operation panel while referring
to the following connector layout.

FCUA-LD10
FCU6-DUT32 J2 cable
(L=0.39m)

CR01

CR03

A 47

FCUA-LD10：RX213 card
FCU6-DUT32：RX215 card
F

(Part height) D
G H C 8
B

FCU6-DUN33
RX212 card QY287 card

47
CR01

CR03

F J2 cable
(L=0.39m)

(Part height) D
G H C 8
B

FCUA-KB20
FCUA-KB30
20

Unit：mm
41

CR03
Display unit type A B C D E F G H
Cable
J1
FCUA-LD10 200 260 78 48 26 59 22 20 200
46

FCU6-DUT32 210 270 30 18 30 86 9 30 500

FCU6-DUN33 210 270 150 25 19 124 9 30 500
24

J2 cable length: 390mm

200

J2
45
44

8 12
15 140

I-73
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.1 Outline of I/O Unit

6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT

6.1 Outline of I/O Unit
The base I/O unit is used to connect the servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal and
remote I/O unit. One unit is always required for each control unit.

6.1.1 Configuration of model name

FCU6-DX350

0: Sink output
1: Source output
5: Serial 1CH + manual pulse generator 3CH
3: DI48 points/DO48 points
4: DI64 points/DO64 points
DX: Base I/O unit

6.1.2 Configuration and functions of each unit

Machine input circuit type and number of points

FCU6-DX350 FCU6-DX351 FCU6-DX450 FCU6-DX451
1 Input type Sink/source
2 COM pin connection 24VDC 0V (RG)
3 No. of input points 48 points 64 points

Machine output circuit type and number of points

FCU6-DX350 FCU6-DX351 FCU6-DX450 FCU6-DX451
1 Output type Sink type Source type Sink type Source type
2 Output current 60mA/1 points
3 No. of output points 48 points 64 points

The specifications other than the machine input and machine output connector are common.

I-74
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing

6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing

M60/M60S Series Base I/O unit

control unit
F010 cable
CF10 SH21 cable Servo drive unit
CF10 SV1
SH21 cable
CF11 SV2 Servo drive unit
F040 cable
ENC1 Synchronous feed encoder

SKIP Skip signal

R211 cable
RIO1 Remote I/O unit
R211 cable
RIO2 Remote I/O unit
F050 cable R301 cable
CF31 D/IN
R301 cable
CF32 D/IN
R301 cable
Function CF33 D/OUT
additional R301 cable
card CF34 D/OUT
HR211
F032 cable
RS232C RS-232C Port No.2
CF11 F020 cable
HANDLE 1st manual pulse generator
1CH
Stabilized
power supply F021 cable
2nd manual pulse generator
2CH

24VDC DCIN F022 cable

3rd manual pulse generator
3CH
CS1 CS2

0 1

* CS1 and CS2 set the remote I/O communication station numbers.

(Note) The base I/O unit occupies two stations of the remote I/O communication (MC link B
communication).

I-75
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing

I/O unit
name
FCU6-DX350 FCU6-DX351 FCU6-DX450 FCU6-DX451
Connector
name
Connect with the control unit
CF10
(servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal, remote I/O unit).
CF11 Connect with the control unit (+5V, RS-232C, manual pulse generator).
SV1 Connect with the servo drive unit/spindle drive unit.
SV2 Connect with the auxiliary axis.
Connect with the synchronous feed encoder. When using two units for the
ENC1
synchronous feed encoder, connect the second unit to ENC2 of the control unit.
SKIP Connect with the skip signal input. Up to eight points can be used.
Connect with the remote I/O unit. There are two stations occupied on this unit, so the
RIO1
additional remote I/O units for six stations can be used.
RIO2 Connect with the remote I/O unit.
CF31 DI: 32 (sink/source) DI: 32 (sink/source)
CF32 DI: 16 (sink/source) DI: 32 (sink/source)
CF33 DO: 32 (sink type) DO: 32 (source type) DO: 32 (sink type) DO: 32 (source type)
CF34 DO: 16 (sink type) DO: 16 (source type) DO: 32 (sink type) DO: 32 (source type)
RS232C Connect with an RS-232C device.
Connect with the 12VDC power supply type handle. Up to three units can be
HANDLE
connected.

Rotary switch CS1: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH
CS1 DI: X0-X1F and DO: Y0-Y1F.
This is normally used set to "0".
Rotary switch CS2: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH
CS2 DI: X20-X3F and DO: Y20-Y3F.
This is normally used set to "1".

* The rotary switch CS1 and CS2 settings may differ according to the machine configuration and
whether other remote I/O units are being used. Set within the range of 0 to 7.

I-76
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.2 Base I/O Unit Connection System Drawing

Machine input/output terminal

I/O CF31 CF32
B A B A
20 I X0 20 I X10 20 I X20 20 I (X30)
19 I X1 19 I X11 19 I X21 19 I (X31)
18 I X2 18 I X12 18 I X22 18 I (X32)
17 I X3 17 I X13 17 I X23 17 I (X33)
16 I X4 16 I X14 16 I X24 16 I (X34)
15 I X5 15 I X15 15 I X25 15 I (X35)
14 I X6 14 I X16 14 I X26 14 I (X36)
13 I X7 13 I X17 13 I X27 13 I (X37)
12 I X8 12 I X18 12 I X28 12 I (X38)
11 I X9 11 I X19 11 I X29 11 I (X39)
10 I XA 10 I X1A 10 I X2A 10 I (X3A)
9 I XB 9 I X1B 9 I X2B 9 I (X3B)
8 I XC 8 I X1C 8 I X2C 8 I (X3C)
7 I XD 7 I X1D 7 I X2D 7 I (X3D)
6 I XE 6 I X1E 6 I X2E 6 I (X3E)
5 I XF 5 I X1F 5 I X2F 5 I (X3F)
4 4 4 4
3 I COM 3 I COM 3 I COM 3 I COM
2 24VDC 2 0V(RG) 2 24VDC 2 0V(RG)
1 24VDC 1 0V(RG) 1 24VDC 1 0V(RG)

The devices shown in parentheses are used only

with FCU6-DX450/451.

CF33 CF34
B A B A
20 O Y0 20 O Y10 20 O Y20 20 O (Y30)
19 O Y1 19 O Y11 19 O Y21 19 O (Y31)
18 O Y2 18 O Y12 18 O Y22 18 O (Y32)
17 O Y3 17 O Y13 17 O Y23 17 O (Y33)
16 O Y4 16 O Y14 16 O Y24 16 O (Y34)
15 O Y5 15 O Y15 15 O Y25 15 O (Y35)
14 O Y6 14 O Y16 14 O Y26 14 O (Y36)
13 O Y7 13 O Y17 13 O Y27 13 O (Y37)
12 O Y8 12 O Y18 12 O Y28 12 O (Y38)
11 O Y9 11 O Y19 11 O Y29 11 O (Y39)
10 O YA 10 O Y1A 10 O Y2A 10 O (Y3A)
9 O YB 9 O Y1B 9 O Y2B 9 O (Y3B)
8 O YC 8 O Y1C 8 O Y2C 8 O (Y3C)
7 O YD 7 O Y1D 7 O Y2D 7 O (Y3D)
6 O YE 6 O Y1E 6 O Y2E 6 O (Y3E)
5 O YF 5 O Y1F 5 O Y2F 5 O (Y3F)
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 24VDC 2 0V(RG) 2 24VDC 2 0V(RG)
1 24VDC 1 0V(RG) 1 24VDC 1 0V(RG)

The devices shown in parentheses are used only

with FCU6-DX450/451.

CS1 CS2
0 1

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: 7940-6500SC * This examples shows CS1 set to "0" and CS2 set to "1".
Sumitomo 3M Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details.
Recommended manufacturer: 3M

I-77
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.3 Connection of Power Supply

6.3 Connection of Power Supply

Supply the 24VDC power for the base I/O unit from the DCIN connector.

(Note) A 24VDC power supply input is required for both the sink type and source type.
I-78
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.4 Connection of I/O Signal

6.4 Connection of I/O Signal

(1) CF31 and CF32 input circuit specifications
The sink and source input is changed by connecting 24VDC to COM or connecting 0V (RG). There
are 48 or 64 input points, and the input device numbers are X0 to X3F.

Sink type Source type

(Machine side) (Machine side)

CF31/32 CF31/32
24VDC 24VDC
2.2k?Ω 2.2k?Ω

0V(RG)

2.2k?Ω 2.2k?Ω

0V(RG) Control Control

circuit circuit

COM COM
0V(RG)

Input conditions Use the input signals within the range of the following conditions.

Sink type Source type

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 below)
6 Input signal holding time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 below)
7 Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 16ms
8 Machine side contact capacity +30V or more, 16mA or more

<Caution>
Input signal holding time: 40ms or more as a guideline. The input signal can only
be confirmed if held longer than the ladder process cycle time.

T2 T2
T1 T1 T1 T1

T3 T4 T3 T4

I-79
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.4 Connection of I/O Signal

(2) Specifications of CF33, CF34 output circuit

The output is fixed to a sink or source output. There are 48 or 64 output points, and the Y0 to Y2F or
Y0 to Y3F output pins are used. Use within the specification range shown below.

Sink type Source type

(Machine side)

24VDC 24VDC
CF33/34 CF33/34

RA (Machine side)

RA

R
PL
Control
Control R circuit
circuit PL
0V(RG) 0V(RG)

Output conditions
Insulation method Non-insulation
Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/point
Output delay time 40µs

(3) Rotary switch (CS1, CS2) setting

Rotary switch CS1: Set the station No. of the 32 points remote I/O DI: X0-X1F and DO:
CS1 Y0-Y1F for system 1.
Normally, this is used set at "0".
Rotary switch CS2: Set the station No. of the 32 points remote I/O DI: X20-X3F and DO:
CS2 Y20-Y3F for system 1.
Normally, this is used set at "1".
The No. of stations occupied with this card is two stations.

<Caution>
∗ When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage
resistance 100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
∗ When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor (R =
150Ω) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the current is
less than the above tolerable current including the momentary current.)

CAUTION

When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the
load.
When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor serially to the
load to suppress rush currents.

I-80
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.5 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection

6.5 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection

The number of I/O points can be expanded by connecting a remote I/O unit to the base I/O unit.
Refer to Chapter 7 CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT for details on the remote I/O unit.

(2) RIO1 terminator

Connect a terminator to the final remote I/O unit connected to RIO1.

Terminator type: R-TM Refer to Appendix 2.22. Terminator (R-TM)

Contact and connector manufacturer:

Tyco Electronics AMP

I-81
 6. BASE I/O UNIT CONNECTION
6.6 Connection of Servo Drive Unit

6.6 Connection of Servo Drive Unit

Connect the servo drive unit to SV1 (servo axis, PLC axis, spindle) and SV2 (auxiliary axis: MR-J2-CT)
of the base I/O unit.
Refer to the M60/M60S Series Specifications Manual (BNP-B2210) for the number and types of servo
drive units and spindle drive units that can be connected to SV1 and SV2.

* Connect a terminator or battery

unit to the final servo drive unit.

<Related items>
Cable manufacturing drawing: APPENDIX 2 (SH21 cable)

I-82
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.7 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

6.7 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

Connect the encoder to ENC1 on the base I/O unit.
When connecting the second unit, connect it to ENC2 on the control unit.

A ENC1A K 0V
B ENC1Z L
C ENC1B M
D N ENC1A*
E Case ground P ENC1Z*
F R ENC1B*
G S
H 5VDC T
J
<Related items>
Outline drawing: APPENDIX 1
Cable manufacturing drawing: APPENDIX 2 (F040 cable)
Connector pin assignment: 6.10 Base I/O Unit Connector Pin Assignment (ENC1)
4.2.8 Control Unit Connector Pin Assignment (ENC2)

I-83
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.8 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor)

6.8 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor)

Connect the skip signal to SKIP on the base I/O unit.
The skip signal is used for processing the high-speed signals. Always shield the cable.

(1) Skip signal cable

Base I/O unit

SKIP

2
2.2kΩ SKIP IN1
10
2.2kΩ SKIP IN2
3
2.2kΩ SKIP IN3
11
2.2kΩ SKIP IN4
5
2.2kΩ SKIP IN5
13
2.2kΩ SKIP IN6
6
Stabilized
power supply 2.2kΩ SKIP IN7
14
24VDC
FG 2.2kΩ SKIP IN8
1
0V(RG) Control circuit
U
8
FG
U 9
15

(2) Input conditions

Use the input signal within the following condition range.

18V or more,
1 Input voltage at external contact ON Ton
25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more 24V
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 1mA or less
5 Input signal hold time (Ton) 2ms or more 0V t
6 Internal response time 0.08ms or less
Ton > 2ms
+30V or more,
7 Machine side contact capacity
16mA or more

<Related item>
Connector pin assignment: 6.10 Base I/O Unit Connector Pin Assignment (SKIP)

CAUTION
Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing
so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
I-84
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.9 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

6.9 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

To connect the manual pulse generators, connect an F020/021/022 cable to "HANDLE" on the HR211
card. Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected.
(Refer to Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 Cable Manufacturing Drawings for cable details.)

Connecting one manual pulse generator

Manual pulse generator SKIP

ENC1
FCUA-HD60
Rear view
NO.1

SV2 SV1
CR31

CF11
R S232C RIO2 DCIN
12V 0V A B
RIO1
HANDLE

4-M3
F020 cable

Connecting two manual pulse generators

Manual pulse generator

FCUA-HD60
Rear view
NO.2 NO.1

12V 0V A B 12V 0V A B

4-M3
F021 cable

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-85
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.9 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

When devices (pulse generators) other than manual pulse generators (HD60) are connected to the
additional I/O units, use within the ranges shown in the following specifications. The commercially-
available manual pulse generators include the 25 pulse/rev type and 100 pulse/rev type.
The MELDAS60/60S Series internally multiplies one pulse by four, so use the 25 pulse/rev type.

Input/output conditions
90° phase difference between A phase and B phase.
Input pulse signal type
(Refer to waveform (e) below.)
Input signal voltage H-level 3.5V to 5.25V, L-level 0V to 0.5V or less
Max. input pulse frequency 100kHz
Power voltage for pulse
12VDC ± 10%
generators
Max. output current 300mA
No. of pulses per rotation 25 pulse/rev (25 pulse/rev for HD60)

Input waveform
The input waveform phase difference must be ±T/10 (T: cycle) or less.

A (B) phase

B (A) phase
a b c d e

T
a. b. c. d. e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 ± T/10
T: A or B phase cycle (Min. 10µs)

Input/output circuit

Connector pin No. +5V

470?Ω
HA1 1
220?Ω 4700pF
HA2 3
+5V 0V(LG)
HA3 5
Input
+5V
470?Ω
HB1 2 4700pF
220?Ω
HB2 4 0V(LG)
Control circuit

HB3 6

12VDC 10,12,14
Output
0V(GND) 9,11,13

I-86
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.10 Connector Pin Assignment

6.10 Connector Pin Assignment

(1) Base I/O Unit Connector

Control unit connection terminal

CF10
25 1
Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector
Pin Assignment (CF10) for details on the
connector pin assignment.

50 26
<Cable side connector type>
Plug : 10150-6000EL
Shell : 10350-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Servo drive unit connection terminal

SV1 1 GND 11 GND
10 1 2 O SVTXD1 12 O SVTXD1*
3 I SVALM1 13 I SVALM1*
4 I SVRXD1 14 I SVRXD1*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
20 11 7 O SVEMG1 17 O SVEMG1*
8 18
<Cable side connector type> 9 19
Plug : 10120-6000EL 10 O +5V 20
Shell : 10320-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Servo drive unit connection terminal

SV2 1 GND 11 GND
10 1 2 O SVTXD2 12 O SVTXD2*
3 I SVALM2 13 I SVALM2*
4 I SVRXD2 14 I SVRXD2*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
20 11 7 O SVEMG2 17 O SVEMG2*
8 18
<Cable side connector type> 9 19
Plug : 10120-6000EL 10 O +5V 20
Shell : 10320-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Synchronous feed encoder connection terminal

ENC1 5 1 1 I ENC1A
6 I ENC1A*
2 I ENC1B
7 I ENC1B*
3 I ENC1Z
8 I ENC1Z*
4 GND
<Cable side 5 GND
9 O +5V
connector type> 9 6
Connector : CDE-9PF (Connect the connector case to shield.)
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDE-CTH
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

I-87
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.10 Connector Pin Assignment

Skip signal input terminal

SKIP 1 GND
9 GND
8 2 I SKIP IN1
1 10 I SKIP IN2
3 I SKIP IN3
11 I SKIP IN4
4
12
5 I SKIP IN5
13 I SKIP IN6
6 I SKIP IN7
15 9 14 I SKIP IN8
7
15 GND
8 GND
<Cable side connector type>
Connector : CDA-15P
Contact : CD-PC-111 Connect the connector case to shield.
Case : HDA-CTH Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

Remote I/O unit connection terminal <Cable side connector type> 1 I/O TXRX1
RIO1 1 2 3 Connector : 1-178288-3 2 I/O TXRX1*
Contact : 1-175218-2 3 GND
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

Remote I/O unit connection terminal <Cable side connector type>

1 I/O TXRX2
Connector : 1-178288-3 2 I/O TXRX2*
RIO2 1 2 3 Contact : 1-175218-2 3 GND
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

Power input terminal (24VDC) <Cable side connector type>

Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC
DCIN 1 2 3 0V(RG)
Contact : 1-175218-5 2
Recommended manufacturer: 3 FG
Tyco Electronics AMP

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing
so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-88
 6. CONNECTION OF BASE I/O UNIT
6.10 Connector Pin Assignment

(2) Additional I/O Unit Connector

Control unit connection terminal

CF11
1A 25A

Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit

1B 25B Connector Pin Assignment (CF11) for
details on the connector pin assignment.
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN
Recommended manufacturer: DDK

Manual pulse generator connection terminal

HANDLE
8 1 1 I 1HA
9 GND
Reference materials 2 I 1HB
10 O 12VDC
3 I 2HA
Appendix 2.5 F020/21/22 11 GND
4 I 2HB
Cable Assembly Drawing 12 O 12VDC
5 I 3HA
15 9 13 GND
6 I 3HB
14 O 12VDC
7
<Cable side connector type> 15
8
Connector : CDA-15P
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDA-CTH
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

RS-232C device connection terminal Explanation of

1 signals
13 1 14 O SD2
RS232C 2 O SD1 (Note)
O ER2 SD: Send Data
3 I RD1 (Note) 15
RD: Receive Data
16 I RD2
4 O RS1 (Note) RS: Request to Send
17 I CS2 CS: Clear to Send
5 I CS1 (Note)
25 14 6 I DR1 (Note) 18 DR: Data Set Ready
Reference materials 7 GND 19 O RS2 ER: Data Terminal
Appendix 2.6 F030/31/32 20 O ER1 (Note) Ready
8
Cable Assembly Drawing 21 I DR2
9 (Note) Signal name
10 22
meanings:
<Cable side connector type> 11 GND 23 ††1: For mainte-
24 GND nance by
Connector : CDB-25P 12 reserve
25 reserve service
Contact : CD-PC-111 13
personnel
Case : HDB-CTH ††2: General
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric released
channel

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing
so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-89
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.1 Outline of Remote I/O Unit

7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT

This chapter describes the connection of the remote I/O unit and machine control signals.

7.1 Outline of Remote I/O Unit

The following eight types of signals can be input/output from the remote I/O unit (FCUA-DX†††)
according to the type and No. of contacts. Use serial link connections (MC link B) to connect the unit with
the base I/O unit or the communication terminal.
When the remote I/O unit is connected with serial links, multiple units can be used as long as the total No.
of occupied stations (channels) is within 8 channels. Because the base I/O unit uses two stations when
base I/O unit system 1 is used, up to six stations of the remote I/O unit can be connected. (Refer to
Section 7.3 "Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units" for details.)

No. of occupied
Unit type Machine control signals that can be handled
serial link stations
FCUA-DX100 Digital input signal (DI) : 32 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
1
Digital output signal (DO) : 32 points (non-insulation) sink type
FCUA-DX101 Digital input signal (DI) : 32 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
1
Digital output signal (DO) : 32 points (non-insulation) source type
FCUA-DX110 Digital input signal (DI) : 64 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
2
Digital output signal (DO) : 48 points (non-insulation) sink type
FCUA-DX111 Digital input signal (DI) : 64 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
2
Digital output signal (DO) : 48 points (non-insulation) source type
FCUA-DX120 Digital input signal (DI) : 64 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
Digital output signal (DO) : 48 points (non-insulation) sink type 2
Analog output (AO) : 1 point
FCUA-DX121 Digital input signal (DI) : 64 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
Digital output signal (DO) : 48 points (non-insulation) source type 2
Analog output (AO) : 1 point
FCUA-DX140 Digital input signal (DI) : 32 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
Digital output signal (DO) : 32 points (non-insulation) sink type
2
Analog input (AI) : 4 points
Analog output (AO) : 1 point
FCUA-DX141 Digital input signal (DI) : 32 points (photo coupler insulation) sink/source type
Digital output signal (DO) : 32 points (non-insulation) source type
2
Analog input (AI) : 4 points
Analog output (AO) : 1 point

I-90
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.2 Names of Each Remote I/O Unit Section

7.2 Names of Each Remote I/O Unit Section

FCUA-DX10 FCUA-DX11 / FCUA-DX12 FCUA-DX14

Front view Front view Front view

1 1 8 1 10

2 2 2
3 3
3 3 3

4 4 9 4

(Front) (Front) (Front)

5 5 5

6 Bottom 6 Bottom 6 Bottom

view view view
7 7 7

(Rear) (Rear) (Rear)

1 DI-L (machine input signal connector) For changeover off transfer speed.
Normally set to left side.
DS
2 DS (transfer speed changeover switch) Not used.
3 4 5
2 6
1 7
3 CS (station No. changeover switch) CS 0
F
8 Selection of station No.
9
E
D C B A

4 DO-L (machine output signal connector)

5 RIO1 (serial connection connector #1) Enlarged view of DS and CS

6 RIO2 (serial connection connector #2)

7 DCIN (24VDC power input connector)

8 DI-R (machine input signal connector)

9 DO-R (machine output signal connector)

10 AIO (analog signal input/output connector)

I-91
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.3 Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units

7.3 Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units
When the remote I/O unit is connected with serial links (MC link B), multiple units can be used as long as
the total No. of occupied stations is within 8 stations. Because the base I/O unit uses two stations, up to
six stations of the remote I/O unit stations can be connected to RIO1 of the base I/O unit.

No. of occupied serial

Unit name
link stations
FCUA-DX10 1
FCUA-DX11 2
FCUA-DX12 2
FCUA-DX14 2

When using multiple remote I/O units, a characteristic station No. must be set for each unit. The
FCUA-DX10 unit has one station No. setting switch, and FCUA-DX11 , DX12 and DX14 unit
have two switches. Each of these switches must be set to a characteristic station No. within a range of 0
to 7.

CS2 CS1
<Setting Example 1>

Base I/O unit 1 0

SKIP
FCUA-DX10□unit
ENC1

SV2SV1
CR31
CF31 CF32
CF33 CF34

RIO2 RIO1 DCIN

Total No. of occupied

2 stations:3
No. of occupied stations:1

CS2 CS1
<Setting Example 2>
FCUA-DX11□unit
1 0 or
Base I/O unit FCUA-DX12□unit

SKIP
FCUA-DX10□unit
ENC1

SV2SV1
CR31
CF31 CF32
CF33 CF34
RIO2 RIO1 DCIN

3 4
2

No. of occupied stations:1 No. of occupied stations:2

Total No. of occupied stations:5

I-92
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.3 Setting of Station No. When Using Multiple Remote I/O Units

CS2 CS1
<Setting example 3>

Base I/O unit 1 0 FCUA-DX11□unit or FCUA-DX12□unit 3 units

SKIP
ENC1

SV2SV1
CR31

RIO2 DCIN
RIO1

2 3 4 5 6 7
No. of occupied No. of occupied No. of occupied
stations:2 stations:2 stations:2

Total No. of occupied stations: 8

(Max. configuration)

<CAUTION>
The assignment of each unit's input/output signal address will
change with the setting of the channel No.
Refer to "PLC Interface Manual" for details.

I-93
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.4 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit

7.4 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit

Sink type and source type share the digital signal input circuit.
Connect according to each respective diagram below.

Input circuit (Machine side) DI-L/DI-R

2.2kΩ

0V(RG)

2.2kΩ

0V(RG)

2.2kΩ

0V(RG)

2.2kΩ

0V(RG)

2.2kΩ

0V(RG) Control
circuit
24VDC(+)

A3,B3 COM

Sink type

(Machine side) DI-L/DI-R

24VDC(+) 2.2kΩ

24VDC(+) 2.2kΩ

24VDC(+) 2.2kΩ

24VDC(+) 2.2kΩ

24VDC(+) 2.2kΩ

Control
circuit

0V(RG) A3,B3 COM

Source type

I-94
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.4 Outline of Digital Signal Input Circuit

Input conditions
The input signals must be used within the following condition ranges.

Sink type Source type

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 below)
6 Input signal holding time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 below)
7 Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 16ms
8 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more

<Caution>
Input signal holding time: 40ms or more as a guideline. The input signal can only
be confirmed if held longer than the ladder process cycle time.

T2 T2
T1 T1 T1 T1

T3 T4 T3 T4

I-95
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.5 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit

7.5 Outline of Digital Signal Output Circuit

The digital signal output circuit uses a sink type (DX1†0) or source type (DX1†1).
Use within the specification ranges shown below.

Output circuit

Sink type Source type

(Machine side) DO-L/DO-R DO-L/DO-R
24VDC(+) (Machine side) 24VDC(+)
RA

RA
Control Control
R circuit circuit
PL

R
PL

Output conditions

Insulation method Non-insulation

Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/1 point
Output delay time 40µs

<CAUTION>
∗ When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage
resistance 100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
∗ When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor
(R=150Ω) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the
current is less than the above tolerable current including the momentary current.)

CAUTION
When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the
load.
When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor serially to the
load to suppress rush currents.

I-96
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.6 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit

7.6 Outline of Analog Signal Output Circuit

The analog signal output circuit can be used only for the FCUA-DX120/DX121/DX140/DX141.

Output circuit

R
220Ω R
A0 DAC

A0*
OV(LG)

Output conditions

Output voltage 0V to ±10V (±5%)

Resolution 12bit (±10V × n/4096) (Note)
Load conditions 10kΩ load resistance
Output impedance 220Ω
(Note) n = (20 to 211)

I-97
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.7 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit

7.7 Outline of Analog Signal Input Circuit

The analog signal input circuit can be used only for the FCUA-DX140/DX141.

Input circuit

150Ω ADC
AI

AI*
OV(LG)

Input conditions

Max. input rating ±15V

Resolution 10V/2000 (5mV)
Precision Within ±25mV
AD input sampling time 14.2ms (AI0)/42.6ms (AI1 to 3)

I-98
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.8 Connection of FCUA-DX10 /14 Unit and Machine Control Signal

7.8 Connection of FCUA-DX10 /14 Unit and Machine Control Signal

Type of machine input/output Input Output
signal and No. of points 32 points 32 points

FCUA-DX10□
R300 cable/
or
R301 cable FCUA-DX14□
DI-L
Machine signal

R300 cable/
R301 cable
DO-L
Machine signal

The remote I/O unit cable types include the R300 and R301 types. The R300 cable has one end cut off,
and the R301 cable is used for connection to the IDEC IZUMI Corporation terminal block
BX1F-T40A(Note 1). The R300-3M and R301-3M cables are available. If a cable longer than 3m is
required, use the CN300 and CS301 connector set.
The one-end CN300 connector (optional, with one end) includes the DI-L (DI-R) and DO-L (DO-R)
connectors. The CS301 connector set (optional with both ends) includes the DI-L and DO-L connectors,
and two connectors for connection with the terminal block (IDEC IZUMI Corporation).
(Note 1) IDEC IZUMI Corporation I/O terminal BX1F-T40

<Outline of connection>

DI-L FCUA-DX100/140 DI-L FCUA-DX101/141

A3 COM A3 COM
24VDC(+) B3 0V(RG) B3
Input circuit 24VDC(+) Input circuit
2.2kΩ 2.2kΩ
sink type source type
0V
(RG) B1 B1
B2 B2
A1 A1
A2 A2
24VDC(+)
DO-L DO-L
RA RA Output circuit
source type
Output circuit
PL PL
sink type
B1 0V(RG) B1
B2 Control B2 Control
A1 circuit A1 circuit
Machine A2 Machine A2
control panel control panel

RIO1 RIO2 DCIN RIO1 RIO2 DCIN

123 123
Stabilized Stabilized
power supply 24VDC(+) 0V FG FG power supply 24VDC(+) 0V FG FG

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-99
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.8 Connection of FCUA-DX10 /14 Unit and Machine Control Signal

<Signal assignment table>

FCUA-DX10□/14□
<CAUTION>
DI-L
When using two or more remote I/O
units or when connecting to the
communication terminal, the signal B A
Machine side X40 X50 20
assignment will differ. Refer to the "PLC X41 X51 19
control panel, etc.
Interface Manual" for details. The I/O X42 X52 18
assignment shows an example when the X43 X53 17
X44 X54 16
station No. is set to "2". X45 X55 15
24VDC(+) X46 X56 14
DI-L X47 X57 13
X48 X58 12
X49 X59 11
X4A X5A 10
X4B X5B 9
X4C X5C 8
0V(RG) X4D X5D 7
X4E X5E 6
X4F X5F 5
4
COM COM 3
24VDC 0V(RG) 2
24VDC 0V(RG) 1
B A

DO-L

B A
Y40 Y50 20
Y41 Y51 19
Y42 Y52 18
Y43 Y53 17
24VDC(+) Y44 Y54 16
Y45 Y55 15
Y46 Y56 14
RA DO-L Y47 Y57 13
Y48 Y58 12
Y49 Y59 11
Y4A Y5A 10
PL Y4B Y5B 9
Y4C Y5C 8
Y4D Y5D 7
Y4E Y5E 6
0V(RG) Y4F Y5F 5
4
3
24VDC 0V(RG) 2
24VDC 0V(RG) 1
Control unit B A

Communication RIO1 RIO2 DCIN

24VDC(+) terminal 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
TxRx TxRx* LG TxRx TxRx* LG +24V 0V FG

X X Y

0V(RG)
R-TM

Remote I/O unit

<Adaptive connector>

DCIN (CN220) RIO1/RIO2 (CN211) DI-L/DO-L (CN300) Terminator (R-TM)

Y X
Connector : 2-178288-3 Connector : 1-178288-3 Solderless type connector:
X
Contact : 1-175218-5 Contact : 1-175218-2 7940-6500SC
Manufacturer : Manufacturer : 3M
Manufacturer :
Tyco Electronics AMP Manufacturer :
Tyco Electronics AMP
Tyco Electronics AMP

I-100
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.9 Connection of FCUA-DX14 Unit and Analog Input/Output Signal

7.9 Connection of FCUA-DX14 Unit and Analog Input/Output Signal

For the analog input/output signal, the R031 cable is connected to "AIO". Up to four input points and one
output point of the analog input/output signal can be connected. When manufacturing the R031 cable,
use the CS000 connector set (optional, with both ends).

FCUA-DX14□

AIO

R031 cable 20 10

11 1

Pin No.

Input/output circuit

FCUA-DX14
Connector pin No.
150Ω
AI0 2
150Ω
AI1 12
Input 150Ω ADC
AI2 3
150Ω
AI3 13
R

220 R
A0 7
DAC
Output

GND 1 OV(RG)

GND 11

GND 5

GND 15

OV(RG)
CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-101
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.10 Connection of FCUA-DX11 Unit and Machine Control Signal

7.10 Connection of FCUA-DX11 Unit and Machine Control Signal

Type of machine input/output Input Output
signal and No. of points 64 points 48 points

FCUA-DX11□
R300 cable/
R301 cable
DI-L
Machine signal

DI-R
R300 cable/
R301 cable
DO-L DCIN
Machine signal RIO2
RIO1
DO-R

The remote I/O unit cable types include the R300 and R301 types. The R300 cable has one end cut off,
and the R301 cable is used for connection to the IDEC IZUMI Corporation terminal block
BX1F-T40A(Note 1). The R300-3M and R301-3M cables are available. If a cable longer than 3m is
required, use the CN300 and CS301 connector set.
The one-end CN300 connector (optional, with one end) includes the DI-L (DI-R) and DO-L (DO-R)
connectors. The CS301 connector set (optional with both ends) includes the DI-L and DO-L connectors,
and two connectors for connection with the terminal block (IDEC IZUMI Corporation).
(Note 1) IDEC IZUMI Corporation I/O terminal BX1F-T40

<Outline of connection>

DI-L/R FCUA-DX110 DI-L/R FCUA-DX111

A3 COM A3 COM
24VDC(+) B3 0V(RG B3
Input circuit 24VDC(+) Input circuit
2.2kΩ sink type 2.2kΩ source type
0V
(RG) B1 B1
B2 B2
A1 A1
A2 A2
24VDC(+)
DO-L/R DO-L/R
RA RA Output circuit

Output circuit source type

PL sink type PL
B1 B1
Control 0V B2 Control
B2
A1 circuit A1 circuit
Machine Machine A2
A2
control panel control panel

RIO1 RIO2 DCIN RIO1 RIO2 DCIN

123 123
Stabilized Stabilized
24VDC(+) 0V FG FG 24VDC(+) 0V FG FG
power supply power supply

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-102
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.10 Connection of FCUA-DX11 Unit and Machine Control Signal

<Signal assignment table>

<CAUTION>
When using two or more remote I/O units or when FCUA-DX11□
connecting to the communication terminal, the signal
assignment will differ. Refer to the "PLC Interface DI-L DI-R
Manual" for details. The I/O assignment shows an
example when the station No. is set to "2".
B A B A
Machine side DI-L X40 X50 20 X60 X7020
X41 X51 19 X61 X7119
control panel, etc. X42 X52 18 X62 X7218
X43 X53 17 X63 X7317
24VDC(+) X44 X54 16 X64 X7416
X45 X55 15 X65 X7515
X46 X56 14 X66 X7614
X47 X57 13 X67 X7713
X48 X58 12 X68 X7812
X49 X59 11 X69 X7911
0V(RG) X4A X5A 10 X6A X7A10
DI-R X4B X5B 9 X6B X7B9
X4C X5C 8 X6C X7C8
24VDC(+) X4D X5D 7 X6D X7D7
X4E X5E 6 X6E X7E6
X4F X5F 5 X6F X7F5
4 4
COM COM 3 COM COM 3
24VDC 0V(RG) 2 24VDC 0V(RG) 2
24VDC 0V(RG) 1 24VDC 0V(RG) 1
0V(RG) B A B A

DO-L DO-R

B A B A
Y40 Y50 20 Y60 20
Y41 Y51 19 Y61 19
24VDC(+) Y42 Y52 18 Y62 18
DO-L Y43 Y53 17 Y63 17
Y44 Y54 16 Y64 16
RA Y45 Y55 15 Y65 15
Y46 Y56 14 Y66 14
Y47 Y57 13 Y67 13
Y48 Y58 12 Y68 12
PL Y49 Y59 11 Y69 11
Y4A Y5A 10 Y6A 10
Y4B Y5B 9 Y6B 9
Y4C Y5C 8 Y6C 8
0V(RG) Y4D Y5D 7 Y6D 7
Y4E Y5E 6 Y6E 6
24VDC(+) DO-R Y4F Y5F 5 Y6F 5
4 4
3 3
RA 24VDC 0V(RG) 2 24VDC 0V(RG) 2
24VDC 0V(RG) 1 24VDC 0V(RG) 1
B A B A
PL Control unit

RIO1 RIO2 DCIN

0V(RG) Communication 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
terminal TxRx TxRx* LG TxRx TxRx* LG
24VDC(+) +24V 0V FG

X X Y
R-TM
0V(RG
Remote I/O unit

<Adaptive connector>
DCIN (CN220) RIO1/RIO2 (CN211) DI-L/DO-L (CN300) Terminator (R-TM)
Y X DI-R/DO-R
Connector : 2-178288-3 Connector : 1-178288-3 X
Contact : 1-175218-5 Contact : 1-175218-2 Solderless type
Manufacturer : Manufacturer : connector:
Tyco Tyco Electronics AMP 7940-6500SC
Electronics AMP Manufacturer :
Manufacturer : 3M
Tyco Electronics
AMP

I-103
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.11 Connection of FCUA-DX12 Unit and Machine Control Signal

7.11 Connection of FCUA-DX12 Unit and Machine Control Signal

Analog
Type of machine input/output Input Output
output
signal and No. of points
64 points 48 points 1 point

FCUA-DX12□
R300 cable /
R301 cable
DI-L
Machine
signal

DI-R
R300 cable /
R301 cable
DO-L DCIN
Machine RIO2
signal
RIO1
DO-R

The remote I/O unit cable types include the R300 and R301 types. The R300 cable has one end cut off, and the R301 cable is used
for connection to the IDEC IZUMI Corporation terminal block BX1F-T40A (Note 1). The R300-3M and R301-3M cables are
available. If a cable longer than 3m is required, use the CN300 and CS301 connector set.
The one-end connector CN300 (optional, with one end) includes the DI-L (DI-R) and DO-L (DO-R) connectors. The CS301
connector set (optional, with both ends) includes the DI-L and DO-L connectors, and two connectors for connection with the
terminal block (IDEC IZUMI Corporation).
(Note 1) IDEC IZUMI Corporation I/O terminal BX1F-T40
<Outline of connection>
DI-L/R FCUA-DX120 DI-L/R FCUA-DX121
A3 COM A3 COM
24VDC(+) B3 0V(RG B3
Input circuit 24VDC(+) Input circuit
2.2kΩ sink type 2.2kΩ source type
0V
(RG) B1 B1
B2 B2
A1 A1
A2 A2
24VDC(+)
DO-L/R DO-L/R
RA RA Output circuit
source type
Output circuit
PL sink type PL

B1 0V B1
B2 Control B2 Control
A1 circuit circuit
A1
Machine A2 Machine
A2
control panel control panel
R R
DO-R DO-R R
R DAC
Analog output B4
B4 DAC
Analog output 220Ω 220Ω
A4 A4

RIO1 RIO2 DCIN RIO1 RIO2 DCIN

123 123
Stabilized Stabilized
power supply 24VDC(+) 0V FG power supply 24VDC(+) 0V FG FG
FG

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-104
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.11 Connection of FCUA-DX12 Unit and Machine Control Signal

<Signal assignment table>

<CAUTION>
When using two or more remote I/O units or when FCUA-DX12□
connecting to the communication terminal, the signal
assignment will differ. Refer to the "PLC Interface
DI-L DI-R
Manual" for details. The I/O assignment shows an
example when the station No. is set to "2".
B A B A
Machine side DI-L X40 X50 20 X60 X70 20
X41 X51 19 X61 X71 19
control panel, etc. X42 X52 18 X62 X72 18
X43 X53 17 X63 X73 17
24VDC(+) X44 X54 16 X64 X74 16
X45 X55 15 X65 X75 15
X46 X56 14 X66 X76 14
X47 X57 13 X67 X77 13
X48 X58 12 X68 X78 12
X49 X59 11 X69 X79 11
0V X4A X5A 10 X6A X7A 10
DI-R X4B X5B 9 X6B X7B 9
X4C X5C 8 X6C X7C 8
24VDC(+) X4D X5D 7 X6D X7D 7
X4E X5E 6 X6E X7E 6
X4F X5F 5 X6F X7F 5
4 4
COM COM 3 COM COM 3
24VDC 0V 2 24VDC 0V 2
24VDC 0V 1 24VDC 0V 1
0V B A B A

DO-L DO-R

B A B A
Y40 Y50 20 Y60 20
Y41 Y51 19 Y61 19
24VDC(+) Y42 Y52 18 Y62 18
DO-L Y43 Y53 17 Y63 17
Y44 Y54 16 Y64 16
RA Y45 Y55 15 Y65 15
Y46 Y56 14 Y66 14
Y47 Y57 13 Y67 13
Y48 Y58 12 Y68 12
PL Y49 Y59 11 Y69 11
Y4A Y5A 10 Y6A 10
Y4B Y5B 9 Y6B 9
Y4C Y5C 8 Y6C 8
0V Y4D Y5D 7 Y6D 7
Y4E Y5E 6 Y6E 6
24VDC(+) DO-R Y4F Y5F 5 Y6F 5
4 AO AO* 4
3 3
RA 24VDC 0V 2 24VDC 0V 2
24VDC 0V 1 24VDC 0V 1
B A B A

PL Control unit

RIO1 RIO2 DCIN

Communication
0V 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3
terminal TxRx TxRx* LG TxRx TxRx* LG
24VDC(+) +24V 0V FG

X X Y
R-TM
0V
Remote I/O unit

<Adaptive connector>
DCIN (CN220) RIO1/RIO2 (CN211) DI-L/DO-L (CN300) Terminator (R-TM)
Y X DI-R/DO-R
Connector :2-178288-3 Connector:1-178288-3
Contact :1-175218-5 Solderless type X
Contact:1-175218-2
Manufacturer： Manufacturer： connector : 7940-6500SC
Tyco Electronics AMP Tyco Electronics AMP Manufacturer : 3M Manufacturer：
Tyco Electronics AMP

I-105
 7. CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT
7.12 Cables

7.12 Cables
The remote I/O unit cable types include the R300 and R301 types. The R300 cable has one end cut off,
and the R301 cable is used for connection to the IDEC IZUMI Corporation terminal block BX1F-T40A
(Note 1). Both the R300-3M and R301-3M are available.
If a cable longer than 3m is required, use the CN300 or CS301 connector set.
For the analog input/output cable, the R031 cable must be manufactured by the user.
(Note 1) IDEC IZUMI Corporation I/O terminal BX1F-T40A
Mmachine control panel
electric cabinet,etc
R300cable
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40

RA
IDEC
BX1F-T40A

PL R301cable

Connector pin correspondence table

Terminal Terminal
block FCUA- block FCUA-
BX1F DX1 BX1F DX1
1 A1 2 B1
3 A2 4 B2
5 A3 6 B3
7 A4 8 B4
9 A5 10 B5
11 A6 12 B6
13 A7 14 B7
15 A8 16 B8
17 A9 18 B9
19 A10 20 B10
21 A11 22 B11
23 A12 24 B12
25 A13 26 B13
27 A14 28 B14
29 A15 30 B15
31 A16 32 B16
33 A17 34 B17
35 A18 36 B18
37 A19 38 B19
39 A20 40 B20

I-106
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.1 Outline

8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO

8.1 Outline
The HR347/357 card is the machine operation board input/output card of the M60/M60S Series. It has a
digital input/output and scan input/output, and is connected to the machine operation board and other
devices.
Item HR347 HR357
No. of points 64 points
Configuration 8 common × 8 data matrix
Rated voltage 5VDC
Input
Max. current 80mA/point
Input cycle 1.46ms cycle, 11.68ms cycle
Scan Input signal holding time 11.68ms or more (*1)
No. of points 64 points
Configuration 4 common × 8 data + 4 common × 8 data matrix
Output Rated load voltage 5VDC
Max. output current 200mA/point
Output cycle 1.46ms cycle, 5.84ms cycle
No. of points 32 points
Type Sink/source
Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
Input current at external contact ON 2mA or less 9mA or more
Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
Input
Input current at external contact OFF 9mA or more 2mA or less
Tolerable chattering time 2.2ms or less
Digital
Input signal holding time 40ms or more (*5)
Input circuit operation delay time 2.2ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 11ms
Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more
No. of points 32 points
Rated load voltage 24VDC
Output
Max. output current 60mA/point
Type Sink Source
(*1) Input signal holding time: The guide is 11.68ms or more. The input signal will not be recognized unless it is held for the ladder
processing cycle time or longer.

8.2 Hardware Interface

(1) Connector layout diagram
25 1 DIO SCAN2 SCAN1
0 0 0
A
B (Scan DI/DO:64/64)
CF35
RIO3 DCIN

B A

HR347/357

CF31 CF33
A A
(DI:32) B B (DO:32)
20 1 20 1

I-107
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.2 Hardware Interface

(2) Pin assignment

Remote I/O unit connection terminal
RIO3A/B 1 2 3 <Cable side connector type>
Connector : 1-178288-3 1 I/O TXRX3
Contact : 1-175218-2 2 I/O TXRX3*
Recommended manufacturer : 3 GND
Tyco Electronics AMP

Power input terminal (24VDC)

DCIN 1 2 3 <Cable side connector type>
Connector : 2-178288-3 1 I 24VDC
Contact : 1-175218-5 2 0V(RG)
Recommended manufacturer : 3 FG
Tyco Electronics AMP

Machine input/output terminal

CF31 CF33
B A B A
20 I X40 20 I X50 20 O Y40 20 O Y50
19 I X41 19 I X51 19 O Y41 19 O Y51
18 I X42 18 I X52 18 O Y42 18 O Y52
17 I X43 17 I X53 17 O Y43 17 O Y53
16 I X44 16 I X54 16 O Y44 16 O Y54
15 I X45 15 I X55 15 O Y45 15 O Y55
14 I X46 14 I X56 14 O Y46 14 O Y56
13 I X47 13 I X57 13 O Y47 13 O Y57
12 I X48 12 I X58 12 O Y48 12 O Y58
11 I X49 11 I X59 11 O Y49 11 O Y59
10 I X4A 10 I X5A 10 O Y4A 10 O Y5A
9 I X4B 9 I X5B 9 O Y4B 9 O Y5B
8 I X4C 8 I X5C 8 O Y4C 8 O Y5C
7 I X4D 7 I X5D 7 O Y4D 7 O Y5D
6 I X4E 6 I X5E 6 O Y4E 6 O Y5E
5 I X4F 5 I X5F 5 O Y4F 5 O Y5F
4 4 4 4
3 I COM 3 I COM 3 3
2 I 24VDC 2 0V(RG) 2 I 24VDC 2 0V(RG)
1 I 24VDC 1 0V(RG) 1 I 24VDC 1 0V(RG)

DIO

<Cable side connector type> * This examples shows SCAN1 set to "0", SCAN2
Connector : 7940-6500SC
Relief : 3448-7940 set to "1" and DIO set to "2".
Recommended manufacturer : 3M Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details.

I-108
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.2 Hardware Interface

Scan type input/output terminals

CF35
B A
25 GND 25 GND
24 O LC3B 24 O LC3A
23 O LC2B 23 O LC2A
22 O LC1B 22 O LC1A
21 O LC0B 21 O LC0A
20 I LD7B* 20 I LD7A* (Note)
19 I LD6B* 19 I LD6A*
The GND pin is not normally used.
18 I LD5B* 18 I LD5A*
17 I LD4B* 17 I LD4A*
Do not connect the GND pin to the
16 I LD3B* 16 I LD3A* frame ground.
15 I LD2B* 15 I LD2A*
14 I LD1B* 14 I LD1A*
13 I LD0B* 13 I LD0A*
12 GND 12 <Cable side connector type>
11 11 Connector : 7950-6500SC
10 10
Relief : 3448-7950
9 O KYC7* 9 O KYC6*
8 O KYC5* 8 O KYC4* Recommended manufacturer : 3M
7 O KYC3* 7 O KYC2*
6 O KYC1* 6 O KYC0*
5 I KYD7* 5 I KYD6* LCxA/B Common signal for scan DO
4 I KYD5* 4 I KYD4* LDxA/B* Data signal for scan DO
3 I KYD3* 3 I KYD2* KYCx* Common signal for scan DI
2 I KYD1* 2 I KYD0*
KYDx* Data signal for scan DI
1 1 GND

SCAN1 SCAN2 * This examples shows SCAN1 set to "0",

0 2 SCAN2 set to "1" and DIO set to "2".
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details.

(3) Rotary switch

Set the address (station No.) assignment in DI/DO: 32/32 point units. Set using SCAN1, SCAN 2
and DIO rotary switches. The assignment address is changed with the rotary switch setting.

CF35

ScanDI:32 Scan DO:32

[Address] [Address]
0
X00 Y00
X1F Y1F SCAN1 Standard setting

Scan DI:32 Scan DO:32 SCAN1 0

[Address] [Address] SCAN2 1
0
X20 Y20 DIO 2
X3F Y3F SCAN2

CF31 CF33
Digital DI:32 Digital DO:32
[Address] [Address]
X40 Y40 0

X5F Y5F DIO

I-109
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.3 Connections

8.3 Connections
(1) External power supply (DCIN)
24VDC is required for the HR347/HR357 card operation. Prepare a stabilized power supply that
satisfies the following specifications.
Output : 24VDC ± 5%
Ripple : ± 5% (P-P)
Rated output current: 2.5A
∗ The rated output current is the value when using 60mA × 32 points for the machine output.
Prepare a power supply that satisfies the 24VDC output's total output current and control current
(0.5A).
R220cable
24VDC
0V(RG)
DCIN
FG
Y

HR357
(2) Connecting the remote I/O communication cable (RIO3A/B)
1) Connection of the RIO3A connector
Connect the RIO3A to the RIO1 connector of the base I/O unit.

SKIP
ENC1

A
RIO3
SV2SV1
CR31

RIO2 DCIN RIO1

RIO1 R211

HR357

2) Connection of the RIO3B connector

When the remote I/O unit is connected with a serial link, multiple units can be combined and used
in a range of eight or less total occupied stations. (Refer to the Connection Manual, Chapter 7
"CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT" for details.)
HR357 occupies three stations, so the remote I/O units can be connected to the RIO3B in
combinations of 5 stations or less. Connect a terminator to the RIO3B when it is not connected to
any device.
0 0 0

B
RIO3

To the next remote I/O unit

FCUA-DX□□□
Terminator
R-TM
Refer to Appendix 2.22
HR357

I-110
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.3 Connections

(3) Scan input (CF35)

An example is shown of a scan input circuit manufactured by the machine manufacturer. Refer to 8.2
(2) "Pin assignment" for the connector pin assignments.
CF35
KYCO*
X07 X06 X05 X04 X03 X02 X01 X00
KYC1*
X0F X0E X0D X0C X0B X0A X09 X08
KYC2*
X17 X16 X15 X14 X13 X12 X11 X10
KYC3*
X1F X1E X1D X1C X1B X1A X19 X18
KYC4*
X27 X26 X25 X24 X23 X22 X21 X20
KYC5*
X2F X2E X2D X2C X2B X2A X29 X28
KYC6*
X37 X36 X35 X34 X33 X32 X31 X30
KYC7*
X3F X3E X3D X3C X3B X3A X39 X38

KYD7*

KYD6*

KYD5*

KYD4*

KYD3*

KYD2*

KYD1*

KYD0*
<Example of a circuit manufactured by the machine manufacturer>

(Note) To scan input, connect a sneak path prevention diode as shown in the following drawing. The
unit may not be able to read the correct input signals without a sneak path prevention diode
installed.

KYCO*
～KYC7*
△

Sneak path
KYDO* prevention diode
～KYD7*

The common signals are changed over with scan input as shown in the following drawing. Key input data can
be received when the common signal is LOW. The common signal changeover cycle is 11.68ms, but the
input signal will not be recognized unless it is held for the ladder processing cycle time or longer.
KYCO*
KYC1*
KYC2*
KYC3*
KYC4*
KYC5*
KYC6*
KYC7*

1.46ms
11.68ms

I-111
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.3 Connections

(4) Scan output (CF35)

An example is shown of a scan output circuit manufactured by the machine manufacturer. Refer to
8.2 (2) "Pin assignment" for the connector pin assignments.
CF35 CF35
LC3A LC3B
LC2A LC2B
LC1A LC1B
LC0A LC0B
Y00 LD0B* Y20
LD0A*
Y01 LD1B* Y21
LD1A*
Y02 LD2B* Y22
LD2A*
Y03 Y23
LD3A* LD3B*
Y04 Y24
LD4A* LD4B*
Y05 Y25
LD5A* LD5B*
Y06 Y26
LD6A* LD6B*
Y07 Y27
LD7A* LD7B*
Y08 Y28
Y09 Y29
Y0A Y2A
Y0B Y2B
Y0C Y2C
Y0D Y2D
Y0E Y2E
Y0F Y2F
Y10 Y30
Y11 Y31
Y12 Y32
Y13 Y33
Y14 Y34
Y15 Y35
Y16 Y36
Y17 Y37
Y18 Y38
Y19 Y39
Y1A Y3A
Y1B Y3B
Y1C Y3C
Y1D Y3D
Y1E Y3E
Y1F Y3F
<Example of a circuit manufactured <Example of a circuit manufactured
by the machine manufacturer> by the machine manufacturer>

Output circuit HR3□7 <Manufactured by the machine manufacturer>

5V
CF35

LCnA/B
LDnA/B*
330Ω

0V(LG)

The common signals are changed over with scan output as shown in the following drawing. The LED outputs
data, and lights only when the common signal is HIGH. The common signal changes to 4 signals in
succession, and lights once every 5.84ms for 1.46ms only. The scan output is a 5V system.
LC3A LC3B
LC2A LC2B
LC1A LC1B
LC0A LC0B

1.46ms 1.46ms
5.84ms 5.84ms

I-112
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.3 Connections

(5) Digital input (CF31)

A source type input circuit corresponding to source output is shown.
Sink type Source type

(Machine side) HR3□7 (Machine side) HR3□7

CF31 CF31
24VDC 24VDC
2.2kΩ 2.2kΩ
△
0V(RG) △
△ △

2.2kΩ 2.2kΩ
Control Control
0V(RG)
△
△
△ △
circuit circuit

COM COM
0V(RG)

Input conditions Set so the input conditions are within the ranges shown in the following conditions.

Sink type Source type

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 below)
6 Input signal holding time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 below)
7 Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 16ms
8 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more

<Caution>
Input signal holding time: 40ms or more as a guideline. The input signal can only
be confirmed if held longer than the ladder process cycle time.

T2 T2
T1 T1 T1 T1
External signal
24VDC

Internal signal
+5V

T3 T4 T3 T4

I-113
 8. CONNECTION OF SCAN DI/DO
8.3 Connections

(6) Digital output (CF33)

The HR357 output circuit is a source type (source output).

Source type

FCU6-HR3□7
CF33 24VDC
(Machine side)

RA
△

Control
circuit

R
PL

0V(RG)

CAUTION

Do not apply any voltage to the connector other than that specified in this manual. Failure
to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.

Output conditions

Insulation method Non-insulation

Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/1 point
Saturation voltage 1.6V (standard)
Output delay time 40µs

<Caution>
∗ When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage
resistance 100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
∗ When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor
(R=150Ω) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the
current is less than the above tolerable current including the momentary current.)

I-114
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.1 Connection System Drawing

9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377

The HR377 is a DI/DO unit capable of a 200mA current output per 1 point. The DI/DO connector is
common with the base I/O unit.
9.1 Connection System Drawing
M60/M60S Series
control unit FCU6-HR377
F010 cable SH21 cable
CF10 CF10 SV1 Servo drive unit

SH21 cable
SV2 Servo drive unit
CF11
F040 cable
ENC Synchronous feed encoder

SKIP Skip signal

R211 cable
RIO1A,B Remote I/O unit
R211 cable
RIO2 Remote I/O unit
F050 cable
Max. cable CF31 D/IN
length: 50cm
CF32 D/IN

CF33 D/OUT

CF34 D/OUT

RS232C RS-232C Port No.2

CF11 F020 cable

HANDLE 1st manual pulse generator
1CH
CS1 CS2 F021 cable
* CS1 and CS2 set the remote I/O 2nd manual pulse generator
communication station numbers. 2CH
0 1 F022 cable
3rd manual pulse generator
3CH
24VDC input DC24IN When using the 5VDC power supply specifications, the
F020/021/022 cable cannot be used.
5VDC does not need to be supplied. Refer to Appendix 2.5 F020 cable assembly in the
　　　　　
(Supplied from control unit) DC5IN
this manual, and prepare a cable
with a +5V (7-pin) power supply pin.

FCU6-HR377 (2nd card)

From 1st HR377 card RI 1A connector

RIO1A
R211 cable
RIO1B Remote I/O unit 1CH

CF31 R301 cable D/IN

R301 cable
D/IN
CS1 CS2 CF32
* CS1 and CS2 set the remote I/O R301 cable
communication station numbers. CF33 D/OUT
2 3
R301 cable
CF34 D/OUT
24VDC input DC24IN

5VDC input DC5IN

* When using two FCU6-HR377 cards, the 5VDC for the second card must be supplied
　　　　　
from an external source as it is not supplied from the control unit.

* Change the rotary switch CS1 and CS2 settings according to the machine's DI/DO assignment.
(Note) The FCU6-HR377 card occupies two stations of the remote I/O communication (MC link B communication).

I-115
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.1 Connection System Drawing

Connector
Explanation of functions
name
CF10 Connect with the control unit
(servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal, remote I/O unit).
CF11 Connect with the control unit (5VDC, RS-232C, manual pulse generator).
SV1 Connect with the servo drive unit/spindle drive unit.
SV2 Connect with the auxiliary axis.
Connect with the synchronous feed encoder. When using two units for the synchronous
ENC1
feed encoder, connect the second unit to ENC2 of the control unit.
SKIP Connect with the skip signal input. Up to eight points can be used.
Connect with the remote I/O unit. The No. of occupied stations on this unit is two stations,
so the additional remote I/O units for six stations can be connected.
RIO1A
RIO1A and RIO1B are relay connectors for the remote I/O communication signals. Either
RIO1B
cable can be inserted without problem. If this unit is the final station, the terminator R-TM
must be connected to one of these connectors.
RIO2 Connect with the remote I/O unit.
CF31 DI: 32 (sink/source type)
CF32 DI: 32 (sink/source type)
CF33 DO: 32 (source type)
CF34 DO: 32 (source type)
RS232C Connect with an RS-232C device.
Connection with 12VDC power supply type or 5VDC power supply type manual pulse
HANDLE
generator.
MJ2 Not used.
MJ3 Not used.

Rotary switch CS1: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH DI:
CS1 X0-X1F and DO: Y0-Y1F.
This is normally used set to "0".
Rotary switch CS2: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH DI:
CS2 X20-X3F and DO: Y20-Y3F.
This is normally used set to "1".

* The rotary switch CS1 and CS2 settings may differ according to the machine configuration and
whether other remote I/O units are being used. Set within the range of 0 to 7.

I-116
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.1 Connection System Drawing

Machine input/output
DI/DO
CF31 CF32
B A B A
20 I X0 20 I X10 20 I X20 20 I X30
19 I X1 19 I X11 19 I X21 19 I X31
18 I X2 18 I X12 18 I X22 18 I X32
17 I X3 17 I X13 17 I X23 17 I X33
16 I X4 16 I X14 16 I X24 16 I X34
15 I X5 15 I X15 15 I X25 15 I X35
14 I X6 14 I X16 14 I X26 14 I X36
13 I X7 13 I X17 13 I X27 13 I X37
12 I X8 12 I X18 12 I X28 12 I X38
11 I X9 11 I X19 11 I X29 11 I X39
10 I XA 10 I X1A 10 I X2A 10 I X3A
9 I XB 9 I X1B 9 I X2B 9 I X3B
8 I XC 8 I X1C 8 I X2C 8 I X3C
7 I XD 7 I X1D 7 I X2D 7 I X3D
6 I XE 6 I X1E 6 I X2E 6 I X3E
5 I XF 5 I X1F 5 I X2F 5 I X3F
4 4 4 4
3 I COM 3 I COM 3 I COM 3 I COM
2 24VDC 2 0V(RG) 2 24VDC 2 0V(RG)
1 24VDC 1 0V(RG) 1 24VDC 1 0V(RG)

CF33 CF34
B A B A
20 O Y0 20 O Y10 20 O Y20 20 O Y30
19 O Y1 19 O Y11 19 O Y21 19 O Y31
18 O Y2 18 O Y12 18 O Y22 18 O Y32
17 O Y3 17 O Y13 17 O Y23 17 O Y33
16 O Y4 16 O Y14 16 O Y24 16 O Y34
15 O Y5 15 O Y15 15 O Y25 15 O Y35
14 O Y6 14 O Y16 14 O Y26 14 O Y36
13 O Y7 13 O Y17 13 O Y27 13 O Y37
12 O Y8 12 O Y18 12 O Y28 12 O Y38
11 O Y9 11 O Y19 11 O Y29 11 O Y39
10 O YA 10 O Y1A 10 O Y2A 10 O Y3A
9 O YB 9 O Y1B 9 O Y2B 9 O Y3B
8 O YC 8 O Y1C 8 O Y2C 8 O Y3C
7 O YD 7 O Y1D 7 O Y2D 7 O Y3D
6 O YE 6 O Y1E 6 O Y2E 6 O Y3E
5 O YF 5 O Y1F 5 O Y2F 5 O Y3F
4 4 4 4
3 3 3 3
2 24VDC 2 2 24VDC 2 0V(RG)
1 24VDC 1 1 24VDC 1 0V(RG)

CS1 CS2
0 1

<Cable side connector type>

Connector : 7940-6500SC * This examples shows CS1 set to "0" and CS2
Recommended manufacturer: 3M set to "1".
Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details.

I-117
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.2 Connection of Power Supply

9.2 Connection of Power Supply

9.2.1 Connection of 1st Card's Power Supply
Supply the 24VDC power to the DC24IN connector. The 5VDC power for control in the card is supplied
from the control unit via the CF11 connector. When using this 200mA-output DI/DO unit as the 1st card,
the 5VDC supply from an external source is not required.

I-118
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.2 Connection of Power Supply

9.2.2 Connection of 2nd Card's Power Supply

When two or more units are connected as the expansion I/O of this 200mA-output DI/DO unit, supply the
5VDC power to the DC5IN connector on the second or following unit.

I-119
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

9.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

(1) CF31 and CF32 input circuit specifications

The sink and source input is changed by connecting 24VDC to COM pin or connecting 0V (RG).
There are 64 input points, and the pins X0 to X3F are used for input device numbers.
Sink type Source type

(Machine side) (Machine side)

FCU6-HR377 FCU6-HR377
CF31/32 CF31/32
24VDC 24VDC
2.2k?Ω 2.2k?Ω

0V(RG)

2.2k?Ω 2.2k?Ω
Control Control
0V(RG) circuit
circuit

COM COM
0V(RG)

DC24IN DC24IN

0V(RG) 0V(RG)

Input conditions Use the input signals within the range of the following conditions.
Sink type Source type
Input voltage at external contact
1 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
ON
Input current at external contact
2 9mA or more
ON
Input voltage at external contact
3 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
OFF
Input current at external contact
4 2mA or less
OFF
5 Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 below)
6 Input signal holding time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 below)
7 Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 16ms
8 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more

<Caution>
Input signal holding time: 40ms or more as a guideline. The input signal can only
be confirmed if held longer than the ladder process cycle time.

T2 T2

T1 T1 T1 T1

T3 T4 T3 T4

I-120
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

(2) Specifications of CF33, CF34 output circuit

The output is fixed to a source output. There are 64 output points, and the pins used for output
device numbers are Y0 to Y3F. Use within the specification range shown below.

(Machine side)
FCU6-HR377
24VDC CF33/34 24VDC

RA
Control
circuit

R
PL

0V(RG)

Output conditions
Item Specifications
1 Output type Source type
2 Output current 200mA/1 point
3 No. of output points 64 points
4 Device numbers Y0 to Y3F
5 Insulation method Insulation
6 Rated load voltage 24VDC ±5%
7 Output delay time 400µs

(3) Rotary switch (CS1, CS2) setting

Rotary switch CS1: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH
CS1 DI: X0-X1F and DO: Y0-Y1F.
This is normally used set to "0".
Rotary switch CS2: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH
CS2 DI: X20-X3F and DO: Y20-Y3F.
This is normally used set to "1".

The No. of stations occupied with this card is two stations.

<Caution>
∗ When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage
resistance 100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
∗ When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor (R = 150Ω)
serially to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the current is less than the
above tolerable current including the momentary current.)

CAUTION
When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the
load.
When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor serially to the
load to suppress rush currents.

I-121
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection

9.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection

Normally one of these units is used. A remote I/O unit (RIO) is connected as an expansion I/O, and the
No. of I/O points is configured to match the users' specifications. Using the first remote I/O
communication system, this unit can be used as the 200mA-output DI/DO for the second and
subsequent cards. In this case, the I/O connectors other than CF31, 32, 33 and 34 on the 2nd and
following units are invalid.
Refer to Chapter 7 "CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT" for details on the remote I/O unit.
(Example for using two FCU6-HR377 2 cards and remote I/O unit)
MJ2 MJ3 MJ3
MJ2

CF3 1 CF3 4 CF3 1 CF 34

CF3 2 CF3 3
CF32 CF 33

1st 2nd

CF10
RS232C DF11

AUX1 CS1 CS2 IORST CF1 0

HANDLE RS2 32 C DF1 1
SKIP
SARVO1 SARVO2 ENC1 DC51N
RIO1 DC241N
AUX1 CS1 CS2 IORST
TE1 HANDLE
SARVO1 SARVO2 SKIP
ENC1 DC51N
RIO2 RIO1 DC2 41 N

TE1

RIO2

Remote I/O unit

FCUA-DX11†/FCUA-DX12†
Add according to the machine
R211 cable specifications

Front view

RIO1

3
2 　　R211 cable

A B
<Cable side connector type>
Connector: 1-178288-3 (Front)
Contact : 1-175218-2
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP Terminator (R-TM)

Bottom
RIO1 terminator X
AMP
view
D-3

Connect a terminator to the last end of the remote I/O unit

connected to RIO1. When not using the remote I/O unit, connect Contact and connector maker:
Tyco Electronics AMP
the terminator R-TM to the B side of the RIO1 connector. (Back)

Terminator type: R-TM Refer to Appendix 2.22.

I-122
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit

9.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit

Connect the servo drive unit to SV1 (servo axis, PLC axis, spindle) and SV2 (auxiliary axis: MR-J2-CT)
of the base I/O unit.

* Connect a terminator or battery unit to

the final servo drive unit.

<Related items>
Cable manufacturing drawing: APPENDIX 2 (SH21 cable)

I-123
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

9.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

Connect the Synchronous feed encoder to ENC1 on the base I/O unit. When connecting the second unit,
connect it to ENC2 on the control unit.

<Related items>
Outline drawing: APPENDIX 1
Cable manufacturing drawing: APPENDIX 2 (F040 cable)

I-124
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor)

9.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor)

Connect the skip signal to SKIP on the base I/O unit.
The skip signal is used for processing the high-speed signals. Always shield the cable.

(1) Skip signal cable

FCU6-HR377
SKIP
2
2.2kΩ △
△ SKIP IN1
10
2.2kΩ △
△
SKIP IN2
3
2.2kΩ △
△
SKIP IN3
11
2.2kΩ △
△ SKIP IN4
5
2.2kΩ △
△ SKIP IN5
13
2.2kΩ △
△ SKIP IN6
Stabilized 6
power supply 2.2kΩ △
△ SKIP IN7
14
24VDC SKIP IN8
FG 2.2kΩ △
△
1
0V(RG) Control circuit
U 8
FG
U 9
15

(2) Input conditions

Use the input signal within the following condition range.
18V or more,
1 Input voltage at external contact ON
25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more Ton
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 4V or less 24V
4 Input current at external contact OFF 1mA or less
5 Input signal holding time (Ton) 2ms or more
0V t
6 Internal response time 0.08ms or less
Ton ≧ 2ms
30V or more,
7 Machine side contact capacity
16mA or more
<Related item>
Connector pin assignment: 6.10 Base I/O Unit Connector Pin Assignment (SKIP)

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing
so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-125
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

9.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

To connect the manual pulse generators, connect an F020/021/022 cable to "HANDLE" connector.
Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected. In addition to the standard +12V power supply
type, the manual pulse generator of the +5V power supply specifications handle can be used with this
unit by using a dedicated cable.
(Refer to Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 Cable Manufacturing Drawings for cable details.)

CAUTION
Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-126
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

When devices (pulse generators) other than manual pulse generators (HD60) are connected to the
additional I/O units, use within the ranges shown in the following specifications. The commercially-
available manual pulse generators include the 25 pulse/rev type and 100 pulse/rev type.
The MELDAS60/60S Series internally multiplies one pulse by four, so use the 25 pulse/rev type.

Input/output conditions

90° phase difference between A phase and B phase.

Input pulse signal type
(Refer to waveform (e) below.)
Input signal voltage H-level 3.5V to 5.25V, L-level 0V to 0.5V or less
Max. input pulse frequency 100kHz
Power voltage for pulse
12VDC ± 10%
generator
Max. output current 300mA
No. of pulses per rotation 25 pulse/rev (25 pulse/rev for HD60)

Input waveform
The input waveform phase difference must be ±T/10 (T: cycle) or less.

A (B) phase

B (A) phase
a b c d e

T
a. b. c. d. e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 ± T/10
T: A or B phase cycle (Min. 10µs)

Input/output circuit
Connector Pin No.
+5V
HA1 1 470?Ω
HA2 3
220?Ω 4700pF
HA3 5 GND

Input
+5V
HB1 2 470?Ω
Control
HB2 4 4700pF circuit
220?Ω
HB3 6 GND

5VDC 7
Power
supply 12VDC 10,12,14
output
0V(GND) 9,11,13

The power voltage supplied to the manual pulse generator can be changed between 5VDC and 12VDC
by changing the cable wiring. Supply the power from pin 7 for the 5VDC power supply manual pulse
generator, and from pins 10, 12 and 14 for the 12VDC power supply manual pulse generator. Use
several power and 0V (GND) wire materials in the cable.

I-127
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.9 Connector Pin Assignment

9.9 Connector Pin Assignment

Control unit connection terminal
CF10
25 1
Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector
Pin Assignment (CF10) for details on the
connector pin assignment.
50 26
<Cable side connector type>
Plug : 10150-6000EL
Shell : 10350-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Servo drive unit connection terminal

1 GND 11 GND
SARVO1 2 O SVTXD1 12 O SVTXD1*
10 1 3 I SVALM1 13 I SVALM1*
4 I SVRXD1 14 I SVRXD1*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
7 O SVEMG1 17 O SVEMG1*
20 11
8 18
<Cable side connector type> 9 19
10 O +5V 20
Plug : 10120-6000EL
Shell : 10320-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Servo drive unit connection terminal

1 GND 11 GND
SARVO2
2 O SVTXD2 12 O SVTXD2*
10 1
3 I SVALM2 13 I SVALM2*
4 I SVRXD2 14 I SVRXD2*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
20 11 7 O SVEMG2 17 O SVEMG2*
8 18
<Cable side connector type> 9 19
Plug : 10120-6000EL 10 O +5V 20
Shell : 10320-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Synchronous feed encoder connection terminal

1 I ENC1A
ENC1 1 6 I ENC1A*
5 2 I ENC1B
7 I ENC1B*
3 I ENC1Z
8 I ENC1Z*
4 GND
9 O +5V
5 GND

9 6

<Cable side connector type> (Connect the connector case to shield.)

Connector : CDE-9PF
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDE-CTH
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

I-128
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.9 Connector Pin Assignment

Skip signal input connection terminal

SKIP
8 1 1 GND
9 GND
2 I SKIP IN1
10 I SKIP IN2
3 I SKIP IN3
11 I SKIP IN4
4
12
5 I SKIP IN5
15 9 13 I SKIP IN6
6 I SKIP IN7
14 I SKIP IN8
7
<Cable side connector type> 15 GND
8 GND
Connector : CDA-15P
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDA-CTH Connect the connector case to shield.
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.

Remote I/O unit connection terminal

<Cable side connector type>
RIO1 1 I/O TXRX1
1 2 3 Connector : 1-178288-3
2 I/O TXRX1*
Contact : 1-175218-2 3 GND
A Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP
B ∗ A and B are used for the remote I/O unit next station
relay. The cable can be connected to either connector.

Remote I/O unit connection terminal <Cable side connector type> 1 I/O TXRX2
RIO2 Connector : 1-178288-3 2 I/O TXRX2*
1 2 3 Contact : 1-175218-2 3 GND
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

Power input terminal (24VDC)

1 2 3 <Cable side connector type> 1 I 24VD C
DC24IN Connector : 2-178288-3 2 0V(RG)
Contact : 1-175218-5 3 FG
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

Power input terminal (5VDC)

1 NC (No t u sed )
DC5IN <Cable side connector type> 2 NC (Not u s ed )
1 2 3 4 5 Connector : 2-178288-5 3 5VDC
Contact : 1-175218-5 4 0V(LG)
Recommended manufacturer: 5 FG
Tyco Electronics AMP

I-129
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.9 Connector Pin Assignment

Control unit connection terminal

CF11
1A 25A
Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit
Connector Pin Assignment (CF11) for
1B 25B details on the connector pin assignment.

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN
Recommended manufacturer: DDK

Manual pulse generator connection terminal

HANDLE 8 1 1 I 1HA
9 GND
2 I 1HB
10 O 12VDC
3 I 2HA
11 GND
4 I 2HB
12 O 12VDC
5 I 3HA
15 9 13 GND
6 I 3HB
14 O 12VDC
7 O 5VDC
<Cable side 15
8
connector type>
Connector : CDA-15P
Contact : CD-PC-111 Connect the connector case to shield.
Case : HDA-CTH Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

RS-232C device connection terminal Revision A Explanation of signals

SD: Send Data
13 1
RD: Receive Data
RS232C 1 RS: Request to Send
14 O SD1 (Note)
2 O SD2
15 O ER1 (Note) CS: Clear to Send
3 I RD2 DR: Data Set Ready
O 16 I RD1 (Note)
14
4 RS2 ER: Data Terminal
25 I
17 I CS1 (Note)
5 CS2 Ready
I 18
6 DR2
19 O RS1 (Note) (Note)
7 GND
20 O ER2 Signal name meanings:
8
21 I DR1 (Note) ††1: For maintenance
<Cable side connector type> 9 by service
22
Connector : CDB-25P 10
23 personnel
Contact : CD-PC-111 11 GND
24 GND ††2: General
Case : HDB-CTH 12 reserve released channel
25 24VDC
Recommended manufacturer: 13
Hirose Electric
Connect the connector case to shield.
Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing
so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-130
 9. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR377
9.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection

9.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection

At every 4-point output, the machine output (DO) circuit has a fuse for burning protection if any circuit
should short-circuit.

Applicable fuse name: LM10

Manufacturer:
Daito Communication
Rating: 1A
Top view

Side view

Outline drawing

Output name Fuse name Output name Fuse name Output name Fuse name Output name Fuse name

Y0 F8 Y10 F6 Y20 F14 Y30 F16

Y1 F8 Y11 F6 Y21 F14 Y31 F16
Y2 F8 Y12 F6 Y22 F14 Y32 F16
Y3 F8 Y13 F6 Y23 F14 Y33 F16
Y4 F7 Y14 F5 Y24 F13 Y34 F15
Y5 F7 Y15 F5 Y25 F13 Y35 F15
Y6 F7 Y16 F5 Y26 F13 Y36 F15
Y7 F7 Y17 F5 Y27 F13 Y37 F15
Y8 F2 Y18 F3 Y28 F10 Y38 F12
Y9 F2 Y19 F3 Y29 F10 Y39 F12
YA F2 Y1A F3 Y2A F10 Y3A F12
YB F2 Y1B F3 Y2B F10 Y3B F12
YC F1 Y1C F4 Y2C F9 Y3C F11
YD F1 Y1D F4 Y2D F9 Y3D F11
YE F1 Y1E F4 Y2E F9 Y3E F11
YF F1 Y1F F4 Y2F F9 Y3F F11

Caution: The HR377 unit fuse is inserted as protection against an instantaneous overcurrent that could occur during a
short-circuit, etc. If a current of approx. 200mA to 1A flows to one output, protection of the circuit could be difficult.

CAUTION
Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-131
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.1 Connection System Drawing

10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378

The FCU6-HR378 is a DI/DO unit capable of a 200mA current output per 1 point. The DO output common
is the 4-point common 13 block, and the 1-point 1 common is the 12-point common separated type.
10.1 Connection System Drawing
M60/M60S Series
control unit FCU6-HR378 (1st card)
F010 cable
CF10 CF10 SH21 cable
SV1 Servo drive unit
SH21 cable
CF11 SV2 Servo drive unit
F040 cable
ENC Synchronous feed encoder

SKIP Skip signal

R211 cable
RIO1A Remote I/O unit
R211 cable
F050 cable RIO1B Remote I/O unit
Max. cable
length: 50cm
R211 cable
RIO2 Remote I/O unit
(Not used for the M64/M65/M66)
MJ2 D/IN

MJ3 D/OUT

RS232C RS-232C Port No.2

CF11 F020 cable

HANDLE 1st manual pulse generator
1CH
CS1 CS2 F021 cable
2nd manual pulse generator
* CS1 and CS2 set the remote I/O 2CH
communication station numbers. 0 1
F022 cable
3rd manual pulse generator
3CH
24VDC input DC24IN When using the 5VDC power supply specifications, the
F020/021/022 cable cannot be used.
5VDC does not need to be supplied. DC5IN Refer to Appendix 2.5 F020 cable assembly in the
(Supplied from control unit) this manual, and prepare a cable
with a +5V (7-pin) power supply pin.

FCU6-HR378 (2nd card)

From 1st HR378 card RI1A connector

RIO1A
R211 cable
RIO1B Remote I/O unit

MJ2 D/IN
CS1 CS2
MJ3 D/OUT
2 3

24VDC input DC24IN

5VDC input DC5IN

(Connect only when
using 2nd card)

* When using two FCU6-HR378 cards, the 5VDC for the second card must be supplied
from an external source as it is not supplied from the control unit.
* Change the rotary switch CS1 and CS2 settings according to the machine's DI/DO assignment.
(Note) The FCU6-HR378 card occupies two stations of the remote I/O communication (MC link B communication).

I-132
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.1 Connection System Drawing

Connector
Explanation of functions
name
CF10 Connect with the control unit
(servo drive unit, synchronous feed encoder, skip signal, remote I/O unit).
CF11 Connect with the control unit (5VDC, RS-232C, manual pulse generator).
SV1 Connect with the servo drive unit/spindle drive unit.
SV2 Connect with the auxiliary axis.
Connect with the synchronous feed encoder. When using two units for the synchronous
ENC1
feed encoder, connect the second unit to ENC2 of the control unit.
SKIP Connect with the skip signal input. Up to eight points can be used.
Connect with the remote I/O unit. The No. of occupied stations on this unit is two stations,
so the additional remote I/O units for six stations can be connected.
RIO1A
RIO1A and RIO1B are relay connectors for the remote I/O communication signals. Either
RIO1B
cable can be inserted without problem. If this unit is the final station, the terminator R-TM
must be connected to one of these connectors.
RIO2 Connect with the remote I/O unit.
RS232C Connect with an RS-232C device.
Connection with 12VDC power supply type or 5VDC power supply type manual pulse
HANDLE
generator.
MJ2 DI: 64 (sink/source type)
MJ3 DO: 64 (source type)

Rotary switch CS1: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH DI:
CS1 X0-X1F and DO: Y0-Y1F.
This is normally used set to "0".
Rotary switch CS2: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH DI:
CS2 X20-X3F and DO: Y20-Y3F.
This is normally used set to "1".

* The rotary switch CS1 and CS2 settings may differ according to the machine configuration and
whether other remote I/O units are being used. Set within the range of 0 to 7.

I-133
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.1 Connection System Drawing

Machine input/output
MJ2 MJ3
Input/ Input/ Input/ Input/
No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal No. Signal
output output output output
1 I X00 51 I X20 1 O C00003 51 O C02023
2 I X01 52 I X21 2 O Y00 52 O Y20
3 I X02 53 I X22 3 O Y01 53 O Y21
4 I X03 54 I X23 4 O Y02 54 O Y22
5 I X04 55 I X24 5 O Y03 55 O Y23
6 I X05 56 I X25 6 O C00407 56 O C02427
7 I X06 57 I X26 7 O Y04 57 O Y24
8 I X07 58 I X27 8 O Y05 58 O Y25
9 I CI0007 59 I CI2027 9 O Y06 59 O Y26
10 I X08 60 I X28 10 O Y07 60 O Y27
11 I X09 61 I X29 11 O C0080B 61 O C0282B
12 I X0A 62 I X2A 12 O Y08 62 O Y28
13 I X0B 63 I X2B 13 O Y09 63 O Y29
14 I X0C 64 I X2C 14 O Y0A 64 O Y2A
15 I X0D 65 I X2D 15 O Y0B 65 O Y2B
16 I X0E 66 I X2E 16 O C00C0F 66 O C02C2F
17 I X0F 67 I X2F 17 O Y0C 67 O Y2C
18 I CI080F 68 I CI282F 18 O Y0D 68 O Y2D
19 I X10 69 I X30 19 O Y0E 69 O Y2E
20 I X11 70 I X31 20 O Y0F 70 O Y2F
21 I X12 71 I X32 21 O C01013 71 O C030
22 I X13 72 I X33 22 O Y10 72 O Y30
23 I X14 73 I X34 23 O Y11 73 O C031
24 I X15 74 I X35 24 O Y12 74 O Y31
25 I X16 75 I X36 25 O Y13 75 O C032
26 I X17 76 I X37 26 O C01417 76 O Y32
27 I CI1017 77 I CI3037 27 O Y14 77 O C033
28 I X18 78 I X38 28 O Y15 78 O Y33
29 I X19 79 I X39 29 O Y16 79 O C034
30 I X1A 80 I X3A 30 O Y17 80 O Y34
31 I X1B 81 I X3B 31 O C0181B 81 O C035
32 I X1C 82 I X3C 32 O Y18 82 O Y35
33 I X1D 83 I X3D 33 O Y19 83 O C036
34 I X1E 84 I X3E 34 O Y1A 84 O Y36
35 I X1F 85 I X3F 35 O Y1B 85 O C037
36 I CI181F 86 I CI383F 36 O C01C1F 86 O Y37
37 87 37 O Y1C 87 O C038
38 88 38 O Y1D 88 O Y38
39 89 39 O Y1E 89 O C039
40 90 40 O Y1F 90 O Y39
41 91 41 O 0V (RG) 91 O C03A
42 I 0V (RG) 92 42 O 0V (RG) 92 O Y3A
43 I 0V (RG) 93 43 O 0V (RG) 93 O C03B
44 I 0V (RG) 94 44 O 0V (RG) 94 O Y3B
45 I 0V (RG) 95 O 45 O 0V (RG) 95 O C03C3F
46 96 O 46 O FG 96 O Y3C
47 I 24VDC 97 I 47 O FG 97 O Y3D
48 I 24VDC 98 I 48 O FG 98 O Y3E
49 I 24VDC 99 I 49 O FG 99 O Y3F
50 I 24VDC 100 I 50 O FG 100
<Cable side connector type>
PCB side connector : DHD-PB100-S121NO
Cable side connector : DHD-RA100-20AS (or equivalent)
Recommended maker : DDK

I-134
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT HR378
10.2 Connection of Power Supply

10.2 Connection of Power Supply

10.2.1 Connection of 1st Card's Power Supply

Supply the 24VDC power from the DC24IN connector or the I/O connector MJ2. When supplying the
24VDC power supply from the MJ2 connector, supply to all 24VDC pins and 0V (RG) pins. The 5VDC
power for control in the card is supplied from the control unit via the CF11 connector. When using as the
first card, the 5VDC supply is not required.

I-135
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT HR378
10.2 Connection of Power Supply

10.2.2 Connection of 2nd Card's Power Supply

When two or more units are connected as the expansion I/O of this 200mA-output DI/DO unit,
supply the 5VDC power to the DC5IN connector on the second or following unit.

I-136
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

(1) MJ2 input circuit specifications
The sink and source input is changed by connecting 24VDC to COM pin or connecting 0V (RG).
There are 64 input points, and the pins X0 to X3F are used for input device numbers.
Source type Sink type

(Machine side)
FCU6-HR378 (Machine side) FCU6-HR378
24VDC MJ2 MJ2
2.2kΩ 2.2kΩ

0V(RG)
2.2kΩ 24VDC 2.2kΩ
Control 0V(RG) Control
circuit circuit

0V(RG)

0V(RG)
0V(RG)
0V(RG) 0V(RG)
DC24IN DC24IN

0V(RG) 0V(RG) 0V(RG)

0V(RG)

Input conditions Use the input signals within the range of the following conditions.

Sink type Source type

1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less 18V or more, 25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 20V or more, 25.2V or less 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 below)
6 Input signal holding time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 below)
7 Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 16ms
8 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more

<Caution>
Input signal holding time: 40ms or more as a guideline. The input signal can only
be confirmed if held longer than the ladder process cycle time.

I-137
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

T2 T2
T1 T1 T1 T1
External signal
+24V

Internal signal
+5V

T3 T4 T3 T4

Relation of input common pin and DI input

Common name Pin No. Corresponding input signal name
CI0007 9 X00 to X07
CI080F 18 X08 to X0F
CI1017 27 X10 to X17
CI181F 36 X18 to X1F
CI2027 59 X20 to X27
CI282F 68 X28 to X2F
CI3037 77 X30 to X37
CI383F 86 X38 to X3F

* The device numbers show the example when rotary switch CS1 is set to "0" and CS2 is set to "1".

I-138
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

(2) MJ3 output circuit specifications

The output is fixed to a source output. There are 64 output points, and the pins used for output are
Y0 to Y3F. Use within the specification range shown below.

(Machine side)
FCU6-HR378
24VDC 24VDC
MJ3

RA

Control
R circuit
PL

0V(RG)
MJ2

0V(RG)
0V(RG)
DC24IN

0V(RG)
0V(RG)

Output conditions
Item Specifications
1 Output type Source type
2 Output current 200mA/1 point
3 No. of output points 64 points
4 Output applicable pins Y0 to Y3F
5 Insulation method Insulation
6 Rated load voltage 24VDC ±5%
7 Output delay time 400µs

Relation of output common pin and DO output device numbers

Common Corresponding device Common Corresponding device
Pin No. Pin No.
name numbers name numbers
C00003 1 Y00 to Y03 C030 71 Y30
C00407 6 Y04 to Y07 C031 73 Y31
C0080B 11 Y08 to Y0B C032 75 Y32
C00C0F 16 Y0C to Y0F C033 77 Y33
C01013 21 Y10 to Y13 C034 79 Y34
C01417 26 Y14 to Y17 C035 81 Y35
C0181B 31 Y18 to Y1B C036 83 Y36
C01C1F 36 Y1C to Y1F C037 85 Y37
C02023 51 Y20 to Y23 C038 87 Y38
C02427 56 Y24 to Y27 C039 89 Y39
C0282B 61 Y28 to Y2B C03A 91 Y3A
C02C2F 66 Y2C to Y2F C03B 93 Y3B
C03C3F 95 Y3C to Y3F

* The device numbers show the example when rotary switch CS1 is set to "0" and CS2 is set to "1".

I-139
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.3 Connection of DI/DO Signal

(3) Rotary switch (CS1, CS2) setting

Rotary switch CS1: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH DI:
CS1 X0-X1F and DO: Y0-Y1F.
This is normally used set to "0".
Rotary switch CS2: Sets the 32-point station No. with remote I/O communication 1CH DI:
CS2 X20-X3F and DO: Y20-Y3F.
This is normally used set to "1".
The No. of stations occupied with this card is two stations.

(4) Remote I/O unit terminator

Connect a terminator to the last end of the remote I/O unit connected to the RIO 1 connector.
When using two of these cards and not connecting any other remote I/O unit to RIO1, connect the
terminator R-TM to the B side connector of the second RIO1.
(The RIO1 A and B connectors are the same signal for relay, so the communication cable and
terminator can be connected to either without problem.)

Terminator (R-TM)

Terminator type: R-TM

<Caution>
∗ When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage
resistance 100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
∗ When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor (R =
150Ω) serially to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the current
is less than the above tolerable current including the momentary current.)

CAUTION

When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode in parallel to the
load.
When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor serially to the
load to suppress rush currents.

I-140
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection

10.4 Example of Remote I/O Unit Connection

Normally one of these units is used. A remote I/O unit is connected as an expansion I/O, and the No. of
I/O points is configured to match the users' specifications. Using the first remote I/O communication
system, this unit can be used as the 200mA-output DI/DO for the second and subsequent cards. In this
case, the I/O connectors (SV1, SV2, SKIP, ENC1, HANDLE, RIO2, RS232C) other than MJ2 and MJ3
on the 2nd and following units are invalid.

Refer to Chapter 7 "CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT" for details on the remote I/O unit.

(Example for using remote I/O unit)

RIO1 terminator
Connect a terminator to the last end of the remote I/O unit
connected to RIO1 connector. When not using a remote I/O unit,
connect the terminator R-TM to the RIO1 connector B side of this
unit.
Terminator type: R-TM Refer to Appendix 2.22.

I-141
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit

10.5 Connection of Servo Drive Unit

Connect the servo drive unit to SV1 (servo axis, PLC axis, spindle) and SV2 (auxiliary axis: MR-J2-CT)
of the base I/O unit.

SH21/FCUA- SH21/FCUA-R000
R000 cable cable

Servo drive unit Auxiliary axis servo

drive unit
Connector type CN1A

Connector type CN1A

* Connect a terminator or
battery unit to the final
servo drive unit.

(Servo axis, PLC axis, spindle)

<Related items>
Cable manufacturing drawing: APPENDIX 2 (SH21 cable)
Connector pin assignment: 6.10 Base I/O Unit Connector Pin Assignment (SV1, SV2)

I-142
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

10.6 Connection of Synchronous Feed Encoder

Connect the encoder to ENC1 on the base I/O unit. When connecting the second unit, connect it to
ENC2 on the control unit.

Synchronous feed
1st unit encoder (1st unit)
F040 cable

F041 cable

Encoder side
97F3102E20-29P (or equivalent)
Control unit

Synchronous feed
2nd unit encoder (2nd unit)
F040 cable

F041 cable

Encoder side
97F3102E20-29P (or equivalent)

A ENC1A K 0V
B ENC1Z L
C ENC1B M
D N ENC1A*
E Case ground P ENC1Z*
F R ENC1B*
G S
H 5VDC T
J
<Related items>
Outline drawing: APPENDIX 1
Cable manufacturing drawing: APPENDIX 2 (F040 cable)

I-143
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.7 Connection of Sip Signal (sensor)

10.7 Connection of Skip Signal (sensor)

Connect the skip signal to SKIP connector on the base I/O unit.
The skip signal is used for processing the high-speed signals. Always shield the cable.

(1) Skip signal cable

FC U 6 - H R 3 78
SKIP

2
2.2k?Ω SKIP IN1
10
2.2k?Ω SKIP IN2
3
2.2k?Ω SKIP IN3
11
2.2k?Ω SKIP IN4
5
2.2k?Ω SKIP IN5
13
2.2k?Ω SKIP IN6

Stabilized 6
power supply 2.2k?Ω SKIP IN7
14
24VDC SKIP IN8
FG 2.2k?Ω
1
0V(RG) Control circuit
U
8
FG
U 9

15

(2) Input conditions

Use the input signal within the following condition range.

18V or more,
1 Input voltage at external contact ON
25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
0V
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 4V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 1mA or less
5 Input signal holding time (Ton) 2ms or more ≥
6 Internal response time 0.08ms or less
30V or more,
7 Machine side contact capacity
16mA or more

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector. Doing
so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.

I-144
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

10.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

To connect the manual pulse generators, connect an F020/021/022 cable to "HANDLE" connector.
Up to three manual pulse generators can be connected. In addition to the standard 12VDC power supply
type, the manual pulse generator of the 5VDC power supply specifications can be used with this unit by
using a dedicated cable.
(Refer to Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 Cable Manufacturing Drawings for cable details.)

CAUTION
Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-145
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.8 Connection of Manual Pulse Generator

When devices (pulse generators) other than manual pulse generators (HD60) are connected to the
FCU6-HR378, use within the ranges shown in the following specifications. The commercially- available
manual pulse generators include the 25 pulse/rev type and 100 pulse/rev type.
The MELDAS60/60S Series internally multiplies one pulse by four, so use the 25 pulse/rev type.

Input/output conditions
90° phase difference between A phase and B phase.
Input pulse signal type
[Refer to waveform (e) below.]
Input signal voltage H-level 3.5V to 5.25V, L-level 0V to 0.5V or less
Max. input pulse frequency 100kHz
Power voltage for pulse
12VDC ± 10%
generator
Max. output current 300mA
No. of pulses per rotation 25 pulse/rev (25 pulse/rev for HD60)

Input waveform
The input waveform phase difference must be ±T/10 (T: cycle) or less.

A (B) phase

B (A) phase
a b c d e

T
a. b. c. d. e: A phase or B phase rising edge (falling edge) phase difference = T/4 ± T/10
T: A or B phase cycle (Min. 10µs)

Input/output circuit

Connection Pin No.

+5V
HA1 1 470?Ω
HA2 3 4700pF
5 220?Ω
HA3 GND

Input
+5V
HB1 2 470?Ω
Control circuit
HB2 4 4700pF
220?Ω
HB3 6 GND

5VDC 7
Power
supply 10,12,14
output
12VDC

0V(GND) 9,11,13

The power voltage supplied to the manual pulse generator can be changed between 5VDC and 12VDC
by changing the cable wiring. Supply the power from pin 7 for the 5VDC power supply manual pulse
generator, and from pins 10, 12 and 14 for the 12VDC power supply manual pulse generator. Use
several power supply and 0V (GND) wire materials in the cable.
I-146
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.9 Connector Pin Assignment

10.9 Connector Pin Assignment

Control unit connection terminal

CF10

Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit Connector

Pin Assignment (CF10) for details on the
connector pin assignment.

<Cable side connector type>

Plug : 10150-6000EL
Shell : 10350-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Servo drive unit connection terminal

1 GND 11 GND
SV1 2 O SVTXD1 12 O SVTXD1*
3 I SVALM1 13 I SVALM1*
4 I SVRXD1 14 I SVRXD1*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
7 O SVEMG1 17 O SVEMG1*
8 18
<Cable side connector type> 9 19
Plug : 10120-6000EL 10 O +5V 20
Shell : 10320-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Servo drive unit connection terminal

SV2 1 GND 11 GND
2 O SVTXD2 12 O SVTXD2*
3 I SVALM2 13 I SVALM2*
4 I SVRXD2 14 I SVRXD2*
5 GND 15 GND
6 16
7 O SVEMG2 17 O SVEMG2*
<Cable side connector type> 8 18
Plug : 10120-6000EL 9 19
10 O +5V 20
Shell : 10320-3210-000
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
(Connect the connector case to shield.)

Synchronous feed encoder connection terminal

1 I ENC1A
ENC1 6 I ENC1A*
2 I ENC1B
7 I ENC1B*
3 I ENC1Z
8 I ENC1Z*
4 GND
9 O +5V
5 GND

<Cable side connector type>

Connector : CDE-9PF (Connect the connector case to shield.)
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDE-CTH
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric

I-147
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.9 Connector Pin Assignment

Skip signal input connection terminal

SKIP
1 GND
9 GND
2 I SKIP IN1
10 I SKIP IN2
3 I SKIP IN3
11 I SKIP IN4
4
12
5 I SKIP IN5
13 I SKIP IN6
6 I SKIP IN7
<Cable side connector type> 14 I SKIP IN8
7
Connector : CDA-15P 8
15 GND
GND
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDA-CTH Connect the connector case to shield.
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.

Remote I/O unit connection terminal

1 I/O TXRX1
RIO1 <Cable side connector type> 2 I/O TXRX1*
Connector : 1-178288-3 3 GND
Contact : 1-175218-2
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP
∗ A and B are used for the remote I/O unit next station relay. The cable
can be connected to either connector.

Remote I/O unit connection terminal

<Cable side connector type> 1 I/O TXRX2
RIO2 2 I/O TXRX2*
Connector : 1-178288-3
3 GND
Contact : 1-175218-2
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

Power input terminal (24VDC)

1 I 24VD C
DC24IN <Cable side connector type>
2 0V (RG)
Connector : 2-178288-3
3 FG
Contact : 1-175218-5
Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP

Power input terminal (5VDC)

1 NC (No t u sed )
<Cable side connector type>
DC5IN 2 NC (Not u s ed )
Connector : 2-178288-5 3 5VDC
Contact : 1-175218-5 4 0V (GND)
Recommended manufacturer: 5 FG
Tyco Electronics AMP

I-148
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.9 Connector Pin Assignment

Control unit connection terminal

CF11

Refer to section 4.2.8 Control Unit

Connector Pin Assignment (CF11) for
details on the connector pin assignment.

<Cable side connector type>

Connector: DHD-RB50-20AN
Recommended manufacturer: DDK

Manual pulse generator connection terminal

HANDLE 1 I 1HA
9 GND
2 I 1HB
10 O 12VDC
3 I 2HA
11 GND
4 I 2HB
12 O 12VDC
5 I 3HA
13 GND
6 I 3HB
14 O 12VDC
7 O 5VDC
<Cable side connector type> 15
8
Connector : CDA-15P
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDA-CTH
Connect the connector case to shield.
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric
Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.

RS-232C device connection terminal

RS232C Explanation of signals
1 SD: Send Data
14 O SD1 (Note)
2 O SD2 RD: Receive Data
15 O ER1 (Note) RS: Request to Send
3 I RD2
16 I RD1 (Note) CS: Clear to Send
4 O RS2
17 I CS1 (Note) DR: Data Set Ready
5 I CS2
18 ER: Data Terminal
6 I DR2 Ready
19 O RS1 (Note)
7 GND
20 O ER2
<Cable side connector type> 8 (Note)
21 I DR1 (Note)
Connector : CDB-25P 9 Signal name meanings:
22 ††1: For maintenance
Contact : CD-PC-111 10
23 by service
11 GND
Case : HDB-CTH 24 GND personnel
12 reserve ††2: General
Recommended manufacturer: 25 24VDC
13 released channel
Hirose Electric

Connect the connector case to shield.

Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.

I-149
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection

10.10 Fuse for Machine Output Circuit Protection

At every 4-point output, the machine output (DO) circuit has a fuse for burning protection if any circuit
should short-circuit. The 1 common Y30 to Y3B outputs for each 1-point output do not have a fuse.
FCU6-HR378
MJ2 50 MJ3 1
50 1

100 51 100 51

F13(Y3C-3F)
F12(Y2C-2F) Applicable fuse name: LM10
F11(Y28-2B)
Manufacturer:
Daito Communication
F10(Y24-27)
Rating: 1A
F9(Y20-23)
F8(Y1C-1F) Top view
F7(Y18-1B)
F6(Y14-17)
F5(Y10-13) Side view
F4(Y0C-0F)
F3(Y08-0B)
F2(Y04-07)
F1(Y00-03)
Outline drawing
L- F1 F 2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F 7 F8

L-F9 F10 F11 F12 F13

CF10
CS1 CS2 RS232C CF11

HANDLE DC24IN DC5IN

SV1 SV2 SKIP RIO1 RIO2
ENC1

FG1 FG2

Output name Fuse name Output name Fuse name Output name Fuse name Output name Fuse name

Y0 F1 Y10 F5 Y20 F9 Y30 F16

Y1 F1 Y11 F5 Y21 F9 Y31 F16
Y2 F1 Y12 F5 Y22 F9 Y32 F16
Y3 F1 Y13 F5 Y23 F9 Y33 F16
Y4 F2 Y14 F6 Y24 F10 Y34 F15
Y5 F2 Y15 F6 Y25 F10 Y35 F15
Y6 F2 Y16 F6 Y26 F10 Y36 F15
Y7 F2 Y17 F6 Y27 F10 Y37 F15
Y8 F3 Y18 F7 Y28 F11 Y38 F12
Y9 F3 Y19 F7 Y29 F11 Y39 F12
YA F3 Y1A F7 Y2A F11 Y3A F12
YB F3 Y1B F7 Y2B F11 Y3B F12
YC F4 Y1C F8 Y2C F12 Y3C F11
YD F4 Y1D F8 Y2D F12 Y3D F11
YE F4 Y1E F8 Y2E F12 Y3E F11
YF F4 Y1F F8 Y2F F12 Y3F F11

Caution: The FCU6-HR378 unit fuse is inserted as protection against an instantaneous overcurrent that could occur during a
short-circuit, etc. If a current of approx. 200mA to 1A flows to one output, protection of the circuit could be difficult.
CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.
I-150
 10. CONNECTION OF 200mA OUTPUT DI/DO UNIT FCU6-HR378
10.11 Explanation of LED Function

10.11 Explanation of LED Function

Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
LED 1 24IN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
(two-
Rotary switch [CS1] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
color RIO1 Red Not lit Lit
communication error display rotary switch station No.
LED)
LED 2 Contact the Mitsubishi
5OUT Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit
(two- Service Center
color Rotary switch [CS2] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
RIO2 Red Not lit Lit
LED) communication error display rotary switch station No.
L-F1 Y00 to 03 energization to fuse F1 Green Lit Not lit Check CO0003 voltage
L-F2 Y04 to 04 energization to fuse F2 Green Lit Not lit Check CO0407 voltage
L-F3 Y08 to 0B energization to fuse F3 Green Lit Not lit Check CO080B voltage
L-F4 Y0C to 0F energization to fuse F4 Green Lit Not lit Check CO0C0F voltage
L-F5 Y10 to 13 energization to fuse F5 Green Lit Not lit Check CO1013 voltage
L-F6 Y14 to 17 energization to fuse F6 Green Lit Not lit Check CO1417 voltage
L-F7 Y18 to 1B energization to fuse F7 Green Lit Not lit Check CO181B voltage
L-F8 Y1C to 1F energization to fuse F8 Green Lit Not lit Check CO1C1F voltage
L-F9 Y20 to 23 energization to fuse F9 Green Lit Not lit Check CO2023 voltage
L-F10 Y24 to 27 energization to fuse F10 Green Lit Not lit Check CO2427 voltage
L-F11 Y28 to 2B energization to fuse F11 Green Lit Not lit Check CO282B voltage
L-F12 Y2C to 2F energization to fuse F12 Green Lit Not lit Check CO2C2F voltage
L-F13 Y3C to 3F energization to fuse F13 Green Lit Not lit Check CO3C3F voltage

I-151
 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD
11.1 Outline

11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD

11.1 Outline
QY231 is the machine input/output and operation board input/output card connected to the base I/O
unit's remote I/O communication or communication terminal remote I/O communication (MC link B).

No. of occupied
Compatible machine control signals
stations
Digital input signal (DI) : 64 points (photocoupler insulation) sink/
source shared type 2
Digital output signal (DO) : 48 points (non-insulation) source type

11.2 Hardware Interface

(1) Connector layout diagram

CS (SW1)
↑↑ J4
△
CSH41A

CSH41B

Not
8
0

mounted
POWER
ALM

CMD81

CFD83
SOURCE

CMD82
SINK
S1
S2
S3
S4

I-152
 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD
11.2 Hardware Interface

(2) Pin assignments

Remote I/O unit connection terminal
CSH41A/B 1 2 3 <Cable side connector type>
Connector : 1-178288-3 1 I/O TXRX
Contact : 1-175218-2 2 I/O TXRX*
Recommended manufacturer : 3 0V(LG)
Tyco Electronics AMP

Power input terminal (24VDC)

J4 4 3 2 1 <Cable side connector type> 1 0V(RG)
Connector : 5251-04 2 24VDC
Contact : 5659PBT2L 3 24VDC
Recommended manufacturer : MOLEX 4 0V(RG)

Machine input terminal

CMD81/CMD82

<Cable side connector type>

7 20 Connector : MRP20F01 CMD81
Contact : MRPF102 7 0V(RG) 13 20 24VDC
Case : MR20W 6 12 X36 19 X37
Recommended 5 X35 11 X33 18 X34
manufacturer : 4 X32 10 X30 17 X31
1 14 HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO 3 X3F 9 X3D 16 X3E
2 X3C 8 X3A 15 X3B
1 X39 14 X38

18 50
CMD82
18 0V(RG) 50 X27
17 X26 49 X25
<Cable side connector type> 16 X24 32 X22 48 X23
Connector : MRP50F01 15 X21 31 X2F 47 X20
Contact : MRPF102 14 X2E 30 X2C 46 X2D
Case : MR50W 13 X2B 29 X29 45 X2A
Recommended 12 X28 28 X16 44 X17
manufacturer : 11 X15 27 X13 43 X14
HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO 10 X12 26 X10 42 X11
1 33 9 X1F 25 X1B 41 X1E
8 X1D 24 X18 40 X1C
7 X1A 23 X05 39 X19
6 X07 22 X02 38 X06
5 X04 21 X0F 37 X03
4 X01 20 X0C 36 X00
3 X0E 19 X09 35 X0D
2 X0B 34 X0A
1 X08 33 24VDC
* This examples shows CS1 set to
CS1 "0" and CS2 set to "1".
0 Refer to the PLC Interface Manual
for details.

I-153
 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD
11.2 Hardware Interface

Machine output terminal

CFD83

CFD83
1 33 1 Y08 33 24VDC
2 Y0B 34 Y0A
3 Y0E 19 Y09 35 Y0D
<Cable side connector type> 4 Y01 20 Y0C 36 Y00
Connector : MRP50M01 5 Y04 21 Y0F 37 Y03
Contact : MRPM102 6 Y07 22 Y02 38 Y06
Case : MR50W 7 Y1A 23 Y05 39 Y19
Recommended manufacturer : 8 Y1D 24 Y18 40 Y1C
HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO 9 Y1F 25 Y1B 41 Y1E
10 Y12 26 Y10 42 Y11
11 Y15 27 Y13 43 Y14
18 50 12 Y28 28 Y16 44 Y17
13 Y2B 29 Y29 45 Y2A
14 Y2E 30 Y2C 46 Y2D
15 Y21 31 Y2F 47 Y20
16 Y24 32 Y22 48 Y23
17 Y26 49 Y25
18 0V(RG) 50 Y27
* This examples shows CS1 set to
※CS1 を｢0｣に設定した場合の例です。
CS1 "0" and CS2 set to "1".
詳細は PLC インターフェース説明書を
0 Refer to the PLC Interface Manual
参照してください。
for details.
(3) Rotary switch
Set the address (station No.) assignment for two stations in DI/DO: 64/48 point units. Set using the
CS1 rotary switch. The assignment address is changed with the rotary switch setting.

CS1
Setting Function
0 Remote I/O station 0, 1 station selection
0
1 Invalid
2 Remote I/O station 2, 3 station selection
CS1
3 Invalid
4 Remote I/O station 4, 5 station selection
5 Invalid
6 Remote I/O station 6, 7 station selection
7 Invalid
8~F Setting prohibited

∗ The X and Y assignments are reference values. When actually making the assignment, add
DI/DO assignment No. to the head address assigned to each remote IO unit station No.

(4) Setting switches

Set the digital input sink type and source type changeover.
S1, S2 S3, S4 Function
ON OFF Source input selection
OFF ON Sink input selection

I-154
 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD
11.3 Connections

11.3 Connections
(1) External power supply (DCIN)
24VDC is required for card operation. Prepare a stabilized power supply that satisfies the following
specifications.
Rated output : 24VDC ± 5% * The rated output current is the value when using 60mA × 48 points
Ripple : ± 5% (P-P) for the machine output (DO). Prepare a power supply that satisfies
Rated current : 3.8A the 24VDC output's total output current.
CS1 (SW1)
J4 24VDC
CSH41

CSH41

0V(RG)
FG
CMD81 U
Stabilized
power supply
CFD83

4 3 2 1
SOURCE

CMD82
SINK

24VDC input
J4
S1
S2
S3
S4

QY231 1 0V(RG)
2 24VDC
3 24VDC
4 0V(RG)

(2) Remote I/O connections (CSH41A/B)

1) Connection of the CSH41A connector
Connect the CSH41A connector to the base I/O unit RIO1 connector, or CR05 connector for the
operation board remote I/O communication.
CS1 (SW1)
J4
CSH41A

CSH41B

SKIP
ENC1

CSH41A CMD81

CR31 SV2SV1 RIO1

CFD83
RIO2 DCIN
RIO1
SOURCE

CMD82
SINK
S1
S2
S3
S4

For base I/O unit connection QY231

Terminator (optional)
CR05 (R-TM)
Refer to Appendix 2.22

1 2 3
RIO1
CSH41A/B
CR05

1 I/O TXRX3
2 I/O TXRX3*
3 GND
For communication terminal connection

I-155
 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD
11.3 Connections

(3) Machine input terminal (CMD81, CMD82)

The following shows the sink type input circuit corresponding to the machine side sink output, and
source type input circuit corresponding to the machine side source output.

Sink type Source type

(Machine side) QY231 (Machine side) QY231

CMD81/82 CMD81/82
24VDC 24VDC
2.2kΩ 2.2kΩ
△
0V(RG) △
△ △

2.2kΩ 2.2kΩ
Control Control
0V(RG)
△
△
△ △
circuit circuit

COM COM
0V(RG)

CAUTION

Do not apply any voltage to the connector other than that specified in this manual. Failure
to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.
Input conditions
Set so the input conditions are within the ranges shown in the following conditions.
Sink type Source type
18V or more,
1 Input voltage at external contact ON 6V or less
25.2V or less
2 Input current at external contact ON 9mA or more
20V or more,
3 Input voltage at external contact OFF 4V or less
25.2V or less
4 Input current at external contact OFF 2mA or less
5 Tolerable chattering time 3ms or less (Refer to T1 below.)
6 Input signal holding time 40ms or more (Refer to T2 below.)
7 Input circuit operation delay time 3ms ≤ T3 T4 ≤ 16ms
8 Machine side contact capacity 30V or more, 16mA or more

<Caution>
Input signal holding time: 40ms or more as a guideline. The input signal can only be
confirmed if held longer than the ladder process cycle time.

T2 T2
T1 T1 T1 T1
External signal
24VDC

Internal signal
+5V

T3 T4 T3 T4

I-156
 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD
11.3 Connections

(4) Machine output terminal (CFD83)

The QY231 output circuit is a source type (source output).

Source type

24VDC QY231
CFD83

(Machine side)

RA
△

Control
circuit

R
PL

0V(RG)

CAUTION

Do not apply any voltage to the connector other than that specified in this manual. Failure
to observe this could cause bursting, damage, etc.

Output conditions

Insulation method Non-insulation

Rated load voltage 24VDC
Max. output current 60mA/point
Saturation voltage 1.6V (standard)
Output delay time 40µs

<Caution>
∗ When using an inductive load such as a relay, always connect a diode (voltage resistance
100V or more, 100mA or more) in parallel to the load.
∗ When using a lamp or capacitive load, always connect a protective resistor (R = 150Ω) serially
to the load to suppress rush currents. (Make sure that the current is less than the above
tolerable current including the momentary current.)

I-157
 11. CONNECTION OF QY231 EXTENDED I/O CARD
11.3 Connections

1) Connection of the remote I/O unit

When the remote I/O unit is connected with a serial link, multiple units can be combined and used
in a range of eight or less total occupied stations. (Refer to the Connection Manual, Chapter 6
"CONNECTION OF REMOTE I/O UNIT" for details.)
QY231 occupies two stations, so the remote I/O units including this card can be connected to
RIO1 of the base I/O unit in combinations of 6 stations or less.
Connect a terminator R-TM to the CSH41B when it is not connected to any device.

CS1 (SW1)
J4
CSH41A

CSH41B

CMD81

CFD83 To the next remote

I/O unit

CMD82 Terminal
SOURCE
SINK

(optional)
(R-TM)
S1
S2
S3
S4

QY231
Refer to Appendix 2.22.

I-158
 12. OPTION CARD
12.1 External PLC Link I (M-NET Interface)

12. OPTION CARD

12.1 External PLC Link I (M-NET Interface)

The Mitsubishi sequencer (MELSEC A Series) and MELDAS60 Series can be connected serially. A
multi-drop link can be established, but the NC side cannot be set as the master station.
This function is an option. Refer to the respective NC system specifications for details.

12.1.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

(1)
(3)
(2)
HR571 card
(5)
(4)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) TS1 Serial link connection terminal
(2) SW2 Operation mode setting rotary switch (Normally: 0)
(3) SW1 Terminator setting switch (OFF ← | → ON)
(4) RTBUS NC dedicated bus connection connector
(5) TEST Mitsubishi test terminal (Not used)

Accessories
No cables, etc., are enclosed.
This card is mounted in the control unit's extension slot.

12.1.2 Connector Pin Assignment

JST

CAUTION
Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-159
 12. OPTION CARD
12.1 External PLC Link I (M-NET Interface)

12.1.3 Connection with MELSEC

MELDAS60 act as serial link slave stations.

An example of the connection is shown below. Refer to each sequencer manual when connecting with
the NC side control unit.
MELSEC base unit

This cable must be

prepared by user.

MELSEC
AJ71C22 unit

SW1 SW1
[ON] [OFF]
Ex.FCA64-B Ex.FCA64-B

SW2 SW2
0 0

This cable must be

prepared by user.

Example of cable connection

MELSEC A Series MELDAS60/60S Series

MELDAS60 Series MELDAS60/60S
MELDAS60 SeriesSeries
AJ71C22 M-NET Interface
M-NET I/F M-NETInterface
M-NET I/F
1
SDA
2
SDB
3
RDA
4
RDB
SG
FG
Max. 100m

(1) Up to seven slave stations can be linked.

(2) When connecting the AJ71C22 and a slave station, position the AJ71C22 at the final end as shown
above.
(3) The maximum overall distance of the cable from the AJ71C22 to the final slave station is 100m.
(4) Validate (turn ON) the terminator setting for the final slave station, and invalidate (turn OFF) the
terminator for the other slave stations.
The final slave station is the slave station positioned at the final end of the transmission route. This
is not related to the set station No.
(5) In addition to M60/60S Series, models that support a serial link connection can be incorporated as
slave stations within the same link.
(6) The HR571 rotary switch is normally set to 0. Correct communication may not be possible if the
setting is changed.

CAUTION
Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-160
 12. OPTION CARD
12.2 External PLC II (MELSEC bus connection)

12.2 External PLC II (MELSEC bus connection)

The Mitsubishi sequencer (MELSEC A Series) and MELDAS60/60S Series can be connected with a bus.
Up to four NC control units can be connected to one sequencer.
One NC unit occupies one stage (0 slot) of the sequencer extension unit. Refer to the sequencer and NC
system specifications for the number of stages that can be extended. This function is an option.
12.2.1 Names and Functions of Each Section

(3)

(1) (2)
HR513 card

(4)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) CF51A MELSEC A bus connection connector (Basic base side)
(2) CF51B MELSEC A bus connection connector (Extension base side)
(3) CS Extension unit No. setting rotary switch (Setting stages: 1 to 7)
(4) RTBUS NC dedicated bus connection connector
Accessories
No cables, etc., are enclosed.
This card is mounted in the control unit's extension slot.
12.2.2 Connection with MELSEC
The MELDAS60/60S Series are handled as special extension units (32-point units) for the sequencer.
The following connection example is for when there is one extension stage. Refer to the connection
methods in the respective sequencer manual and connect with the NC control unit.
MELSEC (Main
MELSEC base unit
base section)

FCUA-R500/501
MELSEC (Extension
MELSEC extension unit
base section)
cable
(Open) (first extension
(first extension stage)
stage)

Ex.FCA64-B
CS
CPU compatible with MELSEC bus connection
CF51B A1S type
1 Max. No. of extension stages: One stage
Max. cable length : 6m

CF51A A A，A N，A U type

Max. No. of extension stages: Four stages
Note that the number of extension stages is
limited by the No. of CPU input/output points
and the power supply on the extension unit side.
Max. cable length : 6m

CAUTION
Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

I-161
 12. OPTION CARD
12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit

12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit

The high-speed program server function is used by adding the high-speed program server unit
(FCU6-EP203-1), in which the ATA memory card HR831 and Ethernet card HR832 are assembled. The
memory card has the ATA specifications, and either the 100BASE-TX or the 10BASE-T type Ethernet
can be used.
As there are many environment types and varieties in which the Ethernet communication is used, install
a ferrite core on the communication cable's NC control unit side connector end to stabilize the NC
operation.

12.3.1 Connector Layout

Cross cable

Precautions for use

1) Install the ferrite within 10cm from the end of the NC side connector.
2) Use a shielded cable for the 10BASE-T cable.
3) Do not wire the Ethernet cable in parallel with the drive line. Pass the cable through a dedicated
duct, or separate to at least 10cm away from other wiring.

I-162
 12. OPTION CARD
12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit

12.3.2 Inserting the IC Card

The SanDisk ATA type flash ROM can be used for the IC card. There are cases when brands other than
SanDisk cannot be used. Always turn the control unit power OFF before inserting or ejecting the IC card.
Take care to the orientation of the mark on the IC card, and insert it from the top of the control unit.

Face the front label of the IC

The IC card can be ejected card to the front and insert.
when the button is pressed.

View of control unit lid side with cover removed

HR831 card
▲ mark
surface

Enlarged view

IC card

Enlarged view
Bottom view
IC card eject button

I-163
 12. OPTION CARD
12.3 Connection of High-speed Program Server Unit

12.3.3 Connection of Ethernet Cable

Select a shielded cable for the Ethernet cable, and connect both ends to the FG. For the high-speed
program server, refer to the following drawing, lead out the FG wire from the cable and connect to the
control unit's FG terminal.
Confirm that the server side or hub side shield cable's FG is connected to the power supply line's FG
terminal.

Example 1
When connecting one-on-one with server

Cross cable 8-pin modular jack

Lead out FG wire from shield

section, and connect to control
unit's FG terminal.

* If the FG wire is
not connected, the
communication
may be unstable
depending on the
Securely connect the AC Select a network card or hub
network device
socket's FG plug to the having a metal shell for the FG combination.
power FG wire. in the Ethernet connector.

Example 2
Connecting via a hub

Straight cable

To control unit's FG terminal

Caution
When the AC/DC adaptor power is externally installed to the hub, the hub could malfunction due to
noise if the cable shield is not connected to the power FG. When using a hub, install a ferrite also on
the hub side.
I-164
 12. OPTION CARD
12.4 Connection of Ethernet Function

12.4 Connection of Ethernet Function

The HR534 card is used to use Ethernet communication. Either the 10BASE-T or 10BASE-5 Ethernet
can be selected for HR534. When using 10BASE-5, set the changeover switch SW1 shown below up,
and when using the 10BASE-T, set SW1 down. The BASE-5 and BASE-T connectors cannot be used
simultaneously.
As there are many environment types and varieties in which the Ethernet communication is used, install
a ferrite on the communication cable's NC side connector end to stabilize the NC operation.

Host PC
10BASE-5/10BASE-T
changeover switch
Cross cable

Use a shielded cable

for the BASE-T cable.

Ferrite core: TDK

Max. 10cm
ZCAT3035-1330

SW1 : BASE-5/BASE-T connector changeover

Set up : Select BASE-5 connector
Set down : Select BASE-T connector

BASE5 : 10BASE-5 connector

BASET : 10BASE-T connector

NCNO : When multiple control units are connected, set the control unit's station No.
When not using the I/O link, set "0".
When using the I/O link, set the master side to "0" and the slave side to "1".
SW2 : Turns the terminator ON or OFF.
When the I/O link function is used by two units, set the master station side
and slave station side terminator ON/OFF switch SW2 to ON (down).
The setting is invalid if the I/O link function is not used.

AUX2 : I/O link connector.

Connect an R000 cable, SH21 cable or equivalent.

Precautions for use

1) Install the ferrite within 10cm from the end of the NC side connector.
2) Use a shielded cable for the 10BASE-T cable.
3) Do not wire the Ethernet cable in parallel with the drive line. Pass the cable through a dedicated
duct, or separate to at least 10cm away from other wiring.
4) Correctly set the BASE-5/BASE-T changeover switch.

I-165
 12. OPTION CARD
12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link

12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link

When connecting I/O device by CC-Link, HR576 card is required to be mounted in the expansion slot of
the control unit.
Connect a dedicated cable for CC-Link cable to a terminal block of HR576 card.
Always connect a terminator (accessory) to the unit which serves as the final station.
This card functions as CC-Link system master/local station. Refer to the respective NC specifications
manual and “MELSEC AJ61QBT11/A1SJ61QBT11 Control & Communication Link System Master/
Local Module User's Manual” etc. for details on CC-Link system.

12.5.1 Names and Functions of Each Sections

(5) (6)
(7)

(1)
(2)
HR576 card
(3)
(8)
(4)

No. Connector name Function explanation

(1) SW1 Station No. setting rotary switch (Ten’s place)
(2) SW2 Station No. setting rotary switch (One’s place)
(3) SW3 Baud rate setting rotary switch
(4) SW4 Operation mode setting rotary switch (Normally: 0)
(5) SW5 Condition setting DIP switch
(6) TE1 CC-Link connection terminal
(7) FG FG connection terminal
(8) RTBUS NC dedicated bus connection connector

Accessories
Terminator
This card is mounted in the control unit's extension slot.

I-166
 12. OPTION CARD
12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link

12.5.2 Connector Pin Assignment

CC-Link connection
terminal <Cable side connector type> 1 I/O DA
1 Crimp terminal: V1.25-3 2 I/O DB
TE1 2 Recommended manufacturer: JST 3 DG
3 4 SLD
4

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.

12.5.3 Connection with I/O device

Example of unit connection

HR576
Control unit
Remote I/O station Remote I/O station

This cable must be prepared by user.

Example of cable connection

Remote I/O station Remote I/O station HR576

terminal block terminal block CC-Link terminal block
DA DA DA

DB DB DB
Terminator Terminator
(Note 2) DG DG DG (Note 2)

SLD SLD SLD

FG FG FG
U U U

Shielded twist cable (3-core type) Shielded twist cable (3-core type)
(Note 1) (Note 1)

I-167
 12. OPTION CARD
12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link

Correspondence of terminal name and cable color

Terminal name Cable color

1 DA Blue
2 DB White
3 DG Yellow
4 SLD Grounding cable (shielded)

(Note 1) In the CC-Link system, when a cable other than a dedicated cable for CC-Link is used, the
performance cannot be assured. Refer to the CC-Link Partner Association home page
(http://www.cc-link.org/) for specifications of the CC-Link dedicated cable and for further
inquiry.

(Note 2) Connect terminators only to the station located at both ends of the network. Value of terminator
varies depending on the cable to be used. 110 Ω is used for dedicated cable for CC-Link. 130 Ω
is used for dedicated high performance cable for CC-Link. Use the terminators prepared as
accessories. (Two kinds of terminators are attached.)

CAUTION

Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power is
ON.
Separate the signal wire and drive line/power line when wiring.

I-168
 13. CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL BATTERY UNIT

13. CONNECTION OF EXTERNAL BATTERY UNIT

This battery unit is installed in each unit as the NC data backup and servo (feed axis and auxiliary axis)
absolute position backup. It can be replaced from outside the electric cabinet. The NC data backup
battery is used with the F240 cable connected to the control unit power supply card battery connection
BAT connector, and the CF05 connector on the external battery unit.

HR083
BAT connector
Connection connector Control section
Battery holder
A built-in battery
is not used.
Fron t cover

AUX1

Point A

Bottom view
Battery unit: FCU6-BT4D1
Open the lid on the control unit, pass the F240 cable
through point A on the base and connect with
the BAT connector.

System 1
SH21
To servo drive unit

Servo battery System 2 SH21

To servo drive unit

CR05
HR071A F240
NC b at t ery
* Provide an allowance in the cable wiring so that
the battery unit can be pulled out during replacement.

Unit type : FCU6-BT4D1

Replacement part type : For NC control unit ER6 BKO-NC2157H01 (single battery replacement)
For servo ER6-B4D-01 BKO-NC2151H06 (PCB unit replacement)
CAUTION

If the battery voltage drop warning alarm occurs, the programs, tool data and parameters
could be damaged. Thus, reload each data with the input/output device after replacing
the battery.
Do not short-circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.
Incorrect connections could damage the device, so always connect the cable to the
designated connector.
I-169
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.1 Control Unit Outline Drawing

APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING

Appendix 1.1 Control Unit Outline Drawing
Appendix 1.1.1 M64A Control Unit Outline Drawing
4-M5 screw hole

6
CBUS 1 CBUS 2

OPEN

156

168
DC IN
DC OUT
PS EMG ENC
BAT ALM 0 2
WD NC NC NC
CF11 CF10
6
ER L E D S Y S RST

6 208 6

220
220
DC IN
CF01 EMG CF02

95

I-170
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.1 Control Unit Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.1.2 M64AS/64S/65/65S/66/66S Control Unit Outline Drawing

Fan cover projection
4-M5 screw hole

I-171
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.2.1 FCUA-CT100/CT120

250

55 55
180
9

Panel cut drawing

140
130

190 ±0.2
130 ±0.2
382 (square hole dimensions)
8 - ø4 hole (for M3 screw)
382 (square hole)

130

130 ±0.2
260

130±0.2
130
MITSU BISHI

dimensions)
(square hole
8-M3 screw

182
9

9 182 (square hole) 9

I-172
 9 242 (square hole) 9

9
10

5
MITSU BISHI

180
Appendix 1.2.2 FCUA-CR10

200
180

182 (square hole)

5

9
10

5
6 - ø4 hole (for M3 screw)
130 120

I-173
250
5 5
260

6-M3 screw
242 (square hole dimensions)
APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING

Square hole
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

182
190 ±0.2

(Square hole
dimensions)
130 ±0.2 120 ±0.2

Panel cut drawing

 4 - 4 hole (for M3 screw)

5
10
5
10
MITSUBISHI

200

180
190

190
180

200
Appendix 1.2.3 FCUA-KB10/KB12/EL10

6 - 4 hole (for M3 screw)

5
10

10
5 130 120 5 5 130 5
10 40 80 (Wiring allowance)
260 140

I-174
2.3
(square hole dimensions)
(square hole 132
6- M3 screw 1 248 dimensions) 1 4 - M3 screw

4
4
APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING

+
Square hole Square hole

182
182
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

190 0.2

190 0.2

(Square hole
dimensions)
(Square hole
dimensions)

4
+ + +
130 0.2 120 0.2 130 0.2
1 1
Panel cut drawing
* This is a special part. Contact Mitsubishi to place an order.
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.2.4 FCUA-LD100

SH21 cable
CR02 connector (FCUA-R000)

70
CR02

2.3
10
180
5
5

5
5
9

Panel cut drawing

140
130

190 0.2
+

130 0.2
+
8 - 4 hole (for M3 screw)
382 (Square hole)

382 dimensions)
(square hole

Square hole
130

130 0.2
+
130 0.2
260

+
130
MITSUBISHI

182
8- M3 screw

(Square hole
dimensions)
9

180
5

10 10

I-175
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.2.5 FCUA-LD10

SH21 cable
CR02 connector (FCUA-R000)

70
CR02

2.3
10

Panel cut drawing

5
6 - 4 hole (for M3 screw)
120

190 0.2
1

120 0.2
248 dimensions)
(square hole

+
Square hole
260

130 0.2
+
130
MITSUBISHI

dimensions)
1

(Square hole
182
6- M3 screw

4 4
5

10 180 10
5 190 5
200

I-176
 Escutcheon

M3 8 screw (Note)
If a screw longer than 8mm is
(10.4-type Protective cover used, the liquid crystal could
monochrome LCD) be damaged.

210
Appendix 1.2.6 FCU6-DUT32

270 Menu keys

RX215

I-177
4
10
APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING

45
20 50
(Wiring allowance)
Square hole

190+0.3
182+0.3
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

4 Panel cut drawing

10

1 248 1
+
6- 4 hole
+
10 130 0.3 120 0.3 10
 Escutcheon
M3 8 screw
Control card
Inverter power supply installation plate

Inverter power supply for backlight

(10.4-type color LCD)

210
(Note)
If a screw longer than 8mm is
used, the liquid crystal could
Appendix 1.2.7 FCU6-DUT33

be damaged.

270 Menu keys

I-178
10
20
APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING

100 (Wiring allowance)

Square hole

+
+
190 0.3
182 0.3
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Panel cut drawing

4
10
1 248 1
+ +
10 130 0.3 120 0.3 10 6- 4 hole
 4 - 4 hole (for M3 screw)

10
CR02

Reference drawing for combination with FCUA-LD10

180
190
200

CR02 connector

CR02
Appendix 1.2.8 FCUA-KB20/KB30

SH21 cable
(FCUA-R000)

I-179
10 (70)
5

130
10

2.3 5 5
Dimensions when combined 140 10 34.5
with FCUA-LD10, etc.

2.3
132
APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING

4- M3 screw (square hole

dimensions)

4
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

0.2
+

Square hole
182
190

(Square hole
dimensions)

+
130 0.2 Panel cut drawing
1 1
 M3 10 screw
(Note) If a screw longer than 10mm
is used, the liquid crystal
could be damaged.

Panel cut drawing

(5)

(9)
READY
Appendix 1.2.9 FCU6-KB021/KB031

TOOL EDIT DIAGN

MONITOR PARAM MDI IN/OUT SFG F0

O N G 7 8 9$
A B C
Square hole
X Y Z 4 5 6
U V W

I-180
F D H 1 2 3
E L !

+
P Q R

200 0.3
- 0 ･,

182 (Square hole)

I J K + SP
132 (Square hole)
210

210 (keyboard outline)

M S T EOB = /
( ) 〔 〕 # *
APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING

DELETE C･B
e ? INS CAN
l
ho
4 SHIFT
4-

9
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

RESET INPUT
1 + (1) CALC

5
5 130 0.3
140 (keyboard outline)

140 20 34.5

* The key layout for the FCU6-KB021 is shown in this drawing.

 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.2.10 FCU6-DUN22

260 20 110 (Wiring allowance)

(8.4-type color TFT)

200

Menu key

260 (Display unit outline)

250 ± 0.3

244
200 (Display unit outline)

Square hole
190 ± 0.3
184

4 - M3 screw

Panel cut drawing

I-181
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.2.11 FCU6-KB022

140 20 110 (Wiring allowance)

200

140 (Keyboard outline)

130±0.3
122
200 (Keyboard outline)
190±0.3

Square hole
182

4-M3 screw

Panel cut drawing

I-182
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.2 Communication Terminal Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.2.12 Key Arrangement

(1) Appearance of CT100/LD100/separate type FCUA-CR10 + KB10/KB12 and FCUA-EL10 +

KB10/KB12
Alphabetic character,
numer ical character,
READY L ED and sym bol keys

Setting keys Function selection keys

MITSUBISHI READY

MONI- TOOL EDIT DIAGN

TOR PARAM IN/OUT SFG F0
MDI

Ｏ Ｎ Ｇ ７ ８ ９
A B C

Ｘ Ｙ Ｚ ５
４ ６
U V W

Ｆ Ｄ Ｈ １ ３
２
E L !
Ｐ Ｑ Ｒ － ０
I J K ＋ SP ，
Ｍ Ｓ Ｔ EOB ＝ ／
( ) [ ] ＃ ＊

? DELET CB
INS CAN

SHIFT

RESET INPUT
CALC

Cu rsor key
Shift key
Reset key
Menu keys
Data correction keys
Page keys
Input key (calculation)

(2) Appearance of CT120/separate type FCUA-LD10 + FCUA-KB30

MITSUBISHI READY
MONI- TOOL EDIT DIAGN SFG F0
TOR PARAM MDI IN/OUT

Ｏ Ｎ Ｇ ７ ８ ９
A B C

Ｘ Z F ４ ５ ６
Y H E
U W M １ ２ ３
V P Q

I
J
K
L
S
[
－
＋ ０
SP
，
R D Ｔ EOB ＝ ／＊
( ) [ ] ＃

DELET CB
? INS CAN

SHIFT

RESET INPUT
CALC

(Note) To input the alphabetic characters or symbols on the lower of the alphabetic character and
symbol keys, press SHIFT key, then press the corresponding key.
(Example) "A" is input by pressing SHIFT , O
A .

I-183
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.3 Base I/O Unit Outline Drawing

4-M54-M5ネジ用穴
screw hole

(6)
(6)
2 3 45 2 3 45
SKIP
SKIP

D E0F1

D E0F1
678

678
ENC1
ENC1 9A B C 9A B C

SV2 SV1
SV2 SV1
CR31
CR31
CF31 CF32

156
168
CF31 CF32

156

168
CF33 CF34
CF33 CF34
CF11
CF11

RI02
RIO2RI01 DCIN
RIO1 DCIN
RS232C
RS232C

HANDLE
HANDLE

HR211A
HR211A
80
80

6
(6)
(6) 208
208 6

220
220
100
100
(115)
40

I-184
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.4 Remote I/O Unit Outline Drawing

Top

Heat dissipation
allowance
100
135

168
6
40

Heat dissipation,
wiring allowance
70

150
Wiring allowance

Bottom

Installation hole
135

2-M5-0.8 screw
6

DX
156
6

34 6

I-185
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.5 HR347/357 (Scan I/O) Card Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.5 HR347/357 (Scan I/O) Card Outline Drawing

25 1 8 1 DIO SC A N 2 SC A N 1
0 0 0
A ISP

20
(Scan DI/DO: 64/64)

ALM3

ALM2

ALM1
50UT
24IN
B
CF35 C S3 C S2 C S1

RIO3

DCIN
1 2 3

A
B

110±0.3
150
Ø4.5

20 1 20 1
A A

20
(DI：32) DO：32
B B
CF31 CF33

7 166±0.3 7
180 4-C2

∗ The PCB height (depth) will be approx. 40mm when the connector is inserted, so secure a space
larger than that during installation.

I-186
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.6 FCU6-HR377 Unit Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.6 FCU6-HR377 Unit Outline Drawing

I-187
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.7 FCU6-HR378 Unit Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.7 FCU6-HR378 Unit Outline Drawing

I-188
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.8 QY231 Card Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.8 QY231 Card Outline Drawing

5
(SW1)

>
CS1

>
J4
CSH41B
CSH41A

Not
8
0

mounted

POWER
ALM CMD81

CFD83

120±0. 3

130
CMD82
SOURCE
SINK
S2
S3
S4
S1

5
6.5 167±0. 3 6.5
180

∗ The PCB height (depth) will be approx. 40mm when the connector is inserted, so secure a space
larger than that during installation.

I-189
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.9 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR377 Layout

Appendix 1.9 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR377 Layout

The FCU6-HR377 part height is max. 25mm. When overlaying the FCU6-HR377 and control unit as shown in the
drawing, arrange the control unit 30mm or more away from the FCU6-HR377 PCB surface.

I-190
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.10 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR378 Layout

Appendix 1.10 Example of Control Unit and FCU6-HR378 Layout

The FCU6-HR377 part height is max. 25mm. When overlaying the FCU6-HR377 and control unit as shown in the
drawing, arrange the control unit 30mm or more away from the HR FCU6-377 PCB surface.

I-191
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.11 Manual Pulse Generator (HD60) Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.11 Manual Pulse Generator (HD60) Outline Drawing

3-M4 stud bolts L10

Packing t2.0
60±0.5
77±0.5

60±0.5

80±1 12V 0V A B
ø6
ø7

ø8
ø6

Installation other than

8.89 7.60 M3 × 6 not possible
16 24 27±0.5

) 3 - ø4.8 hole
ti on
ec
ris
(T
0º

ø62 hole +2.0

12

ø772±0.2

Panel cut drawing

(Note) Use the 25 pulse/rev type.

I-192
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.12 Synchronous Feed Encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.12 Synchronous Feed Encoder (OSE-1024-3-15-68) Outline Drawing

68
Caution plate Detector (1024 pulse/rev)
56

-0.009
-0.025

68
56
ø68

50
ø5
4-ø5.4 hole

20

2 28

A 1chA K 0V
5 3 B 1chZ L
19.5 C 1chB M
102 33 D N 1chA*
Case
135 E ground P 1chZ*
F R 1chB*
Synchronous feed encoder side G S
97F3102E20-29P (or equivalent)
H +5V T
J
ø14.3 -0.11
0

-0.012
2 5 -0.042
-0.006
-0.017

-0.025
-0.009

+0.1
0
ø15

ø16

ø50

+0.14
1.15+0.14
0 1.15 0
Cross-section BB
26
The effective depth of the key way is 21mm.
2

Enlarged view of key

I-193
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.13 HR591 (I/O link relay branching wire) Card Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.13 HR591 (I/O link relay branching wire) Card Outline Drawing

4 - 4.5 hole
65
(6) 53 6

(6)
AUX-IN AUX AUX-OUT

50
Appendix 1.14 HR211 Card Outline Drawing 38
6

Not used HR211A

(7)

3 CF11 6- 4
(19)

Not used RS232C

Installation hole for
base I/O card add-on

HANDLE
80
68
46

Not used Installation hole for

base I/O card add-on
10

Installation hole (LG)

for base I/O card add-on Not used

5 58.5
(5) 90 5
(4) 92 4
100

I-194
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.15 QY261 Card Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.15 QY261 Card Outline Drawing

4 - 4.5 hole

+24V RG SEL RG

AVR

CBH28 CBH38 CBH48 CBH58

130

120

47.04
16.48
5

5 95

105

I-195
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.16 External Battery Unit Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.16 External Battery Unit Outline Drawing

NC battery
Servo drive unit battery

98
91
7
6.5
45

58
185 110

37.5
37.5

6.5
4-M4 screw

30

45

Punched hole
110

27.5
166

I-196
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.17 Outline and Installation Outline Drawing for Grounding Plate and Clamp Fitting

Appendix 1.17 Outline and Installation Outline Drawing for Grounding Plate and
Clamp Fitting
The shield wire generally only needs to
be grounded to the connector's case Cable
frame. However, the effect can be
improved by directly grounding to the
grounding plate as shown on the right. Clamp fitting
Install the grounding plate near each Grounding plate
(Fitting A, B)
unit. Peel part of the cable sheath as
shown on the right to expose the shield
sheath. Press that section against the
grounding plate with the clamp fitting.
Note that if the cable is thin, several can

40
be clamped together.
Install the grounding plate directly onto
the cabinet or connect a grounding wire
so that sufficient frame grounding is
achieved.
If the AERSBAN- SET, containing the Shield sheath
grounding plate and clamp fitting, is
required, please contact Mitsubishi. Clamp section drawing

Outline drawing

Grounding plate Clamp fitting

17.5
2-ø5 hole
Installation hole
30
B±0.3

MAX L 10
A
-0.2
0
24
35
6

24 +0.3
3

0
7

Note 1 M4 screw 6 22
35
11

Note 1) Screw hole for wiring to cabinet's grounding plate

Note 2) The grounding plate thickness is 1.6mm

A B C Enclosed fittings L
AERSBAN-DSET 100 86 30 Two clamp fittings A Clamp fitting A 70
AERSBAN-ESET 70 56 – One clamp fitting B Clamp fitting B 45

I-197
 APPENDIX 1 OUTLINE DRAWING
Appendix 1.18 F Installation Plate Outline Drawing

Appendix 1.18 F Installation Plate Outline Drawing

5.5 5.5
65
47.1±0.2
42.6±0.2

5
R 2.
2-

12±0.2
Square

24
5

5
.7 hole
R1

12
2-

38

76

Base I/O unit

Example of use with RS-232C devices

RS-232C device

F032 cable Cross cable

RS23 2C

F mounting plate
Cabinet side wall
Max. cable length:15m

Cross cable connection

For DC code control For DR/ER control

F032 cable side RS-232C side F032 cable side RS-232C side

2 SD 2 SD 2 SD 2 SD
3 RD 3 RD 3 RD 3 RD
4 RS 4 RS
5 CS 6 5 CS
6 DR 6 DR 2 DR 6 DR
2 0 ER 20 ER 0 ER 20 ER
7 GND 7 GND 7 GND 7 GND

<Caution> Recommended applicable connector

Do not connect anything to the open pins. Connector: HDBB-25PF(05) (Hirose Electric)
Keep the overall cable length to less than 15m. Case: HDB-CTF (Hirose Electric)

I-198
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS

APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS

List of cable type
Appendix No. Cable type Application Max. length Standard cable length
Appendix 2.1 SH21 cable MC link A communication (servo/display) (Note 1) 30m
Appendix 2.2 SH41 cable MC link B communication (Remote I/O 0.5m
communication)
Appendix 2.3 R301 cable DI/DO 50m
Appendix 2.4 F010 cable Connection between control unit and base 20m
I/O unit
Appendix 2.5 F020 cable Connects one manual pulse generator 50m
Appendix 2.5 F021 cable Connects two manual pulse generators 50m
Appendix 2.5 F022 cable Connects three manual pulse generators 50m
Appendix 2.6 F030 cable Connects RS-232-C device to port No. 1 15m
Appendix 2.6 F031 cable Connects RS-232-C device to port No. 1 and 15m
port No. 2
Appendix 2.6 F032 cable Connects RS-232-C device to port No. 2 15m
Appendix 2.7 F040 cable Synchronous feed encoder (straight type (Note 1) 50m
connector)
Appendix 2.7 F041 cable Synchronous feed encoder (right angle type (Note 1) 50m
connector)
Appendix 2.8 F050 cable Connection between control unit and base 0.5m
I/O unit
Appendix 2.9 F070 cable 24VDC input 3m
Appendix 2.10 F120 cable External emergency stop 30m
Appendix 2.11 F190 cable RS-232-C device (for Mitsubishi 15m
maintenance/service personnel)
Appendix 2.12 F240 cable External battery unit 30m
Appendix 2.13 R031 cable Analog signal input/output 30m
Appendix 2.14 R211 cable Communication terminal communication (Note 1) 50m
/remote I/O communication
Appendix 2.15 R220 cable 24VDC power supply for remote I/O unit 50m
Appendix 2.16 R500 cable External PLC link II (A1C type) 6m
Appendix 2.17 R501 cable External PLC link II (A3N type) 6.6m
Appendix 2.18 ENC-SP1 cable Spindle drive unit 50m
Appendix 2.19 ENC-SP2 cable FR-TK 50m
Appendix 2.20 M-TM terminator CRT changeover −
Appendix 2.21 R-TM terminator Remote I/O communication terminator −

(Note 1) The max. length is the sum (L1 + L2) of the cable length (L1) from the control unit to the base I/O unit and the cable
length (L2) from the base I/O unit to each unit.

I-199
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS

Maximum cable length

L1 L2

I/O base unit

SV1 SH21
Servo dr ive unit
F010 SV2
Control unit

F050 Expansion RIO1 SH41

Remote I/O unit
I/O unit RIO2

F040 Synchronous feed

ENC encoder

(Note 2) Symbols for writing cable drawings

The following symbols are used in the cable drawings.

1. indicates twist.

2. indicates the shield sheath.

3. indicates shield clamping to the grounding plate.

4. In the cable drawings, the partner of the twisted pair cable is given a priority, so the pin No. of the connectors at both
ends are not necessary in number of order.
5. Equivalent parts can be used for the connector, contact and wire material.

I-200
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.1 SH21 cable

Appendix 2.1 SH21 cable (Servo drive unit)

Cable type: SH21 cable Usage: MC link A communication (servo/display) Appendix 2.1

Connector name : SV1, SV2 (SH21/R000) Servo drive unit

SV1, SV2 (CSH21) Plug : 10120-6000EL

Plug : 10120-6000EL Shell : 10320-3210-000
Shell : 10320-3210-000 Recommended manufacturer: 3M
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
Wire material: UL20276 AWG28 × 10P
Recommended manufacturer: Toyokuni Electric Cable

(Note) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it.
Clamp with the connector’s GND plate.
The SH21 cable is the same as the FCUA-R000 cable used with the MELDAS 50 series.

Appendix 2.2 SH41 cable (Remote I/O)

Cable type: SH41 cable Usage: MC link B communication (Remote I/O communication) Appendix 2.2

Connector name : RIO1, RIO2, RIO3 (CSH41) Connector name : (CSH41)

Note:
1. Protect both ends of
cable by insulation
bushing.
2. RIO1, RIO2, RIO3 can
RIO1, RIO2, RIO3 (CSH41) (CSH41) be used as common.
TXRX 1 1 TXRX
TXRX* 2 2 TXRX*
GND 3 3 GND
RIO1, RIO2, RIO3 (CSH41) (CSH41)
Connector : 1-178288-3 Connector : 1-178288-3
Contact : 1-175218-2 Contact : 1-175218-2
Recommended manufacturer: Recommended manufacturer:
Tyco Electronics AMP Tyco Electronics AMP
2 2
Wire material: MVVS 3C × 0.5mm (MIC 3C × 0.5mm )
Recommended manufacturer: Takeuchi Densen

The SH41 cable is the RIO communication cable for internal wiring. Use this for
connecting the adjacently arranged RIO units in the electric cabinet.
For the wiring outside the electric cabinet, use the R211 cable described in
Appendix 2.15, having reinforced cable material and FG treatment.

Appendix 2.3 R301 cable (DI/DO)

Cable type: R301 cable Usage: DI/DO Appendix 2.3
Connector name : DI-L/DO-L, DI-R/DO-R
CF31, CF32, CF33, CF34

Connector : 7940-6500SC Connector : 7940-6500SC

Recommended manufacturer: 3M Relief : 3448-7940
Recommended manufacturer: 3M
Wire material: B40-S
Recommended manufacturer: Oki Electric Cable

I-201
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.4 F010 cable

Appendix 2.4 F010 cable (Control unit interface)

Cable type: F010 cable Usage: Connection between control unit and base I/O unit Appendix 2.4

Connector name : CF10 Connector name : CF10

CF10 CF10
TXRX1 1 1
TXRX1* 26 26
TXRX2 2 2
TXRX2* 27 27
GND 3 3
GND 28 28
SKIP1 4 4
SKIP1* 29 29
SKIP2 5 5
SKIP2* 30 30
SKIP3 6 6
SKIP3* 31 31
SKIP4 7 7
SKIP4* 32 32
SKIP5 8 8
SKIP5* 33 33
SKIP6 9 9
SKIP6* 34 34
SKIP7 10 10
SKIP7* 35 35
SKIP8 11 11
SKIP8* 36 36
GND 12 12
GND 37 37
ENC1A 13 13
ENC1A* 38 38
ENC1B 14 14
ENC1B* 39 39
ENC1Z 15 15
ENC1Z* 40 40
GND 16 16
GND 41 41
SVTXD2 17 17
SVTXD2* 42 42
SVALM2 18 18
SVALM2* 43 43
SVRXD2 19 19
SVRXD2* 44 44
SVEMG2 20 20
SVEMG2* 45 45
GND 21 21
GND 46 46
SVTXD1 22 22
SVTXD1* 47 47
SVALM1 23 23
SVALM1* 48 48
SVRXD1 24 24
SVRXD1* 49 49
SVEMG1 25 25CF10
SVEMG1* 50 50
CF10 Plug : 10150-6000EL
Plug : 10150-6000EL Shell : 10350-3210-000
Shell : 10350-3210-000 U
Recommended manufacturer:
U
Recommended manufacturer: 3M Wire material: UL20276 AWG28 × 25P 3M
Recommended manufacturer: Toyokuni Electric Cable

(Note) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it.
Clamp with the connector’s GND plate.

I-202
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 cable

Appendix 2.5 F020/021/022 cable (Manual pulse generator)

Cable type: F020/021/02 cable Usage: Manual pulse generator Appendix 2.5

Connector name : HANDLE

HANDLE

1HA 1 Cable name 1ch 2ch 3ch

1HB 2 F020 cable
1ch
+12V 10 F021 cable
GND 9 F022 cable
2HA 3
4 Note:
2HB
2ch The circle indicates the station
+12V 12 used.
GND 11
3HA 5
3HB 6
14 3ch
+12V
GND 13
+5V 7 (Note 2)

U
Connector : CDA-15P Crimp terminal: V1.25-3
Contact : CD-PC-111 Recommended manufacturer: JST
Case : HDA-CTH
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric
Wire material: B-22 (19) U × 2SJ-1 × 9
Recommended manufacturer: Sumitomo Electric Industries

(Note 1) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it.
Clamp with the connector’s GND plate.
(Note 2) When connecting the 5VC power supply specification handle to the FCU6-HR377/FCU6-HR378
card, supply the 5VDC power from pin 7.
This connection is not required when using the 12VDC power supply specification handle.
(Note 3) The connector case is connected to the FG. Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.

I-203
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.6 F030/031/032 cable

Appendix 2.6 F030/031/032 cable (RS-232C)

Cable type: F030/031/032 cable Usage: RS-232C device Appendix 2.6

Connector name: RS232C Connector name: (Port No.1)

Connector name: (Port No.2)

1CH
RS232C (Port No.1)
F installation plate:
SD1(SD3) 2 2 Refer to Appwndix 1.18
RD1(RD3) 3 3 (F installation plate outline drawing).
RS1(RS3) 4 4
CS1(CS3) 5 5
DR1(DR3) 6 6 Port No.1 Port No.2
(For (General
ER1(ER3) 20 20 Cable name servic- open
CD3 8 8 ing) station)
RI3 9 9 F030 cable
7 7 F031 cable
F032 cable
SD2(SD4) 14 2
RD2(RD4) 16 3 Note:
1. The circle indicates the port
RS2(RS4) 19 4 used.
CS2(CS4) 17 5 2. The signal names given in
DR2(DR4) 21 6 parentheses are equivalent
to CF22.
ER2(ER4) 15 20 3. The wire material given in
CD4 18 8 parentheses indicates the
RI4 22 9 F031 cable wire material.
4. Port No.1 is for servicing by
GND 24 7 Mitsubishi service
personnel. Use Port No.2 to
CH2 service the machine.
(Port No.2) 5. When using FCU6-HR377/
CF22 (CF21) U
FCU6-HR378, Port No.1 is
Connector : CDB-25P Connector : CDB-25S
for the general open station,
Contact : CD-PC-111 Contact : CD-SC-111 and Port No.2 is for serving
Case : HDB-CTH Lock nut : HD-LNA by Mitsubishi service
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric Recommended manufacturer: personnel.
Hirose Electric
2 2
Wire material: DPVVSB 6P × 0.2mm (DPVVSB 12P × 0.2mm )
Recommended manufacturer: BANDO Electric Wire

(Note 1) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it.
Clamp with the connector’s GND plate.
(Note 2) The connector case is connected to the FG. Use a nickel-base chrome-plated part.

I-204
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.7 F040/041 cable

Appendix 2.7 F040/041 cable (Synchronous feed encoder)

Cable type: F040/041 cable Usage: Synchronous feed encoder Appendix 2.7

Connector name : ENC1 (ENC2)

Connector : MS3106B20-29S
Cable clamp: MS3057-12A F040
cable
Recommended manufacturer:
ITT Canon

Connector : MS3106B20-29S
F041
Cable clamp: MS3057-12A
cable
Recommended manufacturer:
ITT Canon

ENC1 (ENC2)
Twist Note:
ENC1A (ENC2A) 1 A The signal names given in
ENC1A*(ENC2A*) 6 N parentheses are equivalent to
ENC1B (ENC2B) 2 C ENC2.
ENC1B*(ENC2B*) 7 R
ENC1Z (ENC2Z) 3 B
ENC1Z*(ENC2Z*) 8 P
　　GND 4 K

　　GND 5 E

　　+5V 9 H

ENC1 (ENC2)
Connector : CDE-9PF
Contact : CD-PC-111
Case : HDE-CTH 2
Wire material: DPVVSB 6P × 0.2mm
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric Recommended manufacturer: BANDO Electric Wire

(Note) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it.
Clamp with the connector’s GND plate.

Appendix 2.8 F050 cable (Control unit interface)

Cable type: F050 cable Usage: Control unit interface Appendix 2.8

Connector name : CF11 Connector name : CF11

CF11 CF11
Connector : DHD-RB50-20AN Connector : DHD-RB50-20AN
Recommended manufacturer: DDK Recommended manufacturer: DDK
Cable name : K/S DHD-RB50-20AN × 2
(Recommended maker: DDK)
Wire material : UL20528-50 × 28AWG (7/0.127)
Recommended manufacturer: Fujikura

I-205
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.9 F070 cable

Appendix 2.9 F070 cable (24VDC input)

Cable type: F070 cable Usage: 24VDC input Reference: For HR377/378 5VDC input Appendix 2.9

Connector name : DC24IN Connector name: DC5IN

Y

DC24IN
+24V 1 +24V
GND 2 GND
FG 3 FG

Wire material : B-18 (19) U × 2SJ-1 × 9

Recommended manufacturer:
Sumitomo Electric Industries Connector : 2-178288-5
Contact : 1-175218-5
Connector : 2-178288-3 Crimp terminal: V1.25-3 Recommended manufacturer: Reference
Contact : 1-175218-5 Recommended manufacturer: Tyco Electronics AMP description
Recommended manufacturer: JST
Tyco Electronics AMP 2
Caution: If the cable is 15m or longer, use 16AWG (1.25mm ).

Appendix 2.10 F120 cable (Emergency stop)

Cable type: F120 cable Usage: Emergency stop Appendix 2.10

Connector name : EMG

EMG
B22-9
FG 1
EMG IN 2 EMG IN
COM 3 COM
Connector : 51030-0330 Crimp terminal: V1.25-3
Contact : 50084-8160 Recommended manufacturer: JST
Recommended manufacturer: MOLEX
Wire material : B-22 (19) U × 2SJ-1 × 9
Recommended manufacturer: Sumitomo Electric Industries

I-206
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.11 F190 cable

Appendix 2.11 F190 cable (RS-232C device)

Cable type: F190 cable Usage: RS-232C device Appendix 2.11

Connection between M6 control unit (CF11) and RS-232C (Maintenance-dedicated cable)

Connector name : CF11 Connector name : Port
A1 B1 No.1

CF190

A2 5 B25 Connector name : Port No.2

F installation plate: Refer to

APPENDIX 1
Pin assignment (F Installation Plate Outline
A1 GND B1 GND Drawing). CH1
A2 I/O RIOD2 B2 I/O RIOD2* CF11 (Port No.1)
RIO3
A3 GND B3 GND SD1(SD3) 18 2
RD1( RD3) 43 3
A4 I HA1A B4 I HA1B
RS1(RS3) 19 4
A5 I HA2A B5 I HA2B CS1(CS3) 44 5
HANDLE A6 I HA3A B6 I HA3B DR1( DR3) 6
45
A7 +12V B7 +12V ER1(ER3) 20 20
CD3 8
A8 GND B8 GND 9
RI3
A9 I KBD0 B9 I KBADCS0 GNG 24 7
A10 I KBD1 B10 I KBADCS1
SD2(SD4) 21 2
A11 I KBD2 B11 I KBADCS2
RD2( RD4) 46 3
A12 I KBD3 B12 I KBADCS3 RS2(RS4) 22 4
SCAN A13 O KBAD0 B13 O BUZ CS2(CS4) 47 5
A14 O KBAD1 B14 O RDY DR2( DR4) 48 6
ER2(ER4) 23 20
A15 O KBAD2 B15 O SP 8
CD4
A16 I KBEMG B16 I KBRES RI4 9
A17 GND B17 GND GND 49 7
A18 O SD1 B18 I RD1 CH2
W ire material (Port No.2)
SERIAL1 A19 O RS1 B19 I CS1
UL20528-50 × 28AGW (7/0.127)
A20 O ER1 B20 I DR1
A21 O SD2 B21 I RD2
SERIAL2 CF11 CH1,CH2
A22 O RS2 B22 I CS2
Connector : DHD-RB50-20A Connector : CDB-25S
A23 O ER2 B23 I DR2
Recommended : DDK Contact : CD-SC-111
A24 GND B24 GND manufacturer Lock nut : HD-LNA
A25 +5V B25 +5V Recommended : Hirose Electric
manufacturer

Port No.1 CH2

Cable name (For (General Note:
servicing) open station)
The circle indicates the
F190 cable port number used.
F191 cable
F192 cable

Precautions for manufacturing

(1) The wire material is equivalent to the UL20528 Standards AWG28 (0.08mm2)
cable.
(2) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be
used providing they are compatible with the specifications.
(3) Attach the nameplate (with protective cover stamped with the cable name) in the
position designated in the assembly drawing.
(4) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it.
Connect the wrapped copper foil tape to the connector's GND plate.

I-207
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.12 F240 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Appendix 2.12 F240 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (External battery unit)

Application: Connection between external battery unit FCU6-BT4D1 and NC control unit
List of parts used
* Refer to section 13. Connection of External Battery No. Part name/type Manufacturer Qty.
Unit for details on the external battery unit Connector
1 MOLEX 1
54180-0611
Case A
2 MOLEX 1
54181-0615
Case B
3 MOLEX 1
54182-0605
Connector retainer A
4 MOLEX 1
58300-0600
Connector retainer B
5 MOLEX 1
58299-0600
Connector retainer
6 MOLEX 1
58303-0000
Fixing screw
7 1
M2 screw
Cable Product
8 2 (1)
DPVVSB 3P × 0.2mm equivalent to left
Connector Japan Aviation
9 1
IL-2S-S3L-(N) Electronics
Contact Japan Aviation
10 2
IL-C2-1-10000 Electronics
Assembly drawing

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10

F240

Insulation bushing

F240

Connection diagram
External battery unit side Control unit side
(CF05) (BAT)

GN D 1 1 GN D
BAT(+) 3 2 BAT(+)
2
4
5
6

Case GND plate

U

Manufacturing precautions
2
(1) The wire material shall be a shielded, 3-pair stranded cable equivalent to DPVVSB3P × 0.2SQ (0.2mm ).
(2) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing they are compatible with the
specifications.
(3) Attach the nameplate (with protective cover stamped with the cable name) in the position designated in the assembly drawing.
(4) On the external battery unit side, fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Connect the
copper foil tape wrapped around the sheath to the GND plate of the connector case.
(5) Protect the control unit side of the wire with insulation bushing.

I-208
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.13 FCUA-R031 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Appendix 2.13 FCUA-R031 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (Analog signal input

/output)
Application: Analog signal input/output Option (compatible connector set)
FCUA-CS000
(Note that only the control unit side connector is
compatible.)
List of parts used
Assembly drawing No. Part name/model Manufacturer Q’ty
Connector
1 3M 1
10120-3000VE
Control unit side 1 2
Analog input/output signal Connector case
2 3M 1
3 10320-52F0-008
Wire material Product
3 UL1061-2464 equivalent to (1)
AWG22 × 6P left
R031
Crimp terminal
4 JST 12
V1.25-4

4
R031

Connection diagram
Max. cable length: 30m

Control unit side Analog input/output signal

2 AI 0
1 GN D
12 AI 1
11 GN D
3 AI 2
5 GN D
13 AI 3
15 GN D
7 AO
GN D

U
Case frame

Manufacturing precautions
(1) The wire material shall be a shielded, 6-pair stranded cable equivalent to UL1061-2464 Standard
AWG22 (0.3mm2).
(2) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing
they are compatible with the specifications.
(3) Attach the nameplate (with protective cover stamped with the cable name) in the position
designated in the assembly drawing.
(4) On the control unit side, fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape
over it. Connect the copper foil tape wrapped around the sheath to a connector case GND plate.
(5) Stamp the name of each signal on the crimp terminal side mark tube and install.
(6) Insulate the crimp terminals of unused signal wires with vinyl tape, etc.
(7) Part 1 (connector) is usually used for wire material of AWG 24 (0.2mm2) or less in the catalog
specifications, but AWG 22 (0.3mm2) can also be used.

I-209
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.14 FCUA-R211 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Appendix 2.14 FCUA-R211 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (Communication

terminal communication)
Application: Connection between control unit and remote I/O unit
Connection between remote I/O unit and remote I/O unit
Connection between remote I/O unit and communication terminal

Option (corresponding connector set)

FCUA-CN211 (Note that when a one-end connector and contact are used,
there is no crimp terminal) List of parts used
No. Part name/type Manufacturer Q’ty
Assembly drawing Connector Tyco Electronics
1 2
1-178288-3 AMP
Contact Tyco Electronics
2 6
1-175218-2 AMP
1 2 1 2
Wire material
MIX3CHRV-SV-SB
3 Twisted pair cable
Product
3 with compound (1)
equivalent to left
3-core shield.
(TOA Electric
R211 Industrial)
Crimp terminal
4 JST 1
V1.25-3
Crimp terminal
5 JST 1
V1.25-5

R211

5 4

Max. cable length: 50m

Connection diagram

Manufacturing precautions

(1) The wire material shall be a shielded, 3-core twisted pair cable equivalent to AWG20 (0.5mm2).
(2) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing
they are compatible with the specifications.
(3) Attach the nameplate (with protective cover stamped with the cable name) in the position designated
in the assembly drawing.
(4) Install each crimp terminal side after stamping the name of each signal on the mark tube.
(5) Protect both ends of the wire material with insulation bushing.
(6) Use AWG18 (0.75mm2) or equivalent for the shield treatment wire material.
(7) Ground the crimp terminal connected to the shield to the control unit or communication terminal
frame ground.
Note that to improve the noise resistance, there may be cases when only one end is connected, both
ends are connected, or neither end is connected.

I-210
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.15 FCUA-R220 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Appendix 2.15 FCUA-R220 Cable Manufacturing Drawing (24VDC input)

Application: Supply of 24VDC to remote I/O unit Option (compatible connector set)
and communication terminal. FCUA-CN220
(Note that this corresponds only to the connector
on the control unit side.)

Assembly drawing

List of parts used

Part name/
No. Manufacturer Q’ty
model
Connector Tyco Electronics
1 1
2-178288-3 AMP
Contact Tyco Electronics
2 3
1-175218-5 AMP
Wire material
BANDO Electric
3 JPVV-SB (1)
2 Wire
1P × 0.75mm
Crimp terminal
4 JST 3
V1.25-3

Connection diagram Max. cable length: 30m

WHITE FG
FG 3
GND 2 GND
+24V 1 +24V
BROWN

Manufacturing precautions
(1) The wire material shall be a shielded, 1-pair stranded cable equivalent to AWG18 (0.75mm2). If the
cable is 15m or longer, select AWG16 (1.25mm2) wire material or equivalent.
(2) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing
they are compatible with the specifications.
(3) Attach the nameplate (with protective cover stamped with the cable name) in the position designated
in the assembly drawing.
(4) Install each crimp terminal side after stamping the name of each signal on the mark tube.
(5) Protect both ends of the wire material with insulation bushing.
(6) Use AWG18 (0.75mm2) or equivalent for the shield treatment wire material.

I-211
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.16 FCUA-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Appendix 2.16 FCUA-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing [External PLC link II

(MELSEC bus connection) A1S type]
Application: Connection between extension Option (compatible connector set)
unit and MELSEC FCUA-CS500
(connector A1S type)
Connection between extension
unit and extension unit

Assembly drawing

Extension unit side MELSEC side

1 2
1 2
3

R500

List of parts used

R 500 No. Part name/model Manufacturer Q’ty
Connector
1 3M 2
10150-6000EL
Connector case
2 3M 2
10350-3210-000
Wire material
Product
3 UL20276 (1)
equivalent to left
AWG28 × 30P

Connection diagram : Refer to the next page.

Manufacturing precautions
(1) The wire material shall be a shielded, 30-pair stranded cable equivalent to UL20276 Standard
AWG28 (0.08mm2).
(2) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing
they are compatible with the specifications.
(3) Attach the nameplate (with protective cover stamped with the cable name) in the position
designated in the assembly drawing.
(4) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Then clamp with
the connector case frame.
(5) Part 1 (connector) and part 2 (connector case) are solderless types. If soldering types are
required, use parts 10150-3000VE for the connector and 10350-52F0-008 for the connector case
(both parts manufactured by 3M).

I-212
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.16 FCUA-R500 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Connection diagram

I-213
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.17 FCUA-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Appendix 2.17 FCUA-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing [External PLC link II

(MELSEC bus connection) A3N type]
Application: Connection between extension Option (compatible connector set)
unit and MELSEC FCUA-CS501
(connector A3N type)

Assembly drawing

MELSEC side
Extension unit side
3 4 5
1 2
6

R501

List of parts used

R501 No. Part name/model Manufacturer Q’ty
Connector
1 3M 1
10150-6000EL
Connector case
2 3M 1
10350-3210-000
Connector
3 Hirose Electric 1
PC-1645
Connector case
4 Hirose Electric 1
P-1645A-CA (20)
Contact
5 Hirose Electric 45
PC-1600-211
Wire material
Product
6 UL20276 (1)
equivalent to left
AWG28 × 30P

Connection diagram : Refer to the next page.

Manufacturing precautions
(1) The wire material shall be a shielded, 30-pair stranded cable equivalent to UL20276 Standard
AWG28 (0.08mm2).
(2) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing
they are compatible with the specifications.
(3) Attach the nameplate (with protective cover stamped with the cable name) in the position
designated in the assembly drawing.
(4) Fold the wire material shield over the sheath, and wrap copper foil tape over it. Then clamp with
the connector case frame.
(5) Part 1 (connector) and part 2 (connector case) are solderless types. If soldering types are
required, use parts 10150-3000VE for the connector and 10350-52F0-008 for the connector case
(both parts manufactured by 3M).

I-214
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.17 FCUA-R501 Cable Manufacturing Drawing

Connection diagram

I-215
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.18 ENC-SP1 cable

Appendix 2.18 ENC-SP1 cable (Spindle drive unit)

Cable type: ENC-SP1 cable Usage: Spindle drive unit Appendix 2.18

Connector name : ENC1 (ENC2) Connector name : CN8

Spindle drive side

ENC1 (ENC2) CN8

ENC1A (ENC2A) 1
Twist
2
ENC1A*(ENC2A*) 6 12
ENC1B (ENC2B) 2 3
ENC1B*(ENC2B*) 7 13
ENC1Z (ENC2Z) 3 4
ENC1Z*(ENC2Z*) 8 14
　　GND 4 1
　　GND 5 5
　　+5V 9

ENC1 (ENC2) CN8

Connector : CDE-9PF FG Connector : 10120-6000EL
Contact : CD-PC-111 Contact : 10320-3210-000
Case : HDE-CTH Case : HDA-CTF
Recommended manufacturer: Hirose Electric Recommended manufacturer: 3M
2
Wire material : DPVVSB 6P × 0.2mm
Recommended manufacturer: BANDO Electric Wire

(Note) Do not connect the power supply (+5V).

Appendix 2.19 ENC-SP2 cable (FR-TK)

Cable type: ENC-SP2 cable Usage: FR-TK Appendix 2.19

Connector name : ENC1 (ENC2) Connector name : CONBA

FR-TK side

ENC1 (ENC2) CONBA

ENC1A (ENC2A) 1
Twist
2
ENC1A*(ENC2A*) 6 12
ENC1B (ENC2B) 2 3
ENC1B*(ENC2B*) 7 13
ENC1Z (ENC2Z) 3 4
ENC1Z*(ENC2Z*) 8 14
　　GND 4 1
　　GND 5 5
　　+5V 9
ENC1 (ENC2) CONBA
Connector : CDE-9PF Connector : MRP-20F01
Contact : CD-PC-111 Contact : MRP-F102
Case : HDE-CTH FG Case : MR20L
Recommended manufacturer: Recommended manufacturer:
Hirose Electric 2 HONDA TSUSHIN KOGYO
Wire material : DPVVSB 6P × 0.2mm
Recommended manufacturer: BANDO Electric Wire

(Note) Do not connect the power supply (+5V).

I-216
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.20 M-TM Terminator

Appendix 2.20 M-TM Terminator

Application: Control unit – Final control unit terminator when multiple units are connected

Assembly drawing
List of parts used
1 2 3 No. Part name/model Manufacturer Q’ty
Connector
1 3M 1
10120-3000VE
Connector case
2 3M 1
10320-52F0-008
Resistor Product
3 1
150Ω 1/4W equivalent to left

M-TM

Connection diagram

150Ω

12

Manufacturing precautions
(1) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing
they are compatible with the specifications.
(2) Part 1 (connector) is usually used for wire material of AWG24 (0.2mm2) or less in the catalog
specifications, but AWG22 (0.3mm2) can also be used.

I-217
 APPENDIX 2 CABLE DRAWINGS
Appendix 2.21 R-TM Terminator

Appendix 2.21 R-TM Terminator

Application: Remote I/O unit (MC link B communication) terminator

Assembly drawing
List of parts used
101 102 No. Part name/model Manufacturer Q’ty
Connector Tyco
101 1-178288-3 Electronics 1
(X type) AMP
103 Tyco
Connector case
102 Electronics 2
AMP
3

1-175216-2
AMP
2

Resistor
D- 3

103 KOA 1
1

100Ω 1/4W
Ｒ－ Ｔ Ｍ

Rear side of
connector

Connection diagram

103
R-TM

LG 3

TXRX* 2
100Ω
TXRX
1

Manufacturing precautions
(1) The parts used shall be Mitsubishi recommended parts. Equivalent parts may be used providing
they are compatible with the specifications.
(2) Cover the 100Ω terminator with a black insulation tube.
(3) Stamp the connector name "R-TM" in white on the rear of the connector.

I-218
 Connector
Application Package contents
type

Connector (3M) Connector case (3M)

10120-3000VE × 2 pcs. 10230-52F0-008 × 2 pcs.
Control unit - CT100
Control unit - SVJ 3M 3M
CS000
SVJ - SVJ
SVJ - SPJ

Connector (3M) Strain relief (3M)

7940-6500SC × 4 pcs. 3448-7940 × 2 pcs.
Remote I/O unit - terminal
CS301
block

Connector Gold contact

(Tyco Electronics AMP) (Tyco Electronics AMP)
1-178288-3 × 1 pc. 1-175218-2 × 3 pcs.
CN211 I/O communication connector

I-219
Connector Tin contact
(Tyco Electronics AMP) (Tyco Electronics AMP)
APPENDIX 3 LIST OF CONNECTOR SETS

2-178288-3 × 1 pc. 1-175218-5 × 3 pcs.

CN220 24VDC power connector
APPENDIX 3 LIST OF CONNECTOR SETS

Connector (3M)
7940-6500SC × 2 pcs.

CN300 DIO connector

 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.1 Introduction

APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

Appendix 4.1 Introduction

EMC Directives became mandatory as of January 1, 1996. The subject products must have a CE mark
attached indicating that the product complies with the Directives.
As the NC unit is a component designed to control machine tools, it is believed that it is not a direct EMC
Directives subject. However, we would like to introduce the following measure plans to back up EMC
Directives compliance of the machine tool as the NC unit is a major component of the machine tools.

(1) Methods of installation in control/operation panel

(2) Methods of wiring cables to outside of panel
(3) Introduction of members for measures

Mitsubishi is carrying out tests to confirm the compliance to the EMC Directives under the environment
described in this manual. However, the level of the noise will differ according to the equipment type and
layout, control panel structure and wiring lead-in, etc. Thus, we ask that the final noise level be
confirmed by the machine manufacturer.

This section corresponds to the following Series.

M60/60S Series

I-220
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.2 EMC Directives

Appendix 4.2 EMC Directives

The EMC Directives largely regulate the following two items.

• Emission ..... Capacity to prevent output of obstructive noise that adversely affects external devices.
• Immunity ..... Capacity to not malfunction due to obstructive noise from external source.

The details of each level are classified in the table below.

It is assumed that the Standards and test details required for a machine tool are the same as these.

Class Name Details EMC Standard

Restriction of electromagnetic noise radiated EN50081-2
Radiated noise
through the air EN61800-3 EN55011
Emission
Restriction of electromagnetic noise (Industrial (CLASS: A)
Conductive noise environment)
discharged from power supply line
Example)
Static electricity Regulation of withstand level of static IEC61000-4-2
electrical discharge electricity electrical discharge accumulated
in human body
Example)
Radiation immunity Simulation of immunity from digital wireless IEC61000-4-3
telephones
Example)
Burst immunity Regulation of withstand level of noise from IEC61000-4-4
relay or plug and play
EN50082-2
Example) EN61800-3
Immunity
Conductive immunity Regulation of withstand level of noise (Industrial IEC61000-4-6
flowed from power supply wires, etc. environment)
Power supply Example)
frequency magnetic Regulation of electromagnetic noise of IEC61000-4-8
field 50/60Hz power supply frequency
Example)
Power supply dip
Regulation of power voltage drop withstand IEC61000-4-11
(fluctuation)
level
Example)
Surge Regulation of withstand level of noise IEC61000-4-5
caused by lightning

I-221
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.3 EMC Measures

Appendix 4.3 EMC Measures

The main items relating to EMC measures include the following.

(1) Store the device in a sealed metal panel.
(2) Ground all conductors that are floating electrically. Decrease the impedance.
(3) Increase the distance between the drive line and signal wire.
(4) Shield the cables wired outside of the panel.
(5) Install a noise filter.

Take care to the following items to suppress the noise radiated outside of the panel.
(1) Accurately ground the devices.
(2) Use shielded cables.
(3) Increase the electrical seal of the panel. Reduce the gaps and holes.

I-222
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure

Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure

The design of the panel is a very important factor for the EMC measures, so take the following measures
into consideration.

Appendix 4.4.1 Measures for Control Panel Body

(1) Use metal for all members configuring the panel.

(2) When joining the metal plate, treat the welded or contacting sections so that the impedance is
reduced, and then fix with screws.

Joining clearance: approx. 20cm

Plating mask

(3) Note that if the plate warps due to the screw fixing, etc., by that creating a clearance, noise could
leak from that place.

(4) Plate (nickel, tin) the metal plate surface at the grounding plate, and connect the connections with a
low impedance.

(5) If there is a large opening, such as ventilation holes, make sure to close the hole.

Control panel

Mesh cover
(conductive sponge)

Opening

(Note) Using screws to fix the plates that have been painted is the same as an insulated state.
Peel the paint and fix the screws.

I-223
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure

Appendix 4.4.2 Measures for Door

(1) Use metal for all members configuring the door.

(2) When joining the door, use a gasket to lower the impedance of the contacting sections, or use a
structure with a large contact area as shown below.

a) Use of gasket b) Large contact area

Control panel

Door Door

Contact area

Control panel Cross-section drawing

EMI gasket

• The EMI gasket or conductive packing must contact the metal surface uniformly and at the
correct position.
• When not using a gasket, ground the control panel grounding with a grounding wire to lower the
door's impedance.

(Note) Using screws to fix the plates that have been painted (attachment of packing) is the
same as an insulated state. Peel the paint and fix the screws.

I-224
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.4 Panel Structure

Appendix 4.4.3 Measures for Power Supply

Shield the power supply section and insert a filter to prevent the noise from flowing in or out.

Device Device

Radiated noise

Flow out
Radiated noise

Conductive Partition AC input

AC input
noise NF plate NF
Conductive
Noise noise Noise
filter filter
U U

• The conductive noise can be suppressed just by inserting a noise filter, but the radiated noise will
flow out.
• The conductive and radiated noise can both be suppressed by adding a partition plate to the
noise filter.

(Note) Selection of the noise filter capacity will differ according to the drive amplifier and devices
being used.
Refer to the "EMC Installation Guidelines" NC Servo Drive Unit Section
[BNP-B8582-45].

I-225
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel

Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel

Cables act as antennas to propagate unnecessary noise, and thus must be appropriately shielded and
treated. The following measures must be sufficiently considered for the cables (SH21/F010/
FCUA-R211) that carry out high-speed communication.

Appendix 4.5.1 Precautions for Wiring in Panel

(1) If the cables are led unnecessary in the panel, they will pick up noise. Thus, keep the wiring length
as short as possible.

Device Device Device Device Device Device

Noise

(2) Always connect the grounding wire to the FG terminal indicated on the device.

(3) Keep the distance between the drive line and detector cable to the drive section motor as far apart
as possible when wiring.

(4) Do not lead the power supply wire around the panel without using a filter.

Device

Noise

Radiation

Partition AC input
plate NF
Noise
Noise
filter
U

I-226
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel

Appendix 4.5.2 NC Unit Grounding Wire

Operation panel
Keyboard unit Display unit
FCUA-KB FCU6-DU

CNZ22
CR01
NC K/B CR03

CNZ24
CR02

BZ CR05
CR06 FG

FG cable FG cable
FG cable

Control
panel
R000 cable

Control unit
R220 cable
FCU6-MU0 (24VDC cable)

FG cable

SH21 cable
(for NC AMP)
F050 cable F010 cable

Base I/O unit

FCU6-DX
S K IP
ENC1
0
0

R220
cable
(+)
24VDC

0V

FG

SV2 SV1
CR31
CF31 CF32
CF33 CF34 CF11 Short bar
RI02 RI01 DCIN
Not used RS 2 32 C
CH 1 ,C H 2
HANDLE
CH1~CH 2

Not used FG

Instal lation hol e ( LG) for car d add-on Not used

Stabilized
AC input
power supply
200VAC input
FG cable
FG cable

FG cable Electric cabinet's

main grounding plate
U

I-227
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel

Appendix 4.5.3 Shield Treatment of Cables

Use shielded cables for the cables wired outside the panel in the M60/60S Series.
Use a shield clamp within 10cm of the lead-out port from the panel.

(1) I/O interface cable [F010 cable]

Shield clamp
Operation panel Control panel

NC unit Base I/O unit

F010 cable
U U

• Always use the shield clamp on both ends of the connected units.

(Note) The shield clamp is not required if the control unit and base I/O unit are wired in the same
panel.

(2) DC power supply cable [F110/F070/FCUA-R220 cable]

Shield clamp
Operation panel Control panel
Operation board unit
NC power supply
Keyboard unit (PD25A)

F110 cable IN

U U
OUT
General-purpose
stabilized power supply

F070 or FCUA-R220 cable IN

U U OUT

Ferrite core

• Use a shield clamp within 10cm from the panel's inlet/outlet.

• Install a ferrite core on both ends of the connected units.

(Note1) Always install a ferrite core on the general-purpose stabilized power supply.
(The ferrite core may not be required depending on the selected power supply.)
(Note2) Install a ferrite core on the input side of the NC power supply (PD25A).

I-228
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.5 Measures for Wiring in Panel

(3) Remote I/O cable [FCUA-R211 cable]

Shield clamp

Control panel Control panel

Base I/O unit Remote I/O unit

FCUA-R211 cable

U U

Ferrite core

• Use a shield clamp within 10cm from the panel's inlet/outlet.

• Install a ferrite core on both ends of the connected units.

(Note) The shield clamp and ferrite core are not required if the control unit and base I/O unit are
wired in the same panel.

(4) Servo communication cable [SH21/FCUA-R000 cable]

Shield clamp
Control panel Control panel

Base I/O unit Drive section unit

SH21 cable
U U

Drive section unit

FCUA-R000 cable

U U

Ferrite core

• Use a shield clamp within 10cm from the panel's inlet/outlet.

• Install a ferrite core on both ends of the connected units.

(Note) The shield clamp and ferrite core are not required if the drive section unit and base I/O
unit are wired in the same panel.

I-229
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures

Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures

Appendix 4.6.1 Shield Clamp Fitting
The ground can be directly connected to the grounding plate as shown below to increase the effect.
Install the grounding plate near the outlet (within 10cm) of each panel, and press against the grounding
plate with the clamp fitting. If the cables are thin, several can be bundled and clamped together.
To provide sufficient frame ground, install the grounding plate directly on the cabinet or connect with a
grounding wire.
If the grounding plate and clamp fitting set AERSBAN-†SET is required, please contact Mitsubishi.

Peel the cable sheath

at the clamp section

Cable

Grounding
plate
Cable

Clamp fitting
(Fitting A, B)

Shield sheath

Clamp section drawing

• Outline drawing

Grounding plate
2-ø5 hole
Installation
hole
Clamp fitting
c
a
b

Max. L

Note 1)
M4 screw

Unit: mm

(Note 1) Screw hole for wiring to cabinet's grounding plate.

(Note 2) The grounding plate thickness is 1.6mm.

a b c Enclosed fitting L
AERSBAN-DSET 100 86 30 Two A clamp fittings A clamp fitting 70
AERSBAN-ESET 70 56 – One B clamp fitting B clamp fitting 45

I-230
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures

Appendix 4.6.2 Ferrite Core

The ferrite core is mounted integrally with the plastic case.

This can be installed with one touch without cutting the interface cable or power supply cable.
This ferrite core is effective against common mode noise, allowing measures against noise without
affecting the quality of the signal.

Recommended ferrite core

TDK ZCAT Series

Shape and dimensions

ZCAT type ZCAT-A type ZCAT-B type

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

ZCAT-C type

Fig. 4

◎ Recommended ferrite core Unit: mm

Applicable cable
Part Name Fig. A B øC øD E Weight (g)
outer diameter
ZCAT1518-0730-M(-BK) *1 1 22±1 18±1 7±1 15±1 – 7max. 6
ZCAT1518-0730(BK) *2 1 22±1 18±1 7±1 15±1 – 7max. 6
ZCAT2017-0930-M(-BK) 1 21±1 17±1 9±1 20±1 – 9max. 11
ZCAT2032-0930-M(-BK) *1 1 36±1 32±1 9±1 19.5±1 – 9max. 22
ZCAT2032-0930(-BK) *2 1 36±1 32±1 9±1 19.5±1 – 9max. 22
ZCAT2132-1130-M (-BK) *1 1 36±1 32±1 11±1 20.5±1 – 11max. 22
ZCAT2132-1130 (-BK) *2 1 36±1 32±1 11±1 20.5±1 – 11max. 22
ZCAT3035-1330-M (-BK) *1 1 39±1 34±1 13±1 30±1 – 13max. 63
ZCAT3035-1330 (-BK) *2 1 39±1 34±1 13±1 30±1 – 13max. 63
ZCAT1325-0530A-M (-BK) *1 2 25±1 20±1 5±1 12.8±1 11.2±1 3~5 (USB) 7
ZCAT1325-0530A (-BK) 2 25±1 20±1 5±1 12.8±1 11.2±1 3~5 (USB) 7
ZCAT1730-0730A-M (-BK) 2 30±1 23±1 7±1 16.5±1 15±1 4~7 (USB/IEE1394) 12
ZCAT2035-0930A-M (-BK) *1 2 35±1 28±1 9±1 19.5±1 17.4±1 6~9 22
ZCAT2035-0930A (-BK) 2 35±1 28±1 9±1 19.5±1 17.4±1 6~9 22
ZCAT2235-1030A-M (-BK) 2 35±1 28±1 10±1 21.5±1 20±1 8~10 27
ZCAT2436-1330A-M (-BK) 2 36±1 29±1 13±1 23.5±1 22±1 10~13 29
ZCAT2017-0930B-M (-BK) 3 21±1 17±1 9±1 20±1 28.5±1 9max. 12
ZCAT2749-0430-M (-BK) 4 49±1 27±1 4.5±1 19.5±1 – 4.5max. 26

*1 The M stamp is attached.

*2 A fixing band is attached at shipment.

z ZCAT-B type: Cabinet fixing type installation hole ø4.8 to 4.9mm, plate thickness 0.5 to 2mm
z ZCAT-C type: Structure that prevents easy opening after case is closed.

I-231
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures

Appendix 4.6.3 Surge Protector

(1) Surge absorber

Make sure that surge does not directly enter the AC line supplying the general-purpose stabilized
power supply (prepared by user) to the control unit, base I/O unit, remote I/O unit and
communication terminal.
The following product or equivalent is recommended for the surge killer.

1) Part name : RAV-781BYZ-2

Manufacturer : Okaya Electric Industries
Surge Surge
Clamp Electro- Working
Circuit voltage Max. tolerable resistance withstand
voltage static temperature
50/60Hz Vrms circuit voltage level voltage
V ± 10% capacity range
8/20µs 1.2/50µs
–20°C to
250V 3ø 300V 783V 2500A 20kV 75pF
+70°C

Outline drawing Circuit drawing

(1) Black (2) Black (3) Black

Unit: mm

* Refer to the manufacturer's catalog for detailed characteristics, outline and connection methods of
the surge absorber.

I-232
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures

2) Part name : RAV-781BXZ-4

Manufacturer : Okaya Electric Industries
Surge Surge
Clamp Electro- Working
Circuit voltage Max. tolerable resistance withstand
voltage static temperature
50/60Hz Vrms circuit voltage level voltage
V ± 10% capacity range
8/20µs 1.2/50µs
–20°C to
250V 3ø 300V 700V 2500A 2kV 75pF
+70°C

Outline drawing Circuit drawing

11±1 Green
(1) Black (2) Black (3) Black U
5.5±1

28.5±1

UL-1015 AWG16
30
0
200±

4.5±0.5
28±1

41±1

Unit: mm
* Refer to the manufacturer's catalog for detailed characteristics, outline and connection methods of
the surge absorber.

I-233
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures

(2) Example of surge absorber installation

Transformer Circuit breaker

NC control
section

Other device
(power supply
for panel, etc.)

Earth Control panel

leakage (relay panel,
From power breaker etc.)
supply for panel Circuit breaker MCC Reactor

200VAC/
230VAC NC drive
input section

Other device
(power supply
for panel, etc.)

Circuit Surge absorber (1)

Protector

Surge absorber (2)

Grounding
U Grounding plate

Surge absorber installation method

Precautions
(1) Thick wires enhance the lightning surge absorption effect, so use as thick and short a wire as
possible.
Wire material : Wire diameter 2mm2 or more
Wire length : Connection wire length A to surge absorber (1): 2m or less.
Connection wire length B to surge absorber (2): 2m or less.
(2) When carrying out an insulation withstand voltage test by applying an overvoltage (100VAC,
1500VAC) on the power supply line, remove surge absorber (2) as it will activate with the applied
voltage.
(3) A short-circuit fault will occur if a surge exceeding the tolerance is applied on the surge absorber.
Thus, always insert a circuit protector to protect the power supply line.
A current does not flow to surge absorber (1) and (2) during normal use, so the circuit protector
can be shared with other devices.

I-234
 APPENDIX 4 EMC INSTALLATION GUIDELINES
Appendix 4.6 Parts for EMC Measures

Appendix 4.6.4 Selection of Stabilized Power Supply

Consider the following characteristics when selecting the stabilized power supply (prepared by user).
Use a power supply that complies with CE Marking or that follows the Safety Standards given below.

Stabilized power supply selection items

Item Unit Conditions
Voltage fluctuation % ±5max ±5% or less of 24VDC output
Output fluctuation
Ripple noise mV 120max. ±5% or less of 24VDC output
Spike noise mV 500max.
Output current A – Refer to the Connection Manual.
Output holding time ms 20min. Instantaneous OFF time

Standards
Safety Standards : UL1950, CSA C22.2 No. 234 approved, IEC950 compliant
Noise Terminal Voltage : FCC Class A, VCCI-1 Class
Higher Harmonics Current Restrictions : IEC1000-3-2

I-235
 APPENDIX 5 PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE TO UL/C-UL STANDARDS

APPENDIX 5 PRECAUTIONS FOR COMPLIANCE TO UL/c-UL

STANDARDS
Observe the following matters to comply with UL/c-UL Standards.

(1) Selection of external 24VDC power supply unit

The M60/60S Series numerical control unit complies with the UL Standards on the condition that the
external power supply unit supplying 24VDC to each unit is a UL-approved part.
Use a UL-approved part for the power supply unit supplying 24VDC to each unit.

(2) Unit ambient temperature

The M60/60S Series numerical control unit complies with the UL Standards on the condition that the
unit is used at a temperature less than the maximum ambient temperature given in "3.1 General
Specification".
Make sure that the maximum ambient temperature of each unit does not exceed the temperature
given in "3.1 General Specification".

I-236
 APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES
Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing

APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM

BATTERIES
Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing
The United Nations Dangerous Goods Regulations "Article 12" became effective from 2003. When
transporting lithium batteries with means subject to the UN Regulations, such as by air transport,
measures corresponding to the Regulations must be taken. The UN Regulations classify the batteries as
dangerous goods (Class 9) or not dangerous goods according to the lithium content.
To ensure safety during transportation, lithium batteries (battery unit) directly exported from Mitsubishi
are packaged in a dedicated container (UN package) for which safety has been confirmed. When the
customer is transporting these products with means subject to the UN Regulations, such as air transport,
the shipper must follow the details explained in the section "6.1.2 Handling by User".

Appendix 6.1.1 Target Products

The following Mitsubishi NC products use lithium batteries. The UN Regulations classify the batteries as
dangerous goods (Class 9) or not dangerous goods according to the lithium content. (Refer to the
battery unit's rating nameplate or section "4-1-2 Battery option" for details on the lithium content.) If the
batteries subjected to hazardous materials are incorporated in a device and shipped, a dedicated
packaging (UN packaging) is not required. However, the item must be packed and shipped following the
Packing Instruction 912 specified in the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book.
Also, all lithium battery products incorporated in a machinery or device must be fixed securely in
accordance with the Packing Instruction 900 and shipped with protection in a way as to prevent damage
or short-circuits.

(1) Products requiring dedicated packaging (Materials falling under Class 9)

Lithium metal Battery
Mitsubishi type Battery type Battery class
content manufacturer
MDS-A-BT-4 ER6-B4-11 2.6g
MDS-A-BT-6 ER6-B6-11 3.9g
MDS-A-BT-8 ER6-B8-11 5.2g Toshiba Battery Battery
Combination of
FCU6-BT4-D1 2.6g+0.65g
ER6-B4D-11 and ER6
(built-in battery) CR23500SE-CJ5 1.52g Sanyo Battery Battery cell

(2) Products not requiring dedicated packaging (Materials not falling under Class 9)
Lithium metal Battery
Mitsubishi type Battery type Battery class
content manufacturer
MDS-A-BT-2 ER6-B2-12 1.3g
Battery
FCU6-BTBOX 2CR5 1.96g
(built-in battery) CR2032 0.067g
Toshiba Battery
(built-in battery) CR2450 0.173g
(built-in battery) ER6, ER6V 0.7g Battery cell
MR-BAT MR-BAT 0.48g
Mitsubishi Electric
Q6BAT Q6BAT 0.49g
Battery
(Note 1) Dedicated packaging is required if the shipment exceeds 12 batteries/24 battery cells.
Package the batteries so that this limit is not exceeded.
(Note 2) The battery units labeled as "FCUA-" instead of "MDS-A-" also use the same battery.
(Note 3) Always use the cell battery (MR-BAT) in combination with the dedicated case
(MDS-BTCASE). Maximum 8 (either 2, 4, 6 or 8) cell batteries can be installed to the dedicated
case (MDS-BTCASE).

I-237
 APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES
Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing

(Example) Rating nameplate for battery units

Mitsubishi type

Safety class

Battery manufacturer type

Lithium metal content

Appendix 6.1.2 Handling by User

The following technical opinion is solely Mitsubishi's opinion. The shipper must confirm the latest IATA
Dangerous Goods Regulations, IMDG Codes and laws and orders of the corresponding export country.
These should be checked by the company commissioned for the actual transportation.

IATA : International Air Transport Association

IMDG Code : A uniform international code for the transport of dangerous goods by seas
determined by IMO (International Maritime Organization).

When shipping isolated lithium battery products (Packing Instruction 903)

(1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging

The isolated battery's safety test and packaging specifications comply with the UN Regulations
(Packing Instruction 903). Thus, the user only needs to add the following details before shipping.
(Consult with the shipping company for details.)

(a) Indication of container usage mark on exterior box (Label with following details recorded.)
• Proper shipping name (Lithium batteries)
• UN NO. (UN3090 for isolated battery, UN3091 for battery incorporated in a device or included)
• Shipper and consignee's address and name

Example of completing form

Shipper information Consignee information

(b) Preparation of shipping documents (Declaration of dangerous goods)

I-238
 APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES
Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing

(2) When packaged by user

The user must follow UN Regulations when packing, preparing for shipping and preparing the
indications, etc.

(a) Packing a lithium battery falling under Class 9

• Consult with The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan for details on packaging.
• Prepare for shipping as explained in "(1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging".

The Ship Equipment Inspection Society of Japan

Headquarters Telephone: 03-3261-6611 Fax: 03-3261-6979

(b) Packing a lithium battery not falling under Class 9

• Cells and batteries are separated so as to prevent short circuits and are stored in a strong
outer packaging. (12 or less batteries, 24 or less cells.)
• Certificates or test results showing compliance to battery safety test.
The safety test results have been obtained from the battery manufacturer. (Consult with
Mitsubishi when the safety test results are required.)
• Prepare for shipping as explained in "(1) Reshipping in Mitsubishi UN packaging".

When shipping lithium batteries upon incorporating in a machinery/device

(Packing Instruction 900)

Pack and prepare for shipping the item in accordance with the Packing Instruction 900 specified in the
IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book. (Securely fix the batteries that comply with the UN
Manual of Tests and Criteria to a machinery or device, and protect in a way as to prevent damage or
short-circuit.)
Note that all the lithium batteries provided by Mitsubishi have cleared the UN recommended safety test;
fixing the battery units or cable wirings securely to the machinery or device will be the user’s
responsibility.
Check with your shipping company for details on packing and transportation.

When shipping a device with lithium batteries incorporated (Packing Instruction 912)

A device incorporating lithium batteries does not require a dedicated packaging (UN packaging).
However, the item must be packed, prepared for shipping and labeled following the Packing Instruction
912 specified in the IATA DGR (Dangerous Goods Regulation) book.
Check with your shipping company for details on packing and transportation.

The outline of the Packing Instruction 912 is as follows:

• All the items in the packing instructions for shipping the isolated lithium battery products (Packing
Instruction 903) must be satisfied, except for the items related to container, short-circuit, and
fixation.
• A device incorporating lithium batteries has to be stored in a strong water-proofed outer packaging.
• To prevent an accidental movement during shipment, securely store the item in an outer
packaging.
• Lithium content per device should be not more than 12g for cell and 500g for battery.
• Lithium battery mass per device should be not more than 5kg.

I-239
 APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES
Appendix 6.1 Restriction for Packing

Appendix 6.1.3 Reference

Refer to the following materials for details on the regulations and responses.

Guidelines regarding transportation of lithium batteries and lithium ion batteries (Edition 2)
.......................................................... Battery Association of Japan

I-240
 APPENDIX 6 TRASPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES
Appendix 6.2 Issuing Domestic Law of the United States for Primary Lithium Battery Transportation

Appendix 6.2 Issuing Domestic Law of the United States for Primary Lithium
Battery Transportation
Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) and Research and Special Programs Administration (RSPA)
announced an additional regulation (interim final rule) for the primary lithium batteries transportation
restrictions item in "Federal Register" on Dec.15, 2004. This regulation became effective from Dec.29,
2004.
This law is a domestic law of the United States, however it also applies to the domestic flight and
international flight departing from or arriving in the United States. Therefore, when transporting lithium
batteries to the United State, or within the United State, the shipper must take measures required to
transport the lithium battery. Refer to the Federal Register and the Code of Federal Regulation ("6.2.4
Reference") for details.

Appendix 6.2.1 Outline of Regulation

(1) Transporting primary lithium battery by passenger aircraft is forbidden.
• Excluding primary lithium battery for personal use in a carry-on or checked luggage
(Lithium metal content should be not more than 5g for cell and 25g for battery. For details on the
lithium metal content, refer to the table in the section "6.1.1 Target Products".)
(2) When transporting primary lithium battery by cargo aircraft, indicate that transportation by passenger
aircraft is forbidden on the exterior box.

Appendix 6.2.2 Target Products

All NC products for which the lithium batteries are used are subject to the regulation.
(Refer to the table in the section "6.1.1 Target Products".)

Appendix 6.2.3 Handling by User

What is described in the section "6.2.1 Outline of Regulation" is solely Mitsubishi's opinion. The shipper
must confirm orders indicated in the section "6.2.4 Reference" for transportation method corresponding
the regulation. Actually, these should be checked by the company commissioned for the actual lithium
buttery transportation.
(1) Indication of exterior box
When transporting primary lithium battery by cargo aircraft, indicate that transportation by
passenger aircraft is forbidden on the exterior box.

Display example
PRIMARY LITHIUM BATTERIES
FORBIDDEN FOR TRANSPORT ABOARD PASSENGER AIRCRAFT.

• The character color must be displayed with contrast. (black characters against white background,
black characters against yellow background, etc.)
• The height (size) of characters to be displayed is prescribed depending on the packaging weight.
When the total weight is over 30kg : at least 12mm
When the total weight is less than 30kg : at least 6mm

Appendix 6.2.4 Reference

(1) Federal Register (Docket No. RSPA-2004-19884 (HM-224E) ) PDF format
http://www.regulations.gov/fredpdfs/05-11765.pdf
(2) 49CFR (Code of Federal Regulation, Title49) (173.185 Lithium batteries and cells.)
http://www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr/waisidx_00/49cfr173_00.html
(3) DOT regulation body (Department of Transportation)
http://hazmat.dot.gov/regs/rules/final/69fr/docs/69fr-75207.pdf

I-241
 APPENDIX 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE DEVICES

APPENDIX 7 PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES

AND COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE DEVICES
Peripheral
Precautions
device
CF card Commercially available CF cards may not be compatible with MITSUBISHI units or
suitable for FA environment for temperature- or noise-wise. In the case of using it,
careful performance check must be required by the machine tool builder.
When inserting/removing a commercially available CF card, preferably, turn the
MITSUBISHI device's power OFF to avoid any troubles. When inserting/removing a
card while the power is ON, make sure to have sufficient time (approx. ten seconds or
more) in between.
Do not pull out the card or turn OFF the power during access to the CF card. Failure to
observe this could cause the memory contents to be erased. In case of emergency,
always perform backups by having your important data duplicated, etc. as
MITSUBISHI will not guarantee the broken or lost data. Be sure to inform this matter
to the end users.
Recommended products are the SanDisk products listed below:
64MB SDCFB-64-J60 (JAN: 4523052000294)
128MB SDCFB-128-J60 (JAN: 4523052000300)
256MB SDCFB-256-J60 (JAN: 4523052000317)
512MB SDCFB-512-J60 (JAN: 4523052000324)
1.0GB SDCFB-1024-J60 (JAN: 4523052000331)
PCCARD adapter SDAD-38-J60 (JAN: 4523052000645)
The performance of the above recommended products were checked under given
conditions. The same performance may not be attained at the end-user side because
of the difference in system environment. Also, no absolute performance guarantee
can be provided even for the same type name as its constituent parts may differ.
Some products may have been discontinued. Contact the respective manufacturer or
distributor for inquiries about orders.
PCMCIA Same as above
card

I-242
II. MAINTENANCE MANUAL
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.1 HR071 Card

1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS

1.1 HR071 Card
[Block diagram]

ER6

CF0 5 BAT

Cable enclosed with battery

[Explanation of functions]
The HR071 card is used in the external battery unit for holding the contents of the control section
memory. The BAT connector on the power supply card (HR081/082/083) in the control unit and the
CF05 connector on the HR071 card are connected with an F240 cable. The battery mounted at
shipment on the power supply card in the control unit is used to hold the memory contents, such as
the parameters, until machine assembly. It is not used after the external battery unit is assembled
into the machine.

[Connector layout diagram]

Battery holder

CF05

ER6
BAT

II-1
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.2 HR081/082/083 Card

1.2 HR081/082/083 Card

[Block diagram]
DCIN AVR
+5V
External
power supply Fuse
24VDC/3A DC/DC +3.3V

+12V

Voltage
detection circuit

EMG
<
>

Emergency
stop switch Control signal

CF01
+5VB
ACFAIL Control circuit
(Not used in the
M60/60S Series) CHECK
Voltage check
for testing
External reset input

BAT
Backup battery
ER6
3.6V/2000mA
When using the external battery
unit, disconnect the connector.
CF02
LCD backlight power supply
(Not used in the M60/60S
Series)

[Explanation of functions]
The HR081/082/083 card is the multi-power supply for the control unit, and has the following
specifications.
Function Specification Supplement
Input voltage/current 24VDC±5% : 3A DCIN connector
Output voltage/current 3.3VDC/5VDC/12VDC
Emergency stop input Emergency stop at 18V or less EMG connector
CF01 connector
Input control signal ACFAIL signal
(Not used in the M60/60S Series)
Backlight ON/OFF, backlight power supply, CF02 connector
Output control signal
brightness (Not used in the M60/60S Series)
Backup battery Lithium battery 3.6VDC: 2000mAh BAT connector, primary battery

II-2
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.2 HR081/082/083 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

This connector is not used.
FAN
Normally, the battery on
the HR081/082/083 card is
connected. W hen using
BAT the external battery,
connect the F240 cable.

DC output OUT

AVR
Battery
Control signal IN/OUT

CHECK
5 5: GND
4 4: External reset input
3 3: 3.3V
2 2: 12V
1
1: 5V

PB1 PSRST

LED
DCIN

DCO UT
DCIN PSEMG
CF02 EMG CF01
BATALM

12VDC output for LCD backlight 24VDC input

(Not used in the M64/65/66 Series)
EMG input ACFAIL input
(Not used in the M60/60S Series)

PSRST: System reset (do not press during normal system operation)

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color Correspondence for error
When normal During error
DCIN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
Internal output voltage Replace power supply or
DCOUT Green Lit Not lit
check control unit
External emergency Check cause of emergency
PSEMG Red Not lit Lit
stop status display stop
Battery voltage drop
BATALM Red Not lit Lit Replace battery
(alarm)

II-3
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card

1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card

[Block diagram]

Memory cassette Memory cassette

(For function
expansion) (For maintenance)

CPU peripheral control

PLC operation

FROM SRAM

External I/O interface

To I/O card ENC #2 To expansion

I/O card

[Explanation of functions]
The HR113/114/116/146 card is the main CPU card, and has the following specifications.
The HR146 is a CPU card subject to the Export Trade Control Ordinance and Foreign Trade
Ordinance.
Function Specification Supplement
CPU 64-bit RISC chip
ASIC CPU peripheral control & PLC
operation
External I/O interface
Memory DRAM For system working
FROM For system ROM & BootROM
SRAM For processing program and parameter
backup
Memory cassette I/F CBUS #1 connector For memory cassette (for function
expansion)
CBUS #2 connector For memory cassette (for maintenance)
Expansion bus RTBUS RT1, RT2
Expansion I/O interface Base I/O interface CF10 connector
Expansion I/O interface CF11 connector
Power supply HR081/082/083 Connect to AVR connector

II-4
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.3 HR111/113/114/146 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

AVR CBUS1 CBUS2

DC f an (f or 5V)

RT#2 RT#1 RT#0

TEST1
TEST2
ENC2
CF10

NCLD1 NCSYS
0 NCRST CF11
WDER ISP

TEST 1 & 2 : Test pins for maintenance and service

NCRST : NC reset (do not press during normal system operation)

[Explanation of settings]
NCSYS: System mode selection rotary switch
Switch Mode Details
0 Standard mode Operation of system 1
1 PLC stop The system is started while the PLC is stopped.
2
3
4
Maintenance mode
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
Maintenance mode *
C
D
E
F
* The memory cassette must be connected to the CBUS #1/#2 connector.

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
System status display
NCLD1 – – – Contact the Mitsubishi Service
(7-segment software status)
Center
WDER System error display Red Not lit Lit

II-5
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.4 HR171 Card

1.4 HR171 Card

[Block diagram]

RS-422
transceiver
Communication control circuit

RS-422
transceiver

BUS connector

PCIBUS conversion circuit BUS buffer

[Explanation of functions]
The HR171 card has an M64AS, M64S, M65, M65S, M66 or M66S Series operation board interface,
I/O link interface and PCI bus conversion circuit and interface for adding a high-speed program
server function.
The I/O link's master/slave and slave station numbers are set with the rotary switch.
This card is not used with the M64A.

[Connector layout diagram]

II-6
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.4 HR171 Card

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
Indicates the AUX1 transmission Contact the Mitsubishi Service
TX1 Green Flickers ON or OFF
state Center
Indicates the AUX1 reception Check communication cable
RX1 Green Flickers ON or OFF
state connection
Indicates the AUX2 transmission
Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
TX2 state Green Flickers ON or OFF
switch station No.
(Only when using I/O link function)
Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
Indicates the AUX2 reception
switch station No.
RX2 state Green Flickers ON or OFF
Check communication cable
(Only when using I/O link function)
connection

[Explanation of settings]

Rotary switch (NCNO) settings

Setting
Explanation of functions Supplement
position
Master station when multiple control
0 This is the I/O link's master station.
sections are connected.
1 1st station for normal use or when multiple
control sections are connected.
2 2nd station for normal use or when multiple A setting higher than "1" is the I/O link's
control sections are connected. slave station.
: :
F 15th station for normal use or when
multiple control sections are connected.

SW2: I/O link terminator ON/OFF switch

Slide switch (SW2) setting

Setting position Explanation of functions
ON Terminator (150Ω) connected
OFF Terminator not connected

II-7
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.5 HR211 Card

1.5 HR211 Card

[Block diagram]

RS232C
CF11 CH1,CH2

HANDLE
CH1 ~ CH3

[Explanation of functions]
The HR211 card is the I/O expansion card for the RS-232C and manual pulse generator.
Use the card by connecting the control unit CF11 connector to the HR211 card CF11 connector with
an F050 cable.
The card is used as an add-on to the base I/O unit HR325, 327, 335 and 337.

Function Specification Supplement

Two channels: port No. 1 and port RS-232C connector and port No. 1 are for
RS-232-C interface
No. 2 maintenance by service personnel
Manual pulse
Up to three can be mounted HANDLE connector
generator interface

[Connector layout diagram]

HR211

Ø3 CF11

Not used

Not used Installation hole for card add-on

RS232C

HANDLE

Not used Installation hole (FG) for c ard add-on

Installation hole (LG) for card add-on Not used

II-8
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards

1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards

[Block diagram]
Connection with control section

CF10

Servo drive
32-point
CF3 1 DI SV1 unit
machine

Communication
input
Servo drive
SV2 unit
con tr oller Synchronous
ENC feed encoder
32-point
machine CF3 3 DO SKIP I/F:
output 8 points
SK IP Skip signal
Receiver
Dr iver
Remote I/O
RIO1 unit
32-point
machine DI Remote I/O
CF3 2 RIO2
Communication

input unit
AVR
con tr oller

DCIN 24VDC input

5V< 24V
32-point DO
machine CF3 4
output

CR3 1

Add-on card

[Explanation of functions]
The HR325/327/335/337 card is connected in the base I/O unit to the control section CF10 connector
by an F010 cable.
The HR325 and 327 have the sink specifications, and the HR335 and 337 have the source
specifications. The card with "5" as the last digit have a 48-point machine input and 48-point machine
output.
Function Specification Supplement
Remote I/O Set with the rotary switches CS1
Occupies 2 stations
communication and CS2.
Remote I/O
Two interfaces RIOA1 connector, RIO2 connector
communication interface
HR325/335: Insulated type : 48 points
Machine input interface CF31/32 connector
HR327/337: Insulated type : 64 points
HR325/335: Non-insulated type: 48 points
Machine output interface CF33/34 connector, 60mA output
HR327/337: Non-insulated type: 64 points
Skip signal input
Insulated type: 48 points SKIP connector
interface
Servo drive unit SV1, SV2 connector, MC link A
Two interfaces
interface communication
Synchronous feed
One interface ENC1 connector
encoder interface
Maximum current is the value for
Input voltage/current 24VDC ± 5%, 6Amax when all machine input/output
signal points are ON

II-9
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.6 HR325, 327, 335, 337 Cards

[Connector layout diagram]

SKIP
ENC1

SV2 SV1
CR31
CF31CF32
CF33CF34

RI02 RI01 DCIN

24IN
RAL1

5OUT
RAL2

[Explanation of settings]
Rotary switch CS1: Set the CF31/CF33 side devices of the machine input/output (DI/DO)
connected to the remote I/O communication.
Rotary switch CS2: Set the CF32/CF34 side devices of the machine input/output (DI/DO)
connected to the remote I/O communication.

<Setting method>
0 to 7 : Corresponds to station Nos. 0 to 7
(Note) 8 or higher: Cannot be set
∗ The CS1 and CS2 settings must always be different for the HR325, 327, 335 and 337 cards.
Set all the remote I/O units and add-on cards connected in the same system to differing
station Nos. in the range from 0 to 7. Up to 8 stations can be connected in one system.

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
LED 1 24IN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
(two-
color Rotary switch [CS1] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
RIO1 Red Not lit Lit
LED) communication error display rotary switch station No.
LED 2 Contact the Mitsubishi
5OUT Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit
(two- Service Center
color Rotary switch [CS2] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
LED) RIO2 Red Not lit Lit
communication error display rotary switch station No.

II-10
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.7 HR357 Card

1.7 HR357 Card

[Block diagram]

Communication
Remote RIO3 Communi-
Scan circuit
I/O A cation

driver and
DI/DO:32/32
controller

receiver
communi-
cation Scan input/output
B CF35 32 points/32 points

Communi-
Scan circuit
cation
DI/DO:32/32
controller

DI
Digit al input
photo- CF31 32 points
coupler
Communi-
cation
controller
DO I/F
Digital output
output CF33 32 points
driver

DC/DC
24VDC input DCIN
24V > 5V

[Explanation of functions]
The HR357 card is the machine operation board input/output card. It has a digital input/output and
scan input/output, and is connected to the operation board or other device.
HR357 Remarks
No. of input points 64
Scan 5V system
No. of output points 64
No. of input points 32
No. of output points 32
Digital 24V system
Input Sink/source
Output Source

Function Specification Supplement

Remote I/O Set with CSAN1 and CSAN2 rotary
Occupies 3 stations
communication switches and DIO
Remote I/O
One interface RIOA3 connector
communication interface
Scan input/output Input/output configured of common signal ×
5V system, CF35 connector
interface data signal matrix 64 points/64 points.
Machine input interface 32 points CF31 connector, insulated type
Machine output interface 32 points CF33 connector, non-insulated type
Input voltage 24VDC ± 5% DCIN connector

II-11
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.7 HR357 Card

[Connector layout]

25 1 ISP DIO SCAN2SCAN1

0
8 1 0 0
A
(Scan DI/DO:64/64)
B
CF35

ALM3

ALM1
5OUT
ALM2
24IN
RIO3 DCIN

B A

CF31 CF33
A A
(DI:32) B DO:32
B
20 1 20 1

[Explanation of settings]
Rotary switch Explanation
SCAN1 Scan input/output station No. setting 32 pts. /32 pts. (Normally set to 0)
SCAN2 Scan input/output station No. setting 32 pts. /32 pts. (Normally set to 1)
DIO Digital input/output station No. setting 32 pts./32 pts. (Normally set to 2)

∗ SCAN 1, SCAN 2 and DIO must be set to differing station Nos. Up to 8 stations can be connected
in one system. Set in a range from 0 to 7.

[Explanation of LED]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
24IN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
Contact the Mitsubishi Service
5OUT Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit
Center
Rotary switch [SCAN1] setting Check each remote I/O unit's
ALM1 Red Not lit Lit
station communication error display rotary switch station No.
Rotary switch [SCAN2] setting Check each remote I/O unit's
ALM2 Red Not lit Lit
station communication error display rotary switch station No.
Rotary switch [DIO] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
ALM3 Red Not lit Lit
communication error display rotary switch station No.

II-12
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.8 HR377 Card

1.8 HR377 Card

[Block diagram]

Connection with control section

CF11 CF10
32-point
machine DI
SV1 Servo
input
CF31 Communication drive unit
Servo
SV2 drive unit
controller

32-point Synchronous
machine ENC feed encoder
DO
output input
CF33
SKIP: 8 points SKIP Skip signal
input
Driver
Remote I/O
32-point Receiver RIO1A unit
machine DI Remote I/O
input CF32
RIO1B
unit
Communication

Remote I/O
RIO2
controller

unit
32-point
machine DO
output CF34 DC5IN 5VDC input
(Input for 2nd DIO)
RS-232C
24VDC RS232C input/output
input
DC24IN Manual pulse
HANDLE
generator
input

[Explanation of functions]
The HR377 is the base I/O unit, featuring a 200mA/point DO output. This card is used when connected
by an F010 and an F050 cable to the CF10 and CF11 connectors at the control section. The 5VDC
power type and 12VDC power type manual pulse generator can be used.
By connecting with a remote I/O from the RIO1A/B connector using an SH41/R211 cable, two or more
HR377 cards can be connected.
Function Specification Supplement
Remote I/O communication Occupies 2 stations Set with the rotary switches CS1 and CS2.
Remote I/O communication
Two interfaces RIOA/B connector, RIO2 connector
interface
Machine input interface Insulated type: 64 points CF31/32 connector
Machine output interface Non-insulated type: 64 points CF33/34 connector, 200mA output
Skip signal input interface Insulated type: 8 points SKIP connector
Servo drive unit interface Two interfaces SARV01, 2 connector, MC link A communication
Synchronous feed encoder
One interface ENC1 connector
interface
One interface
RS-232-C connector and port No. 1 are for
RS-232-C interface Two channels: port No. 1 and
maintenance by service personnel
port No. 2
Manual pulse generator
Up to three can be mounted HANDLE connector
interface
Maximum current is the value for when all machine
24VDC ± 5%, 13Amax input/output signal points are ON
Input voltage/current
5VDC ± 5%, 1Amax 5VDC is supplied when this card is connected to
the remote I/O communication system.

II-13
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.8 HR377 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

[Explanation of settings]
Rotary switch CS1: Set the CF31/CF32 side devices of the machine input/output (DI/DO)
connected to the remote I/O communication.
Rotary switch CS2: Set the CF33/CF34 side devices of the machine input/output (DI/DO)
connected to the remote I/O communication.

<Setting method>
0 to 7 : Corresponds to remote I/O unit station Nos. 0 to 7
(Note) 8 or higher: Cannot be set
∗ Set all the remote I/O units and add-on cards connected in the same system to differing station Nos.
in the range from 0 to 7. Up to 8 stations can be connected in one system.

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
LED 1 24IN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
(two-
color Rotary switch [CS1] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
RIO1 Red Not lit Lit
LED) communication error display rotary switch station No.
LED 2 Contact the Mitsubishi
5VIN Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit
(two- Service Center
color Rotary switch [CS2] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
LED) RIO2 Red Not lit Lit
communication error display rotary switch station No.

II-14
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.9 HR378 Card

1.9 HR378 Card

[Block diagram]

Connection with control section

CF11 CF10

Servo
SV1
drive unit
Servo
SV2 drive unit
32-point Synchronous
machine ENC feed encoder
input
DI
MJ2 input
Skip signal
Communication

SKIP: 8 points SKIP

input
Driver
controller

RIO1A Remote I/O

32-point Receiver unit
machine Remote I/O
output
DO RIO1B
MJ3 unit

Remote I/O
RIO2 unit
24VDC
input
DC24IN DC5IN 5VDC input
(Input for 2nd DIO)

RS232C RS-232C
input/output

HANDLE Manual pulse

generator
input

[Explanation of functions]
The HR378 is the base I/O unit, featuring a 200mA/point DO output. While the HR377 uses the MELDAS
standard flat cable type DI/DO connector, the HR378 uses a half-pitch type DI/DO connector, allowing
the DO output common to be separated in groups of four points (per point in some sections) and control
to be carried out. This card is used when connected by an F010 and an F050 cable to the CF10 and
CF11 connectors at the control section. The 5VDC power type and 12VDC power type manual pulse
generator can be used.
By connecting with a remote I/O communication from the RIO1A/B connector using an SH41/R211
cable, two or more FCU6-HR378 cards can be connected.
Function Specification Supplement
Remote I/O communication Occupies 2 stations Set with the rotary switches CS1 and CS2.
Remote I/O communication
Two interfaces RIOA/B connector, RIO2 connector
interface
Machine input interface Insulated type: 64 points MJ2 connector
Machine output interface Insulated type: 64 points MJ3 connector
Skip signal input interface Insulated type: 8 points SKIP connector
Servo drive unit interface Two interfaces SV1, SV2 connector, MC link A communication
Synchronous feed encoder
One interface ENC1 connector
interface
One interface
RS-232-C connector and port No. 1 are for
RS-232-C interface Two channels: port No. 1 and
maintenance by service personnel
port No. 2
Manual pulse generator
Up to three can be mounted HANDLE connector
interface
Maximum current is the value for when all machine
24VDC ± 5%, 13Amax input/output signal points are ON
Input voltage/current
5VDC ± 5%, 1Amax 5VDC is supplied when this card is connected to
the remote I/O communication system.

II-15
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.9 HR378 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

[Explanation of settings]
CS1: 0th station setting rotary switch of remote I/O No. 1 system (normally set to 0)
CS2: 1st station setting rotary switch of remote I/O No. 1 system (normally set to 1)

<Setting method>
0 to 7 : Corresponds to remote I/O station Nos. 0 to 7
(Note) 8 or higher: Cannot be set

∗ Set all the remote I/O units connected in the same system to differing station Nos. in the range from
0 to 7. Up to 8 stations can be connected in one system.

II-16
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.9 HR378 Card

[Explanation of LEDs]

Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
LED 1 24IN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
(two-
color Rotary switch [CS1] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
RIO1 Red Not lit Lit
LED) communication error display rotary switch station No.
LED 2 Contact the Mitsubishi
5OUT Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit
(two- Service Center
color Rotary switch [CS2] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's
LED) RIO2 Red Not lit Lit
communication error display rotary switch station No.
L-F1 Y00 to 03 Continuity to fuse F1 Green Lit Not lit Check CO0003 voltage
L-F2 Y04 to 04 Continuity to fuse F2 Green Lit Not lit Check CO0407 voltage
L-F3 Y08 to 0B Continuity to fuse F3 Green Lit Not lit Check CO080B voltage
L-F4 Y0C to 0F Continuity to fuse F4 Green Lit Not lit Check CO0C0F voltage
L-F5 Y10 to 13 Continuity to fuse F5 Green Lit Not lit Check CO1013 voltage
L-F6 Y14 to 17 Continuity to fuse F6 Green Lit Not lit Check CO1417 voltage
L-F7 Y18 to 1B Continuity to fuse F7 Green Lit Not lit Check CO181B voltage
L-F8 Y1C to 1F Continuity to fuse F8 Green Lit Not lit Check CO1C1F voltage
L-F9 Y20 to 23 Continuity to fuse F9 Green Lit Not lit Check CO2023 voltage
L-F10 Y24 to 27 Continuity to fuse F10 Green Lit Not lit Check CO2427 voltage
L-F11 Y28 to 2B Continuity to fuse F11 Green Lit Not lit Check CO282B voltage
L-F12 Y2C to 2F Continuity to fuse F12 Green Lit Not lit Check CO2C2F voltage
L-F13 Y3C to 3F Continuity to fuse F13 Green Lit Not lit Check CO3C3F voltage

II-17
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.10 Memory Cassette HR4

1.10 Memory Cassette HR4

FCU6-HR4**
MEMORY CASETTE
SER.9801001
Ver.*

[Explanation of functions]
The HR4†† memory cassette is a cassette-type memory card used for maintenance and function
expansion, etc.
There are SRAM cassettes and FROM cassettes with separate functions. Order parts separately
from Mitsubishi.

CBUS#1 is used for function expansion, and CBUS#2 is used for maintenance.
HR410 For maintenance
HR411 For maintenance
HR412 For maintenance
HR415 For APLC memory cassette and maintenance
HR437 For APLC/program capacity expansion

II-18
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.11 HR513 Card

1.11 HR513 Card

[Block diagram]

Expansion connector HR513

RT bus #2

DPRAM

CF51A

Commu nication MELSEC ABUS connector

con tr oller to MELSEC main base.

To next MELSEC bus

connection unit
Control

CF51B

[Explanation of functions]
The HR513 card functions as the bus connection interface with the MELSEC mounted as an option
on the RT bus. The NC control unit is recognized as a 32-point special unit mounted in slot 0 on the
top of the MELSEC expansion base section.
(The No. of expansion stages is restricted by the type of MELSEC connected, total cable length, etc.)

II-19
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.11 HR513 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

WDER
ALM
RUN
CS CF51A CF51B

RTBUS

[Explanation of settings]
CS: Rotary switch for unit No. setting

<Setting method>
Rotary switch: CS setting
Setting position Function explanation Supplement
0 Not used
1 to 7 Correspond to units 1 to 7 (Reset signal to the PLC valid)
8 Not used
9 and following Correspond to units 1 to 7 (Reset signal to the PLC invalid)

∗ The settings in which the reset signal to the PLC is invalid are used to prevent the PLC side from
resetting when the M60/60S Series control unit side has not started.

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Correspondence
Name Function Color When
During error for error
normal
WDER System error display Red Not lit Lit
Contact the Mitsubishi
ALM System error display Red Not lit Lit Service Center
RUN Software operation check Green Flickers ON or OFF

II-20
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.12 HR531/534 Cards

1.12 HR531/534 Cards

[Block diagram]

RS-422
transceiver AUX1
Comm unication control circuit

RS-422
Bus connector

transceiver AUX2

10BASE-5
Ethernet control cir cuit Selector

10BASE-T

[Explanation of functions]
The HR53† card has an M60 Series communication terminal interface, I/O link interface and
Ethernet 10BASE-5 and 10BASE-T interface. The I/O link master/slave and slave station Nos. are
set with the rotary switch. The BASE-5/T changeover is set with the slide switch.
This is used only for M64.
The card name for each function is shown below.

Card Function
Ethernet
name AUX1 AUX2
I/O interface
I/O interface
HR531 (Used in the I/O link)
(Used for operation board Not available
A/B/C (Master/slave changeover)
connection)
Terminator ON/OFF switch (C only)
I/O interface I/O interface
HR534
(Used for operation board (Master/slave changeover) 10BASE-5/10BASE-T
A/B/C
connection) Terminator ON/OFF switch (C only)

II-21
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.12 HR531/534 Cards

[Connector layout diagram]

• HR531 card

A and B cards

Connector for PLD writing Connector for I/O interface (2ch)

For I/O link channel No. setting

AUX2
ISP
NCNO

LNK

RX1
RX2
TX2

TX1
Connector for
I/O interface (1ch)

TEST Connector for motherboard

interface

AUX1
RTBUS

Connector for general-purpose

software port (not used)

C card

Connector for test Ter minator ON/OFF

equipment (not used) switch

TEST1 SW2 NCNO

LNK
LNK

RX1
TX1

AUX2
RX2
TX2

ISP

RTBUS AUX1

II-22
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.12 HR531/534 Cards

[Connector layout diagram]

• HR534 card

A and B cards

Connector for
Connector for PLD writing I/O interface (2ch)
Connector for
ETHERNET ( BASE- 5) Connector for For I/O link station No. setting
ETHERNET ( BASE- T)

BASE5 AUX2
ISP
BASET NCNO

TX1
LNK

TRA
RX2
TX2
RX1
REC
SW1

Connector for
I/O interface (1ch)

TEST Connector for motherboard

Base-5/T changeover switch interface
A card Left side : BASET
Right side: BASE5 AUX1
B card Left side : BASE5 RTBUS
Right side: BASET

Connector for general-purpose

software port (not used)

C card

Connector for test

equipment (not used)
Ter minator ON/OFF
switch

AUX2
BASE5
BASET TEST1 SW2 NCNO
LNK
LNK

SW1
RX1
TX1
RX2
TX2

ISP
Base-5/T changeover switch
C card Left side: BASE5
Right side: BASET

RTBUS AUX1

II-23
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.12 HR531/534 Cards

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
Contact the Mitsubishi Service
TX1 AUX1 transmission status display Green Flickers ON or OFF
Center
Check communication cable
RX1 AUX1 reception status display Green Flickers ON or OFF
connection
AUX2 transmission status display Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
TX2 Green Flickers ON or OFF
(Only when using IO link function) switch station No.
Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
AUX2 reception status display switch station No.
RX2 Green Flickers ON or OFF
(Only when using IO link function) Check communication cable
connection
Check Ethernet cable connection
LNK* Ethernet connection status display Green Lit Not lit
Check network settings

[Explanation of settings]

Rotary switch: (NCNO) setting

Setting
Explanation of functions Supplement
position
Master station when multiple control sections
0 This is the I/O link's master station.
are connected. *
1 1st station during normal use/when multiple
control sections are connected. A setting higher than "1" is the I/O link's slave
2 2nd station during normal use/when multiple station.
control sections are connected. Refer to the instruction manual for details on
: : the number of connected units and the usage
methods.
F 15th station during normal use/when multiple
control sections are connected.

* With the A card, 0th station during normal use/when multiple control sections are connected.

Slide switch (SW1) setting

Setting
Explanation of functions Supplement
position
BASE5 ETHERNET 10BASE-5 interface selection
BASET ETHERNET 10BASE-T interface selection

Slide switch (SW2) setting

Setting
Explanation of functions Supplement
position
ON Terminator (150Ω) connection
I/O link terminator
OFF Terminator (150Ω) not connected

II-24
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.13 HR571 Card

1.13 HR571 Card

[Block diagram]

CPU TS1

2-port SRAM
RT-BUS RAM
(32kB)
(8kB)

[Explanation of functions]
This is used in the M-NET interface which is one of interface with the sequencer.
TS1 M-NET (RS-422 multidrop)
(Note) The ISP connector and TEST connector on the HR571 card cannot be used.

[Connector layout diagram]

ISP RUN SD
RD ALM TS1
SW1 SW2

TEST

RTBUS

[Explanation of settings]
Setting Explanation
SW1 (R-TERMINAL) Terminator (Down: Terminator ON)
SW2 Rotary switch (Normal: 0. Refer to the Operation Manual.)

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
ON or
RUN Software operation check Green Flickers Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
OFF
Check communication cable connection
RD Reception status check Green Lit Not lit
Check rotary switch setting No.
SD Transmission status check Green Lit Not lit Check rotary switch setting No.
Communication error
ALM Red Not lit Lit Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
display

II-25
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.14 HR591 Card

1.14 HR591 Card

[Block diagram]

AUX-IN AUX AUX-OUT

[Explanation of functions]
The HR591 card is the relay branch board used when connecting (I/O linking) three or more control
units.
Refer to section I-22 "4.2.7 Connection of I/O Link" in the Connection Manual for details on
connecting.
AUX-IN The cable W from the master station side is connected.
AUX The intermediate station control unit is connected.
AUX-OUT The cable to the final station direction is connected.
(AUX-IN, AUX, and AUX-OUT are connected 1:1, so the wiring in the electric cabinet can be
interchanged without problem if required.)

[Connector layout diagram]

AUX-IN AUX AUX-OUT

II-26
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.15 HR831 Card

1.15 HR831 Card

[Block diagram]

ATA type
IC card control IC card holder
circuit

EXTPCI1
connector

EXTPCI2
connector

[Expansion of functions]
The HR831 card has an IC card interface for the M65/66 Series' high-speed program server function.
This card is combined with the Ethernet I/F HR832 and used by the high-speed program server unit
(FCU6-EP203-1).
The ATA type SanDisk flash ROM type IC card can be used.
The flash ROM capacity is not limited by the hardware, but may be limited by the software. Refer to
the Specifications Manual (BNP-B2210) for details.

[Connector layout diagram]

Mark surface

Bottom view
HR831

[Explanation of settings]
The HR831 card has no sections to be adjusted or set.

II-27
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.16 HR832 Card

1.16 HR832 Card

[Block diagram]

10Base-T
EXTPCI2 100Base-T RJ45
connector Ethernet connector
Control circuit

For Work
SRAM

[Expansion of functions]
The HR832 card has an Ethernet interface for the M60/60S Series high-speed program server
function.
This card is combined with the IC card I/F HR831 and used by the high-speed program server unit
(FCU6-EP203-1).
The 10Base-T and 100Base-TX interfaces can be used with automatic recognitions.

[Connector layout diagram]

EXTPCI2

HR832
FG terminal
FDPOL
LINK
COL

TX
RX
SPEED

････････

II-28
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.16 HR832 Card

[Explanation of settings]
The HR832 card has no sections to be adjusted or set.

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
Ethernet transmission status Check Ethernet cable connection
TX Green Lit Not lit
display Check network settings
Ethernet reception status Check Ethernet cable connection
RX Green Lit Not lit
display Check network settings
Contact the Mitsubishi Service
FDPOL Polarity display Green Not lit Lit
Center
Ethernet connection status Check Ethernet cable connection
LINK Green Lit Not lit
display Check network settings
Check Ethernet cable connection
COL Ethernet collision display Green Not lit Lit
Check network settings
Lit:
Communication speed 100Mbps
SPEED Green – Check connected device
display Not lit:
10Mbps

II-29
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.17 QY231 Card

1.17 QY231 Card

[Block diagram]

DI
photo- Machine input
CMD82 46 points
coupler
driver and receiver
Communication

CSH41 Communi-
cation
Remote A controller
communi-
cation DO Machine output
B output CFD83
48 points
dr iver

DI
Machine input
photo- CMD81 16 points
coupler

Communi-
cation
controller
DO
output
dr iver

DC/DC
24VDC
J4
input
24V > 5V

[Explanation of functions]
The QY231 is the machine operation board input/output card. It has a machine input/output, and is
connected to the base I/O unit RIO1 connector or communication terminal RIO5 connector.
No. of occupied
Compatible machine control signals
stations
Digital input signal (DI) : 64 points (photocoupler insulation) sink/source
shared type 2
Digital output signal (DO) : 48 points (non-insulated) source type

Function Specification Supplement

Remote I/O communication Occupies 2 stations Set two successive stations with rotary switch CS1
Remote I/O communication
One interface CSH41A/B connector
interface
Machine input interface Insulated type: 64 points CMD81/82 connector
Machine output interface Non-insulated type: 48 points CFD83 connector, 60mA output
J4 connector
Input voltage/current 24VDC ± 5%, 3.8Amax Maximum current is the value for when all machine
input/output signal points are ON

II-30
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.17 QY231 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

(SW1)

LED1
CS1

>
>
J4

CSH41B
CSH41A
Not

8
mounted

POWER
ALM
CMD81

CFD83

CMD82
SOURCE
SINK
S1
S2
S3
S4

[Explanation of settings]
1) Rotary switch
CS1 : Remote I/O station No. setting rotary switch
0 to 7 : Corresponds to RIO station Nos. 0 to 7
(Note) 8 or higher: Cannot be set

∗ QY231 automatically sets two successive stations by setting CS1 to an even (0, 2, 4, 6) station.
Set a station No. that is different from the other remote I/O units within the range of 0, 2, 4 and 6.
Up to eight stations can be connected with remote I/O communication.

2) Machine input (DI) sink/source type changeover switch

Select the machine input (DI) sink type or source type with this switch.
S1, S2 S3, S4 Function
ON OFF Source input selection
OFF ON Sink input selection

[LED explanation]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
Check 24VDC voltage
POWER Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit Contact the Mitsubishi Service
Center
Rotary switch [CS2] setting station Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
ALM Red Not lit Lit
communication error display switch station No.

Two-color LED (two-LED set)

II-31
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.18 QY287 Card

1.18 QY287 Card

[Block diagram]

VIDEO → LCD signal output

RGB signal
conversion

Backlight power
Backlight ON/OFF

[Explanation of functions]
The QY287 card is used for the 10.4-type color LCD display. The card converts the video signals
output from the RX212 card into color LCD signals. The QY287 has no sections to be set.

[Connector layout diagram]

TEFG

CBP18

LED1 (12V)
CF02 LED2 (LCD)
LED3 (5V)
･････

LCD Fuse 3.2A

F1 Fuse Communication
3.2A
Daito HM32
Daito Tsushin
Soldered type HM32
CBC14 Soldered
(cannot betype
replaced)
(cannot be replaced)

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
12V Inverter output voltage check Green Lit Not lit
Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
LCD LCD power voltage check Green Lit Not lit
Check 24VDC voltage
5V Internal output voltage check Green Lit Not lit
Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center

II-32
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.19 RX211/RX212 Card

1.19 RX211/RX212 Card

[Block diagram]
24V DC IN
(CR01)
CPU
5V DC OUT
AVR

EPROM CRTC

LCD
VIDEO
(CR04)
NC connection VIDEO
(CR02)
RS422 DPC HD/VD
DCLK
Communication
control circuit

R-IO V-RAM
(CR05) RS422

Communication V-RAM
control circuit
KEY
(CR03)

(CR06)
EXT-BUS

[Explanation of functions]
The RX211 card is the control card for the 9-type monochrome CRT display used by the M60/60S
Series. This is used by the FCUA-CT100/CT120.
The RX212 card is the control card for the 10.4-type color LCD display used by the M60/60S Series.
This is used by the FCU6-DUN33.
The hardware of the RX211 and RX212 cards is the same, but the font firmware is different.
Function Specification Supplement
CR02 connector
Control unit interface One interface
MC link A communication
Remote I/O communication interface One interface CR05 connector
CR03 connector
Keyboard interface One interface
Dedicated for KB20/30, KB21/31
CNZ22 connector
LCD signal output interface One interface
10.4-type monochrome LCD signal output
Backlight power supply interface One interface CNZ22A connector
Contrast adjustment interface One interface CNZ23 connector
Input voltage 24VDC ± 5% CR01 connector

II-33
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.19 RX211/RX212 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

[Explanation of settings]
CS1: Rotary switch for machining center system/lathe system keyboard section.
Machining center system keyboard KB20 : "0"
Lathe system keyboard KB30 : "1"

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
Check 24VDC voltage
MON Software operation check Green Flickers ON or OFF
Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
WDER System error display Red Flickers ON or OFF
Control circuit initialization Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
FAIL Red Not lit Lit
error display
SD Sending to NC control unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF
Receiving from NC control Check communication cable
RD Green Flickers* ON or OFF
unit connection
RSD Sending to RIO unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
RRD Receiving from RIO unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF
switch station No.
* The LED will appear dimmed.

II-34
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.20 RX213 Card

1.20 RX213 Card

[Block diagram]
24V DC IN
CPU
5V DC OUT
AVR

EPROM CRTC
LCD-RAM

VIDEO
NC RS422 HD/VD LVIC
DPC
DCLK
Communication
LCD
control circuit
VIDEO
DU/DL
V-RAM
CP/LP
R-IO RS422
FLM
V-RAM
Communication
control circuit

KEY

EXT-BUS

[Explanation of functions]
The RX213 card is the control card for the 7.2-type monochrome LCD display. This is used by the
FCUA-LD10/LD100.
Function Specification Supplement
CR02 connector
Control unit interface One interface
MC link A communication
Remote I/O communication interface One interface CR05 connector
CR03 connector
Keyboard interface One interface
Dedicated for KB20/30, KB21/31
CNZ24 connector
LCD signal output interface One interface
7.2-type monochrome LCD signal output
Backlight power supply interface One interface CNZ22A connector
Contrast adjustment interface One interface CNZ23 connector
Input voltage 24VDC ± 5% CR01 connector

II-35
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.20 RX213 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

(Not mounted)

[Explanation of settings]
SW1: Rotary switch for machining center system/lathe system keyboard section.
Machining center system keyboard KB20 : "0"
Lathe system keyboard KB30 : "1"

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
Check 24VDC voltage
MON Software operation check Green Flickers ON or OFF
Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
WDER System error display Red Flickers ON or OFF
Control circuit initialization Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
FAIL Red Not lit Lit
error display
SD Sending to NC control unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF
Receiving from NC control Check communication cable
RD Green Flickers* ON or OFF
unit connection
RSD Sending to RIO unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
RRD Receiving from RIO unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF
switch station No.
* The LED will appear dimmed.

II-36
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.21 RX215 Card

1.21 RX215 Card

[Block diagram]

24V DC IN
CPU
5V DC OUT
AVR

EPROM CRTC
LCD-RAM

VIDEO
NC RS422
HD/VD LVIC
DPC
DCLK
Communication
LCD
control circuit
VIDEO
DU/DL
V-RAM
R-IO CP/LP
RS422
FLM
V-RAM
Communication
control circuit

KEY

EXT-BUS

[Explanation of functions]
The RX215 card is the control card for the 10.4-type monochrome LCD display. This is used by the
FCU6-DUT32.
Function Specification Supplement
CR02 connector
Control unit interface One interface
MC link A communication
Remote I/O communication interface One interface CR05 connector
CR03 connector
Keyboard interface One interface
Dedicated for KB20/30, KB21/31
CNZ22 connector
LCD signal output interface One interface
10.4-type monochrome LCD signal output
Backlight power supply interface One interface CNZ22A connector
Contrast adjustment interface One interface CNZ23 connector
Input voltage 24VDC ± 5% CR01 connector

II-37
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.21 RX215 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

(Not mounted)

(Not mounted)

[Explanation of settings]
SW1: Rotary switch for machining center system/lathe system keyboard section.
Machining center system keyboard KB20 : "0"
Lathe system keyboard KB30 : "1"

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
Check 24VDC voltage
MON Software operation check Green Flickers ON or OFF
Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
WDER System error display Red Flickers ON or OFF
Control circuit initialization Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
FAIL Red Not lit Lit
error display
SD Sending to NC control unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF
Receiving from NC control Check communication cable
RD Green Flickers* ON or OFF
unit connection
RSD Sending to RIO unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center
Check each remote I/O unit's rotary
RRD Receiving from RIO unit Green Flickers* ON or OFF
switch station No.
* The LED will appear dimmed.

II-38
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.22 HR213 Card

1.22 HR213 Card

[Block diagram]

SDRAM
CPU DRAM
(16MB)
CR02

To NC unit

(For maintenance)
CPU

cassette
Memory
CBUS
CR05

peripheral / IO
To remote I/O unit
communication
controller

To LCD panel
NCKB

LCD
To NC keyboard Graphic
controller

24VDC IN
5VDC To backlight inverter
24V (NC keyboard, memory cassette) FLROM Video memory power supply
5V/3.3V 3.3VDC
CR01

(CPU, CPU peripheral / communication controller, memory) 12VDC

INV
24V 12VDC
12V (Backlight inverter power supply)

[Explanation of functions]
HR213 is a control card for the 8.4-type color TFT display unit and connected to FCU6-DUN22.

Function Specification Supplement

CR02 connector
NC control unit interface One interface
MC link A communication
Remote I/O communication
One interface CR05 connector
interface
NCKB connector
Keyboard interface One interface
(dedicated for FCU6-KB022)
LCD connector
LCD signal output interface One interface
8.4-type color TFT signal output
Backlight power supply interface One interface INV connector
Input voltage 24VDC±5% CR01 connector
CBUS connector
Memory cassette interface One interface
(for maintenance)

II-39
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.22 HR213 Card

[Connector layout diagram]

5VON 12V0N 5 1 INVPON DSPOF

DCIN 3V0N LCDPON 31

LCD 1
INV

CR01
3
1

40
A B
1

CBUS
NCKB
13

1
AB

CR02 CR05
10A 1A 3 1 NCSYS KBSEL
RWDG
RD SD

10B 1B

[Explanation of settings]
KBSEL: Switch for designating connection keyboard type (M system: 0)
Machining system keyboard FCU6-KB022: "0"
NCSYS: Internal setting switch (Use prohibited)

[Explanation of LEDs]
Status
Correspondence
Name Function Color When During
for error
normal error
Check 24VDC external
DCIN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit power supply voltage
Check blowout of fuse
5VON Internal 5VDC output check Green Lit Not lit
Internal 3.3VDC output Green
3VON Lit Not lit
check
Internal 12VDC output Green
12VON Lit Not lit
check Contact the Mitsubishi
Backlight inverter power Green Service Center
INVPON Lit Not lit
supply check
LCD panel power supply Green
LCDPON Lit Not lit
check
RWDG System error display Red Not lit Lit
DSPOF Debug check (Not used)
SD Debug check (Not used)
RD Debug check (Not used)

II-40
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.23 RX291 Card

1.23 RX291 Card

[Block diagram]

Not used

[Explanation of functions]
The RX291 card is the expansion memory card used when using the 10.4-type color LCD display.
This is mounted on the RX212 card and used.

[Connector layout diagram]

[Explanation of settings]
CS: Rotary switch for confirmation during Mitsubishi servicing. (This is normally set to "0".)

II-41
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.24 HR576 Card

1.24 HR576 Card

[Block diagram]

CPU

2-port RAM CC-Link

RT-BUS communication TE1
controller
controller

2-port
SRAM
RAM

[Explanation of functions]
The HR576 card functions as master/local station of CC-Link which is one of the field networks.

(Note) The ISP connector on the HR576 card cannot be used.

[Connector layout diagram]

SW5

TE1 FG
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 RED
(X10) (X1) (B-RATE) (MODE)

ISP

RTBUS

II-42
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.24 HR576 Card

[Explanation of settings]

SW1(X10), SW2(X1) : Station No. setting switch

SW1 : Ten’s place of unit station No. is set. (Default setting : 0)

SW2 : One’s place of unit station No. is set. (Default setting : 0)

In remote net mode

Master station :0
Local station : 1 to 64
Standby master station : 1 to 64
(If a value other than from “0” to “64” is set, the LED “SW” and “L ERR” are lit.)
In remote I/O net mode
Master station : 1 to 64 (Set final station No. of remote I/O station)
(If “0” is set, the LED “PLM” is lit.)

SW3(B-RATE) : Baud rate setting switch

Unit baud rate is set. (Default setting : 0)

0 : 156kbps
1 : 625kbps
2 : 2.5Mbps
3 : 5Mbps
4 : 10Mbps
5 to 9 : Setting error (“SW” and “L ERR” are lit.)

SW4(MODE) : Mode setting switch

Unit operation state is set.

Master station Local station
0 : On-line (Remote net mode) Possible Possible
1 : On-line (Remote I/O net mode) Possible Impossible
2 : Off-line Possible Possible
3 : Circuit test 1 Possible Impossible
4 : Circuit test 2 Possible Impossible
5 : Parameter check test Possible Impossible
6 : Hardware test Possible Possible
7 to F : Cannot be used.

SW5 : Condition setting switch

Operation condition is set. (Default setting : All OFF)

SW5-1 Station type OFF : Master station/local station
ON : Standby master station
SW5-2 Cannot be used. Always OFF
SW5-3 Cannot be used. Always OFF
SW5-4 Input data status from the station OFF : Clear
with data link trouble ON : Hold
SW5-5, 6 No. of occupied stations SW5 SW6
OFF OFF : 1 station
OFF ON : 2 stations
ON ON : 3 stations
ON OFF : 4 stations
SW5-7 Cannot be used. Always OFF
SW5-8 Cannot be used. Always OFF

II-43
 1. EXPLANATION OF MODULE FUNCTIONS
1.24 HR576 Card

[Explanation of LEDs]

SW5
LED

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
L1 R1
L2 R2
L3 R3
L4 R4
L5 R5
L6 R6
L7 R7
L8 R8

Status
Master station Local station
(Standby master (Standby master
Name Function
station) station)
When During When During
normal error normal error
L1 RUN Lit : When the unit is normal Lit Not lit Lit Not lit

Not lit : When watch dog timer error

L2 ERR. Communication state between this card Not lit Lit / Not lit Lit /
and the station specified with the Flickers Flickers
parameter is displayed.
Lit : Communication error in all
stations
Flickers: Communication error in some
stations.
L3 MST Lit : This card is set as master station. Lit - Not lit -
L4 S MST Lit : This card is set as standby Lit - Lit -
master station.
L5 LOCAL Lit : This card is set as local station. Not lit - Lit -
L6 CPU R/W Lit : This card is communicating with Lit Not lit Lit Not lit
NC CPU. (FROM/TO)
L7 L RUN Lit : Executing data link (Local station) Lit Not lit Lit Not lit
L8 L ERR. Lit : Communication error (This Not lit Lit / Not lit Lit /
station) Flickers Flickers
Flickers: Setting of the switches was
changed during the power ON.
R1 E SW Lit : Setting of the switches is error. Not lit Lit Not lit Lit
R2 R M/S Lit : A master station has already Not lit Lit - -
R existed on the same circuit.
R3 O PRM Lit : Error in parameter Not lit Lit - -
R4 R TIME Lit : Data link watch timer was Not lit Lit - -
worked.
R5 LINE Lit : The cable has broken, or the Not lit Lit Not lit Lit
transmission path is influenced
by the noise.
R6 - - - -
R7 SD Lit : During data transmission Lit Not lit Lit Not lit
R8 RD Lit : During data reception Lit Not lit Lit Not lit

II-44
 2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 List of Unit LEDs

2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 List of Unit LEDs
(1) NC control section

CBUS1 CBUS2

OPEN

DCIN
DCOUT
PSEMG ENC2

BATALM

WD NC NC NC CF11
ER LED SYS RS T CF10

[Explanation of LEDs]

Status Correspondence for

Name Function Color
When normal During error error

DCIN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
Internal output voltage Replace power supply or
DCOUT Green Lit Not lit
check control unit
External emergency stop Check cause of emergency
PSEMG Red Not lit Lit
status display stop
BATALM Battery voltage drop (alarm) Red Not lit Lit Replace battery
System status display
NCLD1 – – – Contact the Mitsubishi
(7-segment software status)
Service Center
WDER System error display Red Not lit Lit

II-45
 2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.1 List of Unit LEDs

(2) Base I/O unit

Base I/O unit

CS2 CS1

ENC1
SKIP

CF10

SV2
CF31

SV1
CF32

CR31
RIO2 RIO1 DCIN

24IN
RAL1
5OUT
RAL2
CF34
CF33

[Explanation of LED functions]

Status
Name Function Color When During Correspondence for error
normal error
LED1 24IN 24VDC input check Green Lit Not lit Check 24VDC voltage
(Dual-
color Communication error
Check each remote I/O unit's
illumi- RIO1 display for rotary switch Red Not lit Lit
rotary switch station No.
nation) "CS1" setting station

LED2 Internal output voltage Contact the Mitsubishi Service

5OUT Green Lit Not lit
(Dual- check Center
color Communication error
illumi- RIO2 display for rotary switch Check each remote I/O unit's
Red Not lit Lit
nation) rotary switch station No.
"CS2" setting station

II-46
 2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2 Troubleshooting

2.2 Troubleshooting
2.2.1 Confirmation of Trouble State
Confirm "when", "when doing what", and "what kind of" trouble occurred.

(1) When?
What time did the trouble occur?

(2) When doing what?

What was the NC operation mode?

• During automatic operation .......... Program No., sequence No. and program details when the
trouble occurred.
• During manual operation .............. What was the manual operation mode?
What was the operation procedure?
What were the previous and next steps?
• What was the setting display unit screen?
• Did the trouble occur during input/output operations?
• What was the machine side state?
• Did the trouble occur while replacing the tools?
• Did hunting occur in the control axis?

(3) What kind of trouble?

• What was displayed on the setting display unit's Alarm Diagnosis screen?
Display the Alarm Diagnosis screen, and check the alarm details.
• What was displayed for the machine sequence alarm?
• Is the CRT and LCD screen normal?

(4) How frequently?

• When did the trouble occur? What was the frequency? (Does it occur when other machines are
operating?) If the trouble occurs infrequently or if it occurs during the operation of another
machine, there may be an error in the power voltage or the trouble may be caused by noise, etc.
Check whether the power voltage is normal (does it drop momentarily when other machines are
operating?), and whether noise measures have been taken.
• Does the trouble occur during a specific mode?
• Does the trouble occur when the overhead crane is operating?
• What is the frequency in the same workpiece?
• Check whether the same trouble can be repeated during the same operation.
• Check whether the same trouble occurs when the conditions are changed.
(Try changing the override, program details, and operation procedures, etc.)
• What is the ambient temperature?
(Was there a sudden change in the temperature? Was the fan at the top of the control unit
rotating?)
• Is there any contact defect or insulation defect in the cables?
(Has any oil or cutting oil splattered onto the cables?)

II-47
 2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2 Troubleshooting

2.2.2 When in Trouble

If the system does not operate as planned or if there is any trouble in the operation, confirm the following
points and then contact the Mitsubishi Service Center.

− Examples of trouble −
• Nothing appears in the NC screen, LED, etc., even when the power ON button is pressed.
• The power turns OFF suddenly.
• Nothing appears on the NC screen, or the screen is completely white.
• The operation keys do not function. The NC screen appears but the operation board key input does
not function.
• Machining operation is not possible.

II-48
 2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2 Troubleshooting

(1) Problems related to the power supply

The power does not turn ON.

Cause Remedy
The power cord is disconnected or Check the cable between the NC unit and the external
loose. power supply, and between the external power supply and
socket. Make sure that the cable is inserted securely.
Check that there are no wires broken in the cable. If broken,
replace the cable.
The door interlock is applied. If the control panel door is not completely closed, close it.
If the door interlock is applied even when the door is closed,
the door interlock circuit is damaged. Repair it.
There is a problem in the power If the socket has a switch, turn the switch ON.
socket. Make sure that the specified power voltage and power
frequency is being output from the socket.
The external power supply is Check that the power can be turned ON with just the
faulty. external power supply.
Note) Depending on the external power supply being used,
the power may not turn ON in the no-load state, so
install a slight load and check.
The ON/OFF cable is short- Disconnect the ON/OFF cable and check that it is not
circuited. short-circuited. If short-circuited, replace the cable.
The external power supply's input Check that the input voltage is within 200 to 230VAC +10 to
voltage is not as specified. –15%, 100 to 115VAC +10 to –15%, and 24VDC±5%.

The external power turns ON but the NC control power does not turn ON.
Cause Remedy
The external power supply output Disconnect the cable between the NC unit and the external
is not correct. power supply, and check that the external power supply
output is normal.
Wire the cable between the NC unit and external power
supply, and check that the external power supply output is
normal.
The cable connected from the NC Disconnect the cable connected to the peripheral device
unit to the peripheral device is one at a time and check that the power turns ON. Check that
short-circuited. there are no short-circuited cables.
There is a short circuit in the Remove the removable cards one at a time and check that
configuration card. the power turns ON.
Check that there are no short-circuited cards.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the
specified connectors.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the
power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

II-49
 2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2 Troubleshooting

The power turns OFF.

Cause Remedy
There is a problem in the power Check whether the voltage fluctuates at certain time zones.
socket. Check whether an instantaneous power failure has occurred.
A problem occurs when the Check whether the voltage drops instantaneously when the
peripheral device starts operating. peripheral device operation starts.
The HR081/HR082/HR083 power card PSEMG (red) LED is lit.
Cause Remedy
The emergency stop switch Set the emergency stop switch to the release (B contact)
connected to the EMG connector state. Check the connection to the EMG connector.
is ON (A contact), or the EMG
connector is disconnected.
The HR081/HR082/HR083 power card BATALM (red) LED is lit.
Cause Remedy
The LED lights when the voltage Refer to section 3.3.2 and replace the battery.
of the battery connected to the
HR081/HR082/HR083 BAT
connector has dropped to 2.6V ±
0.065V or less.

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the
specified connectors.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the
power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

II-50
 2. TROUBLESHOOTING
2.2 Troubleshooting

(2) Problems when starting the system

The NC does not start up correctly.

Phenomenon Remedy
8 is displayed on the CPU card's Check that the rotary switch NCSYS is set to 0. If not set to
7-segment display NCLD1. 0, set to 0 and restart.
E or F is displayed on the CPU Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center.
card's 7-segment display NCLD1.

(3) Problems related to remote I/O

The communication alarm LED RAL is lit.

Cause Remedy
The base I/O unit or remote I/O Check the connection of the NC control section and remote
unit's communication cable (SH41) I/O communication cable F010 or the SH41 cable between
is not connected. remote I/O units.
The cable has broken wires or the
contact is defective.
Base I/O unit is faulty. Contact the Mitsubishi Service Center, and then replace.
The power supply system LED is not lit.
Phenomenon Remedy
The 24IN LED is not lit. (The input Supply a +24V±5% voltage to the base I/O unit.
power is not being supplied.)
The 5OUT LED is not lit. Check that the 24VDC input voltage is not +20V or less.
(The input power is not within the If the voltage is properly supplied, contact the Mitsubishi
tolerable range, or the internal Service Center.
power is faulty.)

CAUTION

Do not apply voltages other than those indicated in this manual on the connector.
Doing so may lead to destruction or damage.
Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the
specified connectors.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the
power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the PCBs while the power is ON.

II-51
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.1 Maintenance Tools

3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE
3.1 Maintenance Tools
(1) Measuring instruments
The following measuring instruments are used to confirm that the voltage is being supplied correctly
to the NC unit, to confirm that the wiring to the NC unit is correct, and to carry out simple
troubleshooting.
Table 3.1 Maintenance tools
Tool Condition Application
Tester To check that the wiring to the NC unit is correct
before turning the power ON.
AC voltmeter Measure the AC power voltage. To measures the AC power voltage being
The tolerable error is ±2% supplied to the external 24VDC power supply
or less. unit.
DC voltmeter Max. scale 30V. To measure the DC power voltage.
The tolerable error is ±2% External power supply 24V (control section,
or less. machine input/output interface)
Battery voltage HR081/HR082/HR083 DC
output
Phase rotation To check the connection order of the AC 3-phase
meter input power supply.
Synchroscope General measurement and simple
troubleshooting
Note 1) Currently, a high-accuracy digital multi-meter is commonly used as a tester. This digital
multi-meter can be used as both an AC voltmeter and a DC voltmeter. When measuring a
minute current, a correct measurement may not be possible because of the digital
multi-meter's input impedance.
Note 2) A logic analyzer (sampling cycle 200MHz or more) is required for complicated
troubleshooting.

(2) Tools
Screwdriver (large, medium, small)
Radio pliers

3.2 Maintenance Items

Maintenance is categorized into daily maintenance items (items to be carried at set intervals) and
periodic maintenance items (replacement of parts when life is reached).
Some parts will not function in a hardware manner when the life is reached, so these should be replaced
before the life is reached.
Table 3.2 List of maintenance items
Class Name Life Inspection/replacement Remarks
Daily maintenance Escutcheon Once/two months
(Accordingly when dirty)
Periodic Battery Cumulative data When battery voltage drop Refer to
maintenance (lithium battery) holding time caution alarm occurs Section
45,000 hr (Guideline: approx. 5 years) 3.3.2 (1).
Cooling fan 30,000 hr Refer to left.
(control section)
Other consumable Operation board 1,000,000 strokes Refer to left.
parts (106 times)

II-52
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.2 Maintenance Items

3.2.1 Escutcheon
(1) Cleaning the escutcheon
1) Keep the rear side of the escutcheon as clean as possible.
2) Wipe the escutcheon with a soft, clean, dry cloth. If cleaning is still required, put some neutral
detergent on a cloth and wipe. Do not use alcohol, thinner, etc.
3.2.2 LCD Panel
(1) Handling the LCD panel
(a) Precautions for use
1) The polarizing plate (display surface) of the LCD panel surface can be easily scratched, so be
careful during handling.
2) Glass is used in the LCD panel. Be careful not to drop the LCD panel or allow it to hit hard
objects, as the glass may chip or break.
3) The polarizing plate may be stained or discolored if drops of water, etc., adhere to it for long
periods, so be sure to wipe off any moisture immediately.
4) Wipe off any dirt, dust, etc., on the polarizing plate using absorbent cotton or other soft cloth.
5) A CMOS LSI is used in the LCD panel, so be careful of static electricity when handling.
6) Never disassemble the LCD panel. Doing so will damage the panel.
(b) Precautions for storage
1) Do not store the LCD panel in locations having a high temperature or humidity. (Store within the
storage temperature range.)
2) When storing the LCD panel as an individual unit, be sure that other objects do not touch or hit
the polarizing plate (display surface).
3) When storing the LCD panel for long periods, be sure to store in a dark place away from
exposure to direct sunlight or fluorescent light.
(2) Other precautions for use
(a) Backlight life
The life of the backlight is 25,000 hours for the 7.2-type, 40,000 hours for the 8.4-type and 25,000
hours for the 10.4-type when used at 25°C. (Time for luminance to drop to 50% of the initial value.)
The backlight life is dependent on the temperature. The life tends to be shorter when used
continuously at lower temperatures.
If not using the screens for a long time, turn all screens off to prevent deterioration of the backlight.
(b) Luminance start
Due to the characteristics of the backlight, the luminance could drop slightly at lower temperatures. It will
take approx.10 to 15 minutes for the luminance to reach the rated value after the power is turned ON.
(c) Unevenness, luminescent spots and irregularities
Uneven brightness, small luminescent spots or small dark spots (irregularities) may appear on LCD,
but this is not a fault.
(d) Contrast
The contrast of STN method LCD panels changes with temperature fluctuation. If this happens and
the panel is difficult to see, open the operation box door and adjust the contrast with the contrast
adjustment potentiometer on the LCD signal interface PCB.
(3) Replacing the backlight
The backlight can be replaced by the user, but replacement should be commissioned to the
Mitsubishi Service Center.
3.2.3 ATA Memory Card
(1) Handling the PCMCIA card
The general handling methods for the PCMCIA card are described below.
Refer to the instruction manual of the PCMCIA card used for details.
(a) Precautions for use
1) Insert the card in the correct direction.
2) Do not touch the connector area with the hands or metal.
3) Do not apply excessive force to the connector area.
4) Do not subject the card to bending or strong impacts.
5) Do not open the cover or disassemble the card.
6) Do not use the card in dusty locations.
(b) Precautions for storage
1) Do not store the card in locations having a high temperature or humidity.
2) Do not store the card in dusty locations.
II-53
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

3.3 Replacement Methods

3.3.1 Cable
If the cable is replaced without turning the power OFF, the normal unit or peripheral devices could be
damaged, and risks could be imposed.
Disconnect each cable with the following procedures.
a) For the following type of connector, press the tabs with a thumb and forefinger in the direction of the
arrow, and pull the connector off.

(1) Press
(1) Press
Y

(2) Pull (2) Pull

(1) Press

View from above

(1) Press

(2) Pull

(2) Pull

CAUTION

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the
power is ON.
Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.

II-54
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

b) For a flat cable type connector with latches, open the latches in the directions of the arrows, and
pull the connector off.
(1) Open

(2) Pull

c) For a flat cable type connector without latches, hold the connector with a thumb and forefinger, and
pull the connector off.

(1) Hold with thumb and forefinger.

(2) Pull

d) For the screw fixed type connector, loosen the two fixing screws, and pull the connector off.
(1) Loosen

(1) Loosen

(2) Pull
(2) Pull

CAUTION

Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the
power is ON.
Do not connect the cable by pulling on the cable wire.

II-55
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

3.3.2 Durable Parts

(1) Control unit battery
All data, such as the parameters and machining programs that need to be backed up when the
power is turned OFF, are saved by a lithium battery installed in the control unit's battery holder.
Battery ................................. With ER6 connector (Toshiba with Mitsubishi specifications)
Initial battery voltage ........... 3.6V
Voltage at which voltage ..... 2.8V (Battery voltage drop caution alarm screen display)
drop is detected 2.6V (Battery voltage drop warning alarm screen display + control
section LED display)
Battery cumulative data ....... 45,000 hours (At room temperature. The life will be shorter if the
holding time temperature is high.)
Battery life ........................... Approx. 5 years (from date of battery manufacture)
Discharge current ................ 40µA or less
(Replace the battery when the battery voltage drop caution alarm appears on the NC screen. The
internal data could be damaged if the battery voltage drop warning alarm appears.)

a) Replacement procedures
Always replace the battery with the control section (machine) power turned OFF.
Complete the replacement within 30 minutes after turning the power OFF. (If the battery is not
connected within 30 minutes, the data being backed up will be destroyed.)
1) Turn the control section (machine) power OFF.
2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc.,
are all OFF.
3) If an extension unit is mounted, and a cable is connected to the front of the control section,
disconnect the cable.
4) Open the front cover of the control section by pulling on the right side of the door (the side
without fixing screws).
5) Remove the battery from the battery holder.
6) Pull the connector connected to the battery out from the BAT connector on the control section
HR081/HR082/HR083 power supply PCB.
7) Replace the battery with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new battery into
the BAT connector on the control section HR081/HR082/HR083 PCB. Pay attention to the
connector orientation, being careful not to insert backwards.
8) Fit the battery into the battery holder.
9) Close the front cover of the control section. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by
listening for the "click" sound when the latch catches.
10) Close the door of the electric cabinet.
HR081/082/HR083
BAT connector
Connection connector Control section
Battery holder
Battery
Front cover

Open the front cover

of the control section.

Precautions for handling battery

• Always replace the battery with the same type.
• Do not disassemble the battery.
• Do not place the battery in flames or water.
• Do not pressurize and deform the battery.
• This is a primary battery so do not charge it.
• Dispose of the spent battery as industrial waste.

II-56
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

(2) External battery unit battery

When the external battery unit (FCU6-BT4D1) is used, the data, such as the parameters and
machining programs, which needs to be backed up when the power is turned OFF, is held by the
lithium battery mounted on the external battery unit. The external battery unit is provided with one
AA battery (ER6) for the control unit, and four AA batteries (ER6-B4D-01) for the servo drive unit.
The control unit battery is the same as the battery mounted on the control unit. The servo drive unit
battery's characteristics, such as the holding time, differs according to the servo drive unit
configuration, so refer to the servo drive unit manual.
Battery unit: FCU6-BT4D1

To NC control unit

SH21 To feed axis servo

drive unit
Servo battery
SH21 To auxiliary axis servo
drive unit

CR05
HR071 F240
NC battery
* Provide an allowance in the cable wiring so that
the battery unit can be pulled out during replacement.

Unit type : FCU6-BT4D1

Replacement part type : For NC control unit
ER6 BKO-NC2157H01 (single battery replacement)
For servo drive unit
ER6-B4D-01 BKO-NC2151H06 (PCB unit replacement)
(a) NC side battery replacement procedures
Always replace the external battery unit's battery with the control section (machine) power
turned ON. (This is because there is no need to open the machine's electric cabinet door.)
1) Remove the four screws on the front cover, and pull the external battery unit out.
2) Remove the two screws on the cable relay PCB HR071, and remove the HR071A card.
3) Remove the battery (ER6) from the battery holder.
4) Pull the connector connected to the battery from the BAT connector on the cable relay PCB
HR071.
5) Replace the battery with a new one. Insert the connector connected to the new battery to the
BAT connector on the cable relay PCB HR071. Pay attention to the connector orientation,
being careful not to insert backwards.
6) Fit the battery into the battery holder.
7) Fix the cable relay PCB HR071 onto the external battery unit, and insert and fix the external
battery unit into the electric cabinet.
(b) Servo drive unit side battery replacement procedures
The absolute position data is backed up with the feed axis servo drive unit and auxiliary axis
servo drive unit systems. Thus, if the battery voltage drop warning occurs in either the feed axis
servo drive unit or auxiliary axis servo drive unit, the battery (ER6-B4D-01) must be replaced.
The battery (ER6-B4D-01) is an assembled battery PCB type. The battery is replaced with the
amplifier control power ON in the same manner as the control section replacement procedures.
If the battery voltage drop warning occurs, do not turn the servo drive unit control power OFF.
(There is no need to turn ON the main circuit power or cancel the emergency stop.)
CAUTION
If the battery voltage drop warning alarm occurs, the programs, tool data and parameters
could be damaged. Thus, reload each data with the input/output device after replacing the
battery.
Do not short circuit, charge, overheat, incinerate or disassemble the battery.
Dispose the spent battery according to local laws.

II-57
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

3.3.3 Control Unit

(1) Control unit

a) Replacement procedures
Always replace the control unit with the machine power turned OFF.

1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
2) Open the electric cabinet door.
3) Disconnect all cables connected to the control unit.
4) Remove the screws fixing the control unit onto the control unit installation fitting, and remove the
control unit from the control unit installation fitting. (Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and
then remove the two upper fixing screws while supporting the unit with a hand. Then lift the unit
upward and off. The two lower fixing screws do not need to be removed.)
5) Replace with a new control unit, and fix the control unit onto control section installation fitting
with the fixing screws.
6) Connect all cables connected to the control unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
7) Check the cables and wires for connection leaks, faulty connections, etc., then close the electric
cabinet door.

Control unit installation fitting

Control unit Fixin g scr ews (4 scr ews)

CAUTION

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
Do not replace the control unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power
is ON.

II-58
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

(2) Base I/O unit

The base I/O unit is generally installed on the electric cabinet side.

a) Replacement procedures
Always replace the base I/O unit with the machine power turned OFF.

1) Check that the machine power is turned OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
2) Open the electric cabinet door.
3) Disconnect all cables connected to the base I/O unit.
4) Remove the screws fixing the base I/O unit to the electric cabinet, and remove the base I/O unit
from the electric cabinet.
(Loosen the two lower fixing screws first, and then remove the two upper fixing screws while
supporting the unit with a hand. Then lift the unit upward and off. The two lower fixing screws do
not need to be removed.)
5) Replace with a new base I/O unit, and fix the unit onto the electric cabinet with the fixing screws.
6) Connect all cables connected to the base I/O unit. (Connect the cables to the designated
connectors.)
7) Check the cables and wires for connection leaks, faulty connections, etc., then close the electric
cabinet door.

Electric cabinet

Base I/O unit

Fixin g scr ews (4 scr ews)

CAUTION

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
Do not replace the base I/O unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power
is ON.

II-59
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

3.3.4 Control PCB

(1) Control section power supply PCB (HR081/HR082/HR083)
The control section power supply PCB is supplied with 24VDC from an external source. This PCB
generates the DC voltage required for each control PCB in the control section.
a) Replacement procedures
Always replace the control section power supply PCB with the machine power turned OFF.
A battery for backing up the memory is mounted on the control section power supply PCB, so as
with the battery, replace the control section power supply PCB within 30 minutes.
1) Confirm that the machine power is OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc.,
are all OFF.
3) Disconnect all cables connected to the control section power supply PCB.
4) If an extension unit is mounted, and a cable is connected to the front of the control section,
disconnect the cable.
5) Open the front cover of the control section by pulling on the right side of the door (the side
without fixing screws).
6) While holding the front upper and lower sections of the control section power supply PCB with
both hands, pull out the PCB from the control section.
7) Remove the battery from the control section power supply PCB that was removed from the
control section.
8) Replace the battery with the new one. Insert the connector connected to the new battery into
the BAT connector on the HR08† control section PCB.
9) Install the control section power supply PCB into the control section. (Align the control section
power supply PCB with the PCB fixing guides on the inner side of the control section case, and
then install.)
10) Connect all cables that were connected to the control section power supply PCB. (Connect all
cables to the designated connectors.)
11) Close the front cover of the control section. At this time, confirm that the cover is closed by
listening for the "click" sound when the latch catches.
12) Close the door of the electric cabinet.
Control section case

Control section
power supply PCB PCB fixing guides

Control section

Control section case

Contr ol section power su pply PCB

Connection
connector BAT connector

Open the front cover Battery holder

of the control section. Battery

Fron t cover

CAUTION

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
Do not replace the base I/O unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power
is ON.
II-60
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

(2) Expansion PCB

The expansion PCB is used to expand the system for adding a serial port, etc. (Refer to the I
Connection Manual, Section 2.1 for information related to expansion PCB types and functions.)
Up to two expansion PCBs can be added. The PCBs are mounted in the RT #1/#2 slots on the right
side of the control section power supply PCB.
a) Replacement procedures
Always replace the expansion PCB with the machine power turned OFF.
1) Confirm that the machine power is OFF. (If the power is not OFF, turn it OFF.)
2) Open the electric cabinet door, and confirm that the control unit LED, 7-segment display, etc.,
are all OFF.
3) Disconnect all cables connected to the control unit and expansion PCB.
4) Open the front cover of the control section as shown in the drawing below.
5) While holding the front upper and lower sections of the expansion PCB with both hands, pull
out the PCB from the control section.
6) Replace with the new expansion PCB. If the PCB has setting locations, set to the same
settings as the old PCB.
7) Install the expansion PCB into the slot in which the old PCB was mounted.
(Align the expansion PCB with the PCB fixing guides on the inner side of the control section
case, and then install.)
8) Close the front cover of the control section.
9) Connect all cables that were connected to the control unit and expansion PCB.
(Connect all cables to the designated connectors.)
10) Close the door of the electric cabinet.

Control section case

Expansion PCB mounting slot

Expansion PCB PCB fixing guides

Control section

Control section case

Expansion PCB

Open the front cover

of the control section.

Front cover

CAUTION

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
Do not replace the base I/O unit while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power
is ON.

II-61
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

3.3.5 Memory Cassette

(1) HR4
The memory cassette is a PCB used to store user PLC and machining programs, and is installed on
the CBUS#2 connector of the control section.

a) Replacement procedures
Always replace the memory cassette with the machine power turned OFF.
Before replacing RAM-type memory cassettes, always make a backup of the memory to be
replaced using an external I/O device, etc. Then, re-input the details after replacing the memory
cassette.

Confirm that the control unit power is OFF.

(1) Open the control unit cover from the right side.
(2) While holding the top and bottom of the memory cassette with a thumb and forefinger, pull
out the memory cassette from the control section.
(3) Install the new memory cassette in the control section.
Install by carrying out steps (1) and (2) in reverse (2) → (1) order.
(Align the memory cassette with the cassette fixing guides on the NC control case.)

Cassette guides

CBUS#1 CBUS#2
R R
Enlarged view
FCU6-HR4**
MEMORY CASETTE

FCU6-HR4**
MEMORY CASETTE
M em or y
cassette
SER.9801001

SER.9801001
Ver.*

Ver.*

Control section case

M em or y
cassette

(2) Pull out the mem ory cassette.

Front cover
(1) Open the front cover of the control section.

CAUTION

Incorrect connections may damage the devices, so connect the cables to the specified
connectors.
Do not replace the memory cassette while the power is ON.
Do not connect or disconnect the connection cables between each unit while the power
is ON.
Be careful that metal cutting chips, etc., do not come into contact with the connector

II-62
 3. DAILY MAINTENANCE AND PERIODIC INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
3.3 Replacement Methods

3.3.6 High-speed Program Server

(1) High-speed program server unit (FCU6-EP203-1)
The high-speed program server is configured of the HR831 and HR832 cards and an F150 cable. It
is replaced as a unit.

a) Replacement procedures
Turn the machine power OFF before replacing the high-speed program server unit.

Control section

Front cover

Open the control

section's front cover.

EXTPCI connector
F150 cable IC card interface PCB
(HR831)

PCB fixing claw

High-speed
program server unit
(FCU6-EP203-1)

Ethernet interface PCB

High-speed program server unit storage section (HR832)
(enlarged view)

CAUTION

Incorrect connections will cause device damage, so always connect the cable to the
specified connector.
Do not replace the high-speed program server unit while the power is ON.

II-63
 Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Jul. 1997 BNP-B2183A Detailed errors were corrected.

Feb. 1998 BNP-B2183B Errors were corrected.

New items were added.

Sept. 1998 BNP-B2183C Errors were corrected.

New items were added.

Oct. 1999 BNP-B2183D M65/66 was added.

EMC Directives measures were added to Appendix 4.
Explanation of high-speed program server function was added.
FCU6-HR378 was added.
FCU6-DUN33 color LCD model was added.
Units were changed to SI unit displays.
The above related cards were added to the module function explanations in the
maintenance explanation.

Feb. 2001 BNP-B2183E System configuration list was added.

Explanation of control unit was reviewed.
Figure symbol were changed to JIS notations.
DI delay time was corrected from 3 to 20ms to 2.2 to 11ms.
No. of pulses per rotation was added to explanation on manual pulse generator.
Explanations of communication terminals were reviewed.
External battery unit punch hole dimensions were added.

Nov. 2003 BNP-B2183J • Design of the cover and the back cover were changed.
• Manual name changed from "MELDAS 64/65/66 Series Connection and
Maintenance Manual" to "MELDAS 60/60S Series Connection and Maintenance
Manual".
• MODEL, MODEL CODE, and Manual No. were added on the back cover.
• "Introduction" was added.
• The order of chapters were changed.
• MELDAS 64AS-A/64S-A/64AS/64S/65S/66S were added.
• FCU6-KB021/031 were added.
• “12.5 Connection of I/O device by CC-link” was added in “I CONNECTION
MANUAL”.
• “1.23 HR576 card” was added in “II MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
• Errors corrected and expressions changed.

Aug. 2005 BNP-B2183K • Descriptions relating to FCU6-DUN22 and FCU6-KB022 were added.
• "Appendix 6. TRANSPORTATION RESTRICTIONS FOR LITHIUM BATTERIES" was
added.
• "Appendix 7. PRECAUTIONS FOR USE OF PERIPHERAL DEVICES AND
COMMERCIALLY AVAILABLE DEVICES" was added,
• "1.22 HR213 Card" was added in "II MAINTENANCE MANUAL".
• "Global service network" was added.
• Errors corrected and expressions changed.
 Global service network
NORTH AMERICA FA Center CHINA FA Center
EUROPEAN FA Center KOREAN FA Center

ASEAN FA Center

HONG KONG FA Center

TAIWAN FA Center

North America FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC.) ASEAN FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD.)
Illinois CNC Service Center Singapore CNC Service Center
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL. 60061, U.S.A. 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 (Se FAX: +1-847-478-2650 (Se TEL: +65-6473-2308 FAX: +65-6476-7439
California CNC Service Center Thailand MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (F. A. TECH CO., LTD)
5665 PLAZA DRIVE, CYPRESS, CA. 90630, U.S.A. 898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 FLOOR 12,14 RAMA III RD BANGPONGPANG,
TEL: +1-714-220-4796 FAX: +1-714-229-3818 YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120. THAILAND
Georgia CNC Service Center TEL: +66-2-682-6522 FAX: +66-2-682-6020
2810 PREMIERE PARKWAY SUITE 400, DULUTH, GA., 30097, U.S.A. Malaysia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
TEL: +1-678-258-4500 FAX: +1-678-258-4519 (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
New Jersey CNC Service Center 60, JALAN USJ 10/1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN MALAYSIA
200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NJ. 08873, U.S.A. TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 FAX: +60-3-5631-7636
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 FAX: +1-732-560-4531 JOHOR MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
Kentucky CNC Service Satellite (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
8025 PRODUCTION DRIVE, FLORENCE, KY., 41042, U.S.A. NO. 16, JALAN SHAHBANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA
TEL: +1-859-342-1700 FAX: +1-859-342-1578 TEL: +60-7-557-8218 FAX: +60-7-557-3404
Michigan CNC Service Satellite Indonesia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
2545 38TH STREET, ALLEGAN, MI., 49010, U.S.A. (PT. AUTOTEKNINDO SUMBER MAKMUR)
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 FAX: +1-269-673-4092 WISMA NUSANTARA 14TH FLOOR JL. M.H. THAMRIN 59, JAKARTA 10350 INDONESIA
Ohio CNC Service Satellite TEL: +62-21-3917-144 FAX: +62-21-3917-164
62 W. 500 S., ANDERSON, IN., 46013, U.S.A. India MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
TEL: +1-847-478-2608 FAX: +1-847-478-2690 B-36FF, PAVANA INDUSTRIAL PREMISES M.I.D.C., BHOASRI PUNE 411026, INDIA
Texas CNC Service Satellite TEL: +91-20-2711-9484 FAX: +91-20-2712-8115
1000, NOLEN DRIVE SUITE 200, GRAPEVINE, TX. 76051, U.S.A. BANGALORE MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
TEL: +1-817-251-7468 FAX: +1-817-416-1439 (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Canada CNC Service Center S 615, 6TH FLOOR, MANIPAL CENTER, BANGALORE 560001, INDIA
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ON. L3R OJ2, CANADA TEL: +91-80-509-2119 FAX: +91-80-532-0480
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 Delhi MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Parts Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Mexico CNC Service Center 1197, SECTOR 15 PART-2, OFF DELHI-JAIPUR HIGHWAY BEHIND 32ND MILESTONE GURGAON
MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO 122001, INDIA
TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 FAX: +52-55-9171-7698 TEL: +91-98-1024-8895 FAX:
Monterrey CNC Service Satellite Philippines MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
ARGENTINA 3900, FRACC. LAS TORRES, MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM CORPORATION)
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 UNIT No.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY,
Brazil MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771
(AUTOMOTION IND. COM. IMP. E EXP. LTDA.) TEL: +63-2-807-2416 FAX: +63-2-807-2417
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 18550-000 BOITUVA – SP, BRAZIL Vietnam MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (SA GIANG TECHNO CO., LTD)
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 47-49 HOANG SA ST. DAKAO WARD, DIST.1 HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM
TEL: +84-8-910-4763 FAX: +84-8-910-2593
European FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.)
Germany CNC Service Center China FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD.)
GOTHAER STRASSE 8, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY China CNC Service Center
TEL: +49-2102-486-0 FAX:+49-2102486-591 2/F., BLOCK 5 BLDG.AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION PLAZA, 103 CAOBAO RD. SHANGHAI 200233,
South Germany CNC Service Center CHINA
KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY TEL: +86-21-6120-0808 FAX: +86-21-6494-0178
TEL: +49-711-3270-010 FAX: +49-711-3270-0141 Shenyang CNC Service Center
France CNC Service Center TEL: +86-24-2397-0184 FAX: +86-24-2397-0185
25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE Beijing CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 9/F, OFFICE TOWER1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE, DONGCHENG DISTRICT,
Lyon CNC Service Satellite BEIJING 100005, CHINA
TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
U.K CNC Service Center China MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. (BEIJING JIAYOU HIGHTECH TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT CO.)
TEL: +44-1707-282-846 FAX:-44-1707-278-992 RM 709, HIGH TECHNOLOGY BUILDING NO.229 NORTH SI HUAN ZHONG ROAD, HAIDIAN DISTRICT ,
Italy CNC Service Center BEIJING 100083, CHINA
ZONA INDUSTRIALE VIA ARCHIMEDE 35 20041 AGRATE BRIANZA, MILANO ITALY TEL: +86-10-8288-3030 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
TEL: +39-039-60531-342 FAX: +39-039-6053-206 Tianjin CNC Service Satellite
Spain CNC Service Satellite RM909, TAIHONG TOWER, NO220 SHIZILIN STREET, HEBEI DISTRICT, TIANJIN, CHINA 300143
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80 -APDO.420 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN TEL: -86-22-2653-9090 FAX: +86-22-2635-9050
TEL: +34-935-65-2236 FAX: Shenzhen CNC Service Satellite
Turkey MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center RM02, UNIT A, 13/F, TIANAN NATIONAL TOWER, RENMING SOUTH ROAD, SHENZHEN, CHINA 518005
(GENEL TEKNIK SISTEMLER LTD. STI.) TEL: +86-755-2515-6691 FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
DARULACEZE CAD. FAMAS IS MERKEZI A BLOCK NO.43 KAT2 80270 OKMEYDANI ISTANBUL, Changchun Service Satellite
TURKEY TEL: +86-431-50214546 FAX: +86-431-5021690
TEL: +90-212-320-1640 FAX: +90-212-320-1649 Hong Kong CNC Service Center
Poland MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o) UNIT A, 25/F RYODEN INDUSTRIAL CENTRE, 26-38 TA CHUEN PING STREET, KWAI CHUNG, NEW
UL SLICZNA 34, 31-444 KRAKOW, POLAND TERRITORIES, HONG KONG
TEL: +48-12-632-28-85 FAX: TEL: +852-2619-8588 FAX: +852-2784-1323
Wroclaw MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o)
UL KOBIERZYCKA 23, 52-315 WROCLAW, POLAND Taiwan FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD.)
TEL: +48-71-333-77-53 FAX: +48-71-333-77-53 Taichung CNC Service Center
Czech MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center NO.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTIAL PARK TAICHUNG CITY, TAIWAN R.O.C.
(AUTOCONT CONTROL SYSTEM S.R.O. ) TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
NEMOCNICNI 12, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2 CZECH REPUBLIC Taipei CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +420-596-152-426 FAX: +420-596-152-112 TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Tainan CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689

Korean FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD.)

Korea CNC Service Center
DONGSEO GAME CHANNEL BLDG. 2F. 660-11, DEUNGCHON-DONG KANGSEO-KU SEOUL, 157-030
KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9607 FAX: +82-2-3663-0475
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions
in the contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in
some unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited
This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole,
without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

© 1997-2005 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED